diff options
Diffstat (limited to '27911.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | 27911.txt | 11203 |
1 files changed, 11203 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/27911.txt b/27911.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..77272d5 --- /dev/null +++ b/27911.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11203 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Giraffe Hunters, by Mayne Reid + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Giraffe Hunters + +Author: Mayne Reid + +Release Date: January 27, 2009 [EBook #27911] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE GIRAFFE HUNTERS *** + + + + +Produced by Nick Hodson of London, England + + + + +The Giraffe Hunters, by Captain Mayne Reid. + + + +CHAPTER ONE. + +ARRIVAL AT THE PROMISED LAND. + +In that land of which we have so many records of early and high +civilisation, and also such strong evidences of present barbarism,--the +land of which we know so much and so little,--the land where Nature +exhibits some of her most wonderful creations and greatest contrasts, +and where she is also prolific in the great forms of animal and +vegetable life,--there, my young reader, let us wander once more. Let +us return to Africa, and encounter new scenes in company with old +friends. + +On the banks of the Limpopo brightly blazes a hunter's fire, around +which the reader may behold three distinct circles of animated beings. +The largest is composed of horses, the second of dogs, and the lesser or +inner one, of young men, whom many of my readers will recognise as old +acquaintances. + +I have but to mention the names of Hans and Hendrik Von Bloom, Groot +Willem and Arend Van Wyk, to make known that _The Young Yagers_ are +again on a hunting expedition. In the one in which we now encounter +them, not all the parties are inspired by the same hopes and desires. + +The quiet and learned Hans Von Bloom, like many colonial youths, is +affected with the desire of visiting the home of his forefathers. He +wishes to go to Europe for the purpose of making some practical use of +the knowledge acquired, and the floral collections made, while a +_Bush-Boy_ and a _Young Yager_. But before doing so, he wishes to +enlarge his knowledge of natural history by making one more expedition +to a part of Southern Africa he has not yet visited. + +He knows that extensive regions of his native land, containing large +rivers and immense forests, and abounding in a vast variety of rare +plants, lie between the rivers Limpopo and Zambezi, and before visiting +Europe he wishes to extend his botanic researches in that direction. +His desire to make his new excursion amid the African wilds is no +stronger than that of "Groot Willem" Van Wyk, who ever since his return +from the last expedition, six months before, has been anxious to +undertake another in quest of game such as he has not yet encountered. + +Our readers will search in vain around the camp-fire for little Jan and +Klaas. Their parents would not consent to their going so far from home, +on an excursion promising so many hardships and so much danger. +Besides, it was necessary that they should become something better than +mere _Bush-Boys_, by spending a few years at school. + +The two young cornets, Hendrik Von Bloom and Arend Van Wyk, each +endeavouring to wear the appearance of old warriors, are present in the +camp. Although both are passionately fond of a sportsman's life, each, +for certain reasons, had refrained from urging the necessity or +advantage of the present expedition. + +They would have preferred remaining at home and trying to find amusement +during the day with the inferior game to be found near Graaf Reinet,-- +not that they fear danger or were in any way entitled to the appellation +of "cockney sportsmen"; but home has an attraction for them that the +love of adventure cannot wholly eradicate. + +Hendrik Von Bloom could have stayed very happily at home. The +excitement of the chase, which on former occasions he had so much +enjoyed, now no longer attracts him half so much as the smiles of +Wilhelmina Van Wyk, the only sister of his friends Groot Willem and +Arend. + +The latter young gentleman would not have travelled far from the daily +society of little Truey Von Bloom, had he been left to his own +inclinations. But Willem and Hans had determined upon seeking +adventures farther to the north than any place they had yet visited; and +hence the present expedition. + +The promise of sport and rare adventures, added to the fear of ridicule +should they remain at home, influenced Hendrik and Arend to accompany +the great hunter and the naturalist to the banks of the Limpopo. + +Seated near the fire are two other individuals, whom the readers of _The +Young Yagers_ will recognise as old acquaintances. One is the short, +stout, heavy-headed Bushman, Swartboy, who could not have been coaxed to +remain behind while his young masters Hans and Hendrik were out in +search of adventures. + +The other personage not mentioned by name is Congo, the Kaffir. + +The Limpopo River was too far from Graaf Reinet for the young hunters to +think of reaching it with wagons and oxen. The journey might be made, +but it would take up too much time; and they were impatient to reach +what Groot Willem had long called "The Promised Land." + +In order, therefore, to do their travelling in as little time as +possible, they had taken no oxen; but, mounted on good horses, had +hastened by the nearest route to the banks of the Limpopo, avoiding in +place of seeking adventures by the way. Besides their own +saddle-horses, six others were furnished with pack-saddles, and lightly +laden with ammunition, clothing, and such other articles as might be +required. The camp where we now encounter them is a temporary +halting-place on the Limpopo. They have succeeded in crossing the +river, and are now on the borders of that land so long represented to +them as being a hunter's paradise. A toilsome journey is no longer +before them; but only amusement, of a kind so much appreciated that they +have travelled several hundred miles to enjoy it. + +We have stated that, in undertaking this expedition, the youths were +influenced by different motives. This was to a great extent true; and +yet they had a common purpose beside that of mere amusement. The consul +for the Netherlands had been instructed by his government to procure a +young male and female giraffe, to be forwarded to Europe. Five hundred +pounds had been offered for the pair safely delivered either at Cape +Town or Port Natal; and several parties of hunters that had tried to +procure these had failed. They had shot and otherwise killed +camelopards by the score, but had not succeeded in capturing any young +ones alive. + +Our hunters had left home with the determination to take back a pair of +young giraffes, and to pay all expenses of their expedition by this, as +also by the sale of hippopotamus teeth. The hope was not an +unreasonable one. They knew that fortunes had been made in procuring +elephants' tusks, and also that the teeth of the hippopotamus were the +finest of ivory, and commanded a price four times greater than any other +sent to the European market. + +But the capturing of the young camelopards was the principal object of +their expedition. The love of glory was stronger than the desire of +gain, especially in Groot Willem, who as a hunter eagerly longed to +accomplish a feat which had been attempted by so many others without +success. In his mind, the fame of fetching back the two young giraffes +far outweighed the five hundred pound prize to be obtained, though the +latter was a consideration not to be despised, and no doubt formed with +him, as with the others, an additional incentive. + + + +CHAPTER TWO. + +ON THE LIMPOPO. + +During the first night spent upon the Limpopo our adventurers had good +reason for believing that they were in the neighbourhood of several +kinds of game they were anxious to fall in with. + +Their repose was disturbed by a combination of sounds, in which they +could distinguish the roar of the lion, the trumpet-like notes of the +elephant, mingled with the voices of some creature they could not +remember having previously heard. + +Several hours of that day had been passed in searching for a place to +cross the river,--one where the banks were low on each side, and the +stream not too deep. This had not been found until the sun was low down +upon the horizon. + +By the time they had got safely over, twilight was fast thickening into +darkness, and all but Congo were unwilling to proceed farther that +night. The Kaffir suggested that they should go at least half a mile up +or down the river and Groot Willem seconded the proposal, although he +had no other reason for doing so than a blind belief in the opinions of +his attendant, whether they were based upon wisdom or instinct. In the +end Congo's suggestion had been adopted, and the sounds that disturbed +the slumbers of the camp were heard at some distance, proceeding from +the place where they had crossed the river. + +"Now, can you understand why Congo advised us to come here?" asked Groot +Willem, as they listened to the hideous noises that were depriving them +of sleep. + +"No," was the reply of his companions. + +"Well, it was because the place where we crossed is the watering-place +for all the animals in the neighbourhood." + +"That is so, Baas Willem," said Congo, confirming the statement of his +master. + +"But we have not come a thousand miles for the sake of keeping out of +the way of those animals, have we?" asked the hunter Hendrik. + +"No," answered Willem, "we came here to seek them, not to have them seek +us. Our horses want rest, whether we do or not." + +Here ended further conversation for the night, for the hunters becoming +accustomed to the chorus of the wild creatures, took no further notice +of it, and one after another fell asleep. + +Morning dawned upon a scene of surpassing beauty. They were in a broad +valley, covered with magnificent trees, among which were many gigantic +baobabs (_Adansonia digitata_). Wild date-trees were growing in little +clumps; while the floral carpet, spread in brilliant pattern over the +valley, was observed by Hans with an air of peculiar satisfaction. + +He had reached a new field for the pursuit of his studies, and bright +dreams were passing gently through his mind,--dreams that anticipated +new discoveries in the botanical world, which might make his name known +among the savants of Europe. + +Before any of his companions were moving, Groot Willem, accompanied by +Congo, stole forth to take a look at the surrounding country. + +They directed their course down the river. On reaching the place where +they had crossed it, they chanced upon a tableau that even a hunter, who +is supposed to take delight in the destruction of animals, could not +look upon without unpleasant emotions. + +Within the space of a hundred yards were lying five dead antelopes, of a +species Willem had never seen before. Feeding on the carcasses were +several hyenas. On the approach of the hunters, they slowly moved away, +each laughing like a madman who has just committed some horrible +atrocity. + +By the "spoors" seen upon the river-banks, it was evident that both +elephants and lions had visited the place during the night. While +making these and other reconnoissances, Groot Willem was joined by Hans, +who had already commenced his favourite study by making an examination +of the floral treasures in his immediate locality. Arriving up with +Groot Willem, the attention of Hans was at once directed to an +examination of the antelopes, which he pronounced to be elands, but +believed them to be of a new and undescribed variety of this animal. +They were elands; but each was marked with small white stripes across +the body, in this respect resembling "koodoos." + +After a short examination of the spoor, Congo asserted that a troop of +elands had first visited the watering-place, and that while they were +there four bull elephants, also in search of water, had charged with +great speed upon the antelopes. Three or four lions had also joined in +the strife, in which the only victims had been the unfortunate elands. + +"I think we are in a place where we had better make a regular enclosure, +and stop for a few days," suggested Groot Willem, on his return to the +camp. "There is plenty of feed for the horses, and we have proof that +the `drift' where we crossed is a great resort for all kinds of game." + +"I'm of the same opinion," assented Hendrik; "but I don't wish to encamp +quite so close to the crossing as this is. We had better move some +distance off. Then we shall not prevent game from seeking the drift, or +be ourselves hindered from getting sleep. Don't you think we'd better +move little farther up the river?" + +"Yes, yes," was the unanimous answer. + +It was therefore decided that search should be made for a better +camping-ground, where they could build themselves a proper enclosure, or +"kraal." + +After partaking of their first breakfast upon the Limpopo, Groot Willem, +Hans, and Hendrik mounted their horses and rode off up the river, +accompanied by the full pack of dogs, leaving Arend, with Swartboy and +Congo, to take care of the camp. + +For nearly three miles, the young hunters rode along the bank of the +river, without finding any spot where access to the water could be +readily obtained. The banks were high and steep, and therefore but +little visited by such animals as they wished to hunt. At this point +the features of the landscape began to change, presenting an appearance +more to their satisfaction. Light timber, such as would be required for +the construction of a stockade, was growing near the river, which was no +longer inaccessible, though its banks appeared but little frequented by +game. + +"I think this place will suit admirably," said Groot Willem. "We are +only half an hour's ride from the drift, and probably we may find good +hunting-ground farther up stream." + +"Very likely," rejoined Hendrik; "but before taking too much trouble to +build ourselves a big kraal, we had better be sure about what sort of +game is to be got here." + +"You are right about that," answered Willem; "we must take care to find +out whether there are hippopotami and giraffes. We cannot go home +without a pair of the latter. Our friends would be disappointed, and +some I know would have a laugh at us." + +"And you for one would deserve it," said Hans. "Remember how you +ridiculed the other hunters who returned unsuccessful." + +Having selected a place for the kraal, should they decide on staying +awhile in the neighbourhood, the young hunters proceeded farther up the +river, for the purpose of learning something more of the hunting-ground +before finally determining to construct the enclosure. + + + +CHAPTER THREE. + +A TWIN TRAP. + +Not long after the departure of Groot Willem and his companions, Arend, +looking towards a thicket about half a mile from the river, perceived a +small herd of antelopes quietly browsing upon the plain. Mounting his +horse, he rode off, with the intention of bagging one or more of them +for the day's dinner. + +Having ridden to the leeward of the herd, and getting near them, he saw +that they were of the species known as "Duyker," or Divers (_Antelope +grimmia_). Near them was a small "motte" of the _Nerium oleander_, a +shrub about twelve feet high, loaded with beautiful blossoms. Under the +cover of these bushes, he rode up close enough to the antelopes to +insure a good shot, and, picking out one of the largest of the herd, he +fired. + +All the antelopes but one rushed to the edge of the thicket, made a +grand leap, and dived out of sight over the tops of the bushes,--thus +affording a beautiful illustration of that peculiarity to which they are +indebted for their name of Divers. Riding up to the one that had +remained behind, and which was that at which he had fired, the young +hunter made sure that it was dead; he then trotted back to the camp, and +despatched Congo and the Bushman to bring it in. They soon returned +with the carcass, which they proceeded to skin and make ready for the +spit. + +While thus engaged, Swartboy appeared to notice some thing out upon the +plain. + +"Look yonner, Baas Arend," said he. + +"Well, what is it, Swart?" + +"You see da pack-horse dare? He gone too much off from de camp." + +Arend turned and looked in the direction the Bushman was pointing. One +of the horses, which had strayed from its companions, was now more than +half a mile off, and was wandering onwards. + +"All right, Swart. You go on with your cooking. I'll ride after it +myself, and drive it in." + +Arend, again mounting his horse, trotted off in the direction of the +animal that had strayed. + +For cooking the antelope, Congo and Swartboy saw the necessity of +providing themselves with some water; and taking a vessel for that +purpose, they set out for the drift,--that being the nearest place where +they could obtain it. + +They kept along the bank of the river, and just before reaching a place +where they would descend to the water, Congo, who was in the advance, +suddenly disappeared! He had walked on to a carefully concealed pit, +dug for the purpose of catching hippopotami or elephants. + +The hole was about nine feet deep; and after being astonished by +dropping into it, the Kaffir was nearly blinded by the sand, dust, and +other materials that had formed the covering of the pit. + +Congo was too well acquainted with this South African device for killing +large game to be anyways disconcerted by what had happened; and after +becoming convinced that he was uninjured by the fall, he turned his +glance upward, expecting assistance from his companion. + +But Swartboy's aid could not just then be given. The Bushman, amused by +the ludicrous incident that had befallen his rival, was determined to +enjoy the fun for a little longer. Uttering a wild shout of laughter +that was a tolerable imitation of an enraged hyena, Swartboy seemed +transported into a heaven of unadulterated joy. Earth appeared hardly +able to hold him as he leaped and danced around the edge of the pit. + +Never had his peculiar little mind been so intensely delighted; but the +manifestations of that delight were more suddenly terminated than +commenced; for in the midst of his eccentric capers he, too, suddenly +disappeared into the earth as if swallowed up by an earthquake! His +misfortune was similar to that which had befallen his companion. Two +pitfalls had been constructed close together, and Swartboy now occupied +the second. + +It is a common practice among the natives of South Africa to trap the +elephant in these twin pitfalls; as the animals, too hastily avoiding +the one, run the risk of dropping into the other. + +Swartboy and the Kaffir had unexpectedly found a place where this plan +had been adopted; and, much to their discomfiture, without the success +anticipated by those who had taken the trouble to contrive it. + +The cavity into which Congo had fallen contained about two feet of mud +on the bottom. The sides were perpendicular, and of a soapy sort of +clay, so that his attempts at climbing out proved altogether +unsuccessful, thus greatly increasing the chagrin of his unphilosophic +mind. He had heard the Bushman's screams of delight, and the sounds had +contributed nothing to reconcile him to the mischance that had befallen +him. Several minutes passed and he heard nothing of Swartboy. + +He was not surprised at the Bushman's having been amused as well as +gratified by his misfortune. Still, he expected that in time he would +lend assistance and pull him out of the pit. But as this assistance was +not given, and as Swartboy, not satisfied with laughing at his +misfortune appeared also to have gone off and left him to his fate, the +Kaffir became frantic with rage. + +Several more minutes passed, which to Congo seemed hours, and still +nothing was seen or heard of his companion. Had Swartboy returned to +the camp? If so, why had not Arend, on ascertaining what was wrong, +hastened to the relief of his faithful servant? As some addition to the +discomforts of the place, the pit contained many reptiles and insects +that had in some manner obtained admittance, and, like himself, could +not escape. There were toads, frogs, large ants called "soldiers," and +other creatures whose company he had no relish to keep. + +In vain he called, "Swartboy!" and "Baas Arend!" No one came to his +call. The strong, vindictive spirit of his race was soon roused to the +pitch of fury, and liberty became only desired for one object. That was +revenge,--revenge on the man who, instead of releasing him from his +imprisonment, only exulted in its continuance. + +The Bushman had not been injured in falling into the pit, as may be +supposed. After fully comprehending the manner in which his amusement +had been so suddenly brought to a termination, his first thought was to +extricate himself, without asking assistance from the man who had +furnished him with the fun. His pride would be greatly mortified should +the Kaffir get out of his pit, and find him in the other. That would be +a humiliating rencontre. + +In silence, therefore, he listened to Congo's cries for assistance, +while at the same time doing all in his power to extricate himself. He +tried to pull up a sharp-pointed stake that stood in the bottom of the +pit. This piece of timber had been placed there for the purpose of +impaling and killing the hippopotamus or elephant that should drop down +upon it; and had the Bushman succeeded in taking it from the place where +it had been planted, he might have used it in working his own way to the +surface of the earth. This object, however, he was unable to +accomplish, and his mind became diverted to another idea. + +Swartboy had a system of logic, not wholly peculiar to himself, by which +he was enabled to discover that there must be some first cause for his +being in a place from which he could not escape. That cause was no +other than Congo. Had the Kaffir not fallen into a pit, Swartboy was +quite certain that he would have escaped the similar calamity. + +He would have liberated Congo from his confinement, and perhaps +sympathised with his misfortune, after the first ebullitions of his +mirth had been exhausted; but now, on being entrapped himself, he was +only conscious that some one was to blame for the disagreeable incident, +and was unable to admit that this some one was himself. The mishap had +befallen him in company with the Kaffir. It was that individual's +misfortune that had conducted to his own, and this was another reason +why he now submitted to his captivity in profound silence. + +Unlike Congo, he did not experience the soul-harrowing thought of being +neglected, and could therefore endure his confinement with some degree +of patience not possible to his companion. Moreover, he had the hope of +speedy deliverance, which to Congo was denied. + +He knew that Arend would soon return to the camp with the stray horse, +and miss them. The water-vessel would also be missed, and a search +would be made for it in the right direction. No doubt Arend, seeing +that the bucket was taken away from the camp, and finding that they did +not return, would come toward the drift,--the only place where water +could be dipped up. In doing so he must pass within sight of the pits. +With this calculation, therefore, Swartboy could reconcile himself to +patience and silence, whereas the Kaffir had no such consolatory data to +reflect upon. + + + +CHAPTER FOUR. + +IN THE PITS. + +As time passed on, however, and Swartboy saw that the sun was +descending, and that the shades of night would soon be gathering over +the river, his hopes began to sink within him. He could not understand +why the young hunter had not long ago come to release them. Groot +Willem, Hendrik, and Hans should have returned by that time; and the +four should have made an effectual search for their missing servants. +He had remained silent for a long time, under very peculiar +circumstances. But silence now became unbearable, and he was seized +with a sudden desire to express his dissatisfaction at the manner Fate +had been dealing out events,--a desire no longer to be resisted. The +silence was at last broken by his calling out-- + +"Congo, you ole fool, where are you? What for don't you go home?" + +On the Kaffir's ear the voice fell dull and distant; and yet he +immediately understood whence it came. Like himself, the Bushman was in +a living grave! That explained his neglect to render the long-desired +assistance. + +"Lor', Swart! why I waiting for you," answered Congo, for the first time +since his imprisonment attempting a smile; "I don't want to go to the +camp and leave you behind me." + +"You think a big sight too much of yourself," rejoined the Bushman. +"Who wants to be near such a black ole fool as you? You may go back to +the camp, and when you get there jus' tell Baas Hendrik that Swartboy +wants to see him. I've got something particular to tell him." + +"Very well," answered the Kaffir, becoming more reconciled to his +position; "what for you want see Baas Hendrik? I'll tell him what you +want without making him come here. What shall I say?" + +In answer to this question, Swartboy made a long speech, in which the +Kaffir was requested to report himself as a fool for having fallen into +a pit,--that he had shown himself more stupid than the sea-cows, that +had apparently shunned the trap for years. + +On being requested to explain how one was more stupid than the other,-- +both having met with the same mischance,--Swartboy went on to prove that +his misfortune was wholly owing to the fault of Congo, by the Kaffir +having committed the first folly of allowing himself to be entrapped. + +Nothing, to the Bushman's mind, could be more clear than that Congo's +stupidity in falling into the first pit had led to his own downfall into +the second. + +This was now a source of much consolation to him, and the verbal +expression of his wrongs enabled him for a while to feel rather happy at +the fine opportunity afforded for reviling his rival. The amusement, +however, could not prevent his thoughts from returning to the positive +facts that he was imprisoned; that in place of passing the day in +cooking and eating _duyker_, he had been fasting and fretting in a dark, +dirty pit, in the companionship of loathsome reptiles. + +His mind now expanding under the exercise of a startled imagination, he +became apprehensive. What if some accident should have occurred to +Arend, and prevented his return to the camp? What if Groot Willem and +the others should have strayed, and not find their way back to the place +for two or three days? He had heard of such events happening to other +stupid white men, and why not to them? What if they had met a tribe of +the savage inhabitants of the country, and been killed or taken +prisoners? + +These conjectures, and a thousand others, flitted through the brain of +the Bushman, all guiding to the conclusion that, should either of them +prove correct, he would first have to eat the reptiles in the pit, and +then starve. + +It was no consolation to him to think that his rival in the other pit +would have to submit to a similar fate. + +His unpleasant reveries were interrupted by a short, angry bark; and, +looking up to the opening through which he had descended, he beheld the +countenance of a wild dog,--the "wilde honden" of the Dutch Boers. + +Uttering another and a different cry, the animal started back; and from +the sounds now heard overhead, the Bushman was certain that it was +accompanied by many others of its kind. + +An instinctive fear of man led them to retreat for a short distance; but +they soon found out that "the wicked flee when no man pursueth," and +they returned. + +They were hungry, and had the sense to know that the enemy they had +discovered was, for some reason, unable to molest them. + +Approaching nearer, and more near, they again gathered around the pits, +and saw that food was waiting for them at the bottom of both. They +could contemplate their victims unharmed, and this made them courageous +enough to think of an attack. The human voice and the gaze of human +eyes had lost their power, and the pack of wild hounds, counting several +score, began to think of taking some steps towards satisfying their +hunger. + +They commenced scratching and tearing away the covering of the pits, +sending down a shower of dust, sand, and grass that nearly suffocated +the two men imprisoned beneath. + +The poles supporting the screen of earth were rotten with age, and the +whole scaffolding threatened to come down as the wild dogs scampered +over it. + +"If there should be a shower of dogs," thought Swartboy, "I hope that +fool Congo will have his share of it." + +This hope was immediately realised, for the next instant he heard the +howling of one of the animals evidently down in the adjoining pit. It +had fallen through, but, fortunately for Congo, not without injuring +itself in a way that he had but narrowly escaped. The dog had got +transfixed on the sharp-pointed stake, planted firmly in the centre of +the pit, and was now hanging on it in horrible agony, unable to get +clear. + +Without lying down in the mud, the Kaffir was unable to keep his face +more than twelve inches from the open jaws of the dog, that in its +struggles spun round as on a pivot; and Congo had to press close against +the side of the pit, to keep out of the reach of the creature yelping in +his ears. + +Swartboy could distinguish the utterances of this dog from those of its +companions above, and the interpretation he gave to them was, that a +fierce combat was taking place between it and the Kaffir. + +The jealousy and petty ill-will so often exhibited by the Bushman was +not so strong as he had himself believed. His intense anxiety to know +which was getting the best of the fight, added to the fear that Congo +was being torn to pieces, told him that his friendship for the Kaffir +far outweighed the animosity he fancied himself to have felt. + +The fiendish yells of the dogs, the unpleasant situation in which he was +placed, and the uncertainty of the time he was to endure it, were +well-nigh driving him distracted; when just then the wild honden +appeared to be beating a retreat,--the only one remaining being that in +the pit with Congo. What was driving them away? Could assistance be at +hand? + +Breathlessly the Bushman stood listening. + + + +CHAPTER FIVE. + +AREND LOST. + +In the afternoon, when Groot Willem, Hans, and Hendrik returned to the +camp, they found it deserted. + +Several jackals reluctantly skulked off as they drew near and on riding +up to the spot from which those creatures had retired, they saw the +clean-picked bones of an antelope. The camp must have been deserted for +several hours. + +"What does this mean?" exclaimed Groot Willem. "What has become of +Arend?" + +"I don't know," answered Hendrik. "It is strange Swart and Cong are not +here to tell us." + +Something unusual had certainly happened; yet, as each glanced anxiously +around the place, there appeared nothing to explain the mystery. + +"What shall we do?" asked Willem, in a tone that expressed much concern. + +"Wait," answered Hans; "we can do nothing more." + +Two or three objects were at this moment observed which fixed their +attention. They were out on the plain, nearly a mile off. They +appeared to be horses,--their own pack animals,--and Hendrik and Groot +Willem started off towards them to drive them back to the camp. + +They were absent nearly an hour before they succeeded in turning the +horses and driving them towards the camp. As they passed near the drift +on their return, they rode towards the river to water the animals they +were riding. + +On approaching the bank, several native dogs, that had been yelling in a +clump, were seen to scatter and retreat across the plain. The horsemen +thought little of this, but rode on into the river, and permitted their +horses to drink. + +While quietly seated in their saddles, Hendrik fancied he heard some +strange sounds. "Listen!" said he. "I hear something queer. What is +it?" + +"One of the honden," answered Willem. + +"Where?" + +This question neither for a moment could answer, until Groot Willem +observed one of the pits from the edge of which the dogs appeared to +have retreated. + +"Yonder's a pit-trap!" he exclaimed, "and I believe there's a dog has +got into it. Well, I shall give it a shot, and put the creature out of +its misery." + +"Do so," replied Hendrik. "I hate the creatures as much as any other +noxious vermin, but it would be cruel to let one starve to death in that +way. Kill it." + +Willem rode up to the pit and dismounted. Neither of them, as yet, +spoke loud enough to be heard in the pits, and the two men down below +were at this time silent, the dog alone continuing its cries of agony. + +The only thing Willem saw on gazing down the hole was the wild hound +still hanging on the stake; and taking aim at one of its eyes he fired. + +The last spark of life was knocked out of the suffering animal; but the +report of the great gun was instantly followed by two yells more hideous +than were ever uttered by "wild honden." + +They were the screams of two frightened Africans,--each frightened to +think that the next bullet would be for him. + +"Arend!" exclaimed Willem, anxious about his brother, and thinking only +of him. "Arend! is it you?" + +"No, Baas Willem," answered the Kaffir. "It is Congo." + +Through the opening, Willem reached down the butt-end of his long roer, +while firmly clasping it by the barrel. + +The Kaffir took hold with both hands, and, by the strong arms of Groot +Willem, was instantly extricated from his subterranean prison. + +Swartboy was next hauled out, and the two mud-bedaubed individuals stood +gazing at one another, each highly delighted at the rueful appearance +presented by his rival. + +Slowly the fire of anger, that seemed to have all the while been burning +in the Kaffir's eyes, became extinguished, and broad smile broke like +the light of day over his stoical countenance. + +He had been released at length, and was now convinced that no one was to +blame for his protracted imprisonment. + +Swartboy had been punished for his ill-timed mirth, and Congo was +willing to forget and forgive. + +"But where is Arend?" asked Willem, who could not forget, even while +amused by the ludicrous aspect of the two Africans, that his brother was +missing. + +"Don't know, Baas Willem," answered Congo. "I been long time here." + +"But when did you see him last?" inquired Hendrik. + +Congo was unable to tell, for he seemed under the impression that he had +been several days in the bosom of the earth. + +From Swartboy they learnt that soon after their own departure Arend had +started in pursuit of one of the horses seen straying over the plain. +That was the last Swart had seen of him. + +The sun was now low down, and, without wasting time in idle speech, +Hendrik and Groot Willem again mounted their horses, and rode off +towards the place where Arend was last seen. + +They reached the edge of the timber nearly a mile from the camp, and +then, not knowing which way to turn, or what else to do, Willem fired a +shot. + +The loud crack of the roer seemed to echo far-away through the forest, +and anxiously they listened for some response to the sound. It came, +but not in the report of a rifle, or in the voice of the missing man, +but in the language of the forest denizens. The screaming of vultures, +the chattering of baboons, and the roaring of lions were the responses +which the signal received. + +"What shall we do, Willem?" asked Hendrik. + +"Go back to the halting-place and bring Congo and Spoor'em," answered +Willem, as he turned towards the camp, and rode off, followed by his +cousin. + + + +CHAPTER SIX. + +SPOOR'EM. + +The last ray of daylight had fled from the valley of the Limpopo, when +Willem and Hendrik, provided with a torch and accompanied by the Kaffir +and the dog Spoor'em, again set forth to seek for their lost companion. + +The animal answering to the name Spoor'em was a large Spanish +bloodhound, now led forth to perform the first duty required of him in +the expedition. + +The dog, when quite young, had been brought from one of the Portuguese +settlements at the north,--purchased by Groot Willem and christened +Spoor'em by Congo. + +In the long journey from Graaf Reinet, this brute had been the cause of +more trouble than all the other dogs of the pack. It had shown a strong +disinclination to endure hunger, thirst, or the fatigues of the journey; +and had often exhibited a desire to leave its new masters. + +Spoor'em was now led out, in hopes that he would do some service to +compensate for the trouble he had caused. + +Taking a course along the edge of the forest, that would bring them +across the track made by Arend in reaching the place where the horse had +strayed, the spoor of Arend's horse as well as the other's was +discovered. + +The tracks of both were followed into the forest, along well-beaten +path, evidently made by buffaloes and other animals passing to and from +the river. This path was hedged in by a thick thorny scrub, which being +impenetrable rendered it unnecessary for some time to avail themselves +of the instincts of the hound. Congo led the way. + +"Are you sure that the two horses have passed along here?" asked Willem, +addressing himself to the Kaffir. + +"Yaas, Baas Willem," answered Congo. "Sure dey both go here." + +Willem, turning to Hendrik, added, "I wish Arend had let the horse go to +the deuce. It was not worth following into a place like this." + +After continuing through the thicket for nearly half a mile, they +reached a stretch of open ground, where there was no longer a beaten +trail, but tracks diverging in several directions. The hoof-marks of +Arend's horse were again found, and the bloodhound was unleashed and set +upon them. + +Unlike most hounds, Spoor'em did not dash onward, leaving his followers +far behind. He appeared to think that it would be for the mutual +advantage of himself and his masters that they should remain near each +other. The latter, therefore, had no difficulty in keeping up with the +dog. + +Believing that they should soon learn something of the fate of their +lost companion, they proceeded onward, with their voices encouraging the +hound to greater speed. + +The sounds of a contest carried on by some of the wild denizens of the +neighbourhood were soon heard a few yards in advance of them. They were +sounds that the hunters had often listened to before, and therefore +could easily interpret. A lion and a pack of hyenas were quarrelling +over the dead body of some large animal. They were not fighting; for of +course the royal beast was in undisputed possession of the carcass, and +the hyenas were simply complaining in their own peculiar tones. The +angry roars of the lion, and the hideous laughter of the hyenas, +proceeded from a spot only a few yards in advance, and in the direction +Spoor'em was leading them. + +The moon had risen, and by its light the searchers soon beheld the +creatures that were causing the tumult. About a dozen hyenas were +gibbering around a huge lion that lay crouched alongside a dark object +on the ground, upon which he appeared to be feeding. As the hunters +drew nearer, the hyenas retreated to some distance. + +"It appears to be the carcass of a horse," whispered Hendrik. + +"Yes, I am sure of it," answered Willem, "for I can see the saddle. My +God! It is Arend's horse! Where is he?" + +Spoor'em had now advanced to within fifteen paces of where the lion lay, +and commenced baying a menace; as if commanding the lion to forsake his +unfinished repast. An angry growl was all the answer Spoor'em could +obtain; and the lion lay still. + +"We must either kill or drive him away," said Willem. "Which shall we +try?" + +"Kill him," answered Hendrik; "that will be our safest plan." + +Stealing out of their saddles, Willem and Hendrik gave their horses in +charge to the Kaffir, and then proceeded to stalk. With their guns at +full cock they advanced side by side, Spoor'em sneaking along at their +heels. + +They stole up within five paces of the lion, which still held its +ground. The only respect it showed to their presence was to leave off +feeding and crouch over the body of the horse, as though preparing to +spring upon them. + +"Now," whispered Hendrik, "shall we fire?" + +"Yes, yes!--now!" + +Both pulled trigger at the same time, the two shots making but one +report. + +Instinctively each threw himself from the direct line of the creature's +deadly leap. This was done at the moment of firing; and the lion, +uttering a terrific roar, launched itself towards them, and fell heavily +between the two, having leaped a distance of full twenty feet. That +effort was its last, for it was unable to rise again. + +Without taking the trouble to ascertain whether the fierce brute had +been killed outright, they turned their attention to the carcass. + +The horse was Arend's, but there was not the slightest trace of the +rider. Whatever had been his fate, there was no sign of his having been +killed along with his horse. There was still a hope that he had made +his escape, though the finding of the horse only added to their +apprehensions. + +"Let us find out," counselled Hendrik, "whether the horse was killed +where it is now lying, or whether it has been dragged hither by the +lion." + +After examining the ground, Congo declared that the horse had been +killed upon the spot, and by the lion. + +This was strange enough. + +On a further examination of the sign, it was found that one of the +horse's legs was entangled in the rein of the bridle. This explained +the circumstance to some extent, otherwise it would have been difficult +to understand how so swift an animal as a horse should have allowed +itself to be overtaken upon an open plain. + +"So much the better," said Groot Willem. "Arend never reached this +place along with his horse." + +"That's true," answered Hendrik, "and our next move will be to find out +where he parted from his saddle." + +"Let us go back," said Willem, "and more carefully examine the tracks." + +During this conversation, the hunters had reloaded their rifles, and now +remounted for the purpose of riding back. + +"Baas Willem," suggested Congo, "let Spoor'em try 'bout here little +more." + +This suggestion was adopted, and Congo, setting on the hound, proceeded +to describe a larger circle around the spot. + +After reaching a part of the plain where they had not yet been, the +Kaffir called out to them to come to him. + +They rode up, and were again shown the spoor of Arend's horse leading +away from where its carcass was now lying, and in the opposite direction +from the camp. + +It was evident that the horse had been farther off than the spot where +its remains now rested. It had probably lost its rider beyond, and was +on its return to the camp when killed by the lion. + +Once more Spoor'em started along the track, Congo keeping close to his +tail, the two horsemen riding anxiously after. + +But we must return to the camp, and follow the trail of the lost hunter +by a means more sure than even the keen scent of Spoor'em. + + + +CHAPTER SEVEN. + +THE LOST HUNTER. + +As Arend came up to the horse that had wandered from the camp, the +animal had arrived at the edge of an extensive thicket, and was +apparently determined upon straying still farther. To avoid being +caught or driven back, it rushed in among trees, taking a path or trace +made by wild animals. + +Arend followed. + +The path was too narrow to allow of his heading the stray; and, +apprehensive of losing it altogether, the youth followed on in hopes of +coming to a wider track, where he might have a chance of passing the +runaway and turning it towards the camp. + +This hope seemed about to be realised, as the truant emerged from the +thicket and entered upon an open plain clothed with low heath,--the +_Erica vestila_, loaded with white blossoms. + +The hunter was no longer obliged to follow upon the heels of the +runaway,--the horse; and spurring his own steed, he made an attempt to +get past it. But the horse, perhaps inspired by a recollection of the +pack-saddle and its heavy load, broke off into a gallop. + +Arend followed, increasing his own speed in like proportion. When +nearly across the plain, the runaway suddenly stopped and then bolted +off at right angles to the course it had been hitherto pursuing. + +Arend was astonished, but soon discovered the cause of this eccentric +action, in the presence of a huge black rhinoceros,--the borele--which +was making a straight course across the plain, as if on its way to the +river. + +The runaway horse had shied out of its way; and it would have been well +for the horseman if he had shown himself equally discreet. But Arend +Von Wyk was a hunter,--and an officer of the Cape Militia,--and as the +borele passed by him, presenting a fine opportunity for a shot, he could +not resist the temptation to give it one. + +Pulling up his horse, or rather trying to do so, for the animal was +restive in the presence of such danger, he fired. The shot produced a +result that was neither expected nor desired. With a roar like the +bellowing of an angry bull, the monster turned and charged straight +towards the horseman. + +Arend was obliged to seek safety in flight, while the borele pursued in +a manner that told of its being wounded, but not incapacitated from +seeking revenge. + +At the commencement of the chase, there was but a very short distance +between pursuer and pursued; and in place of suddenly turning out of the +track, and allowing the monster to pass by him,--which he should have +done, knowing the defect of vision natural to the rhinoceros,--the young +hunter continued on in a straight line, all the while employed in +reloading his rifle. + +His mistake did not originate in any want of knowledge, or presence of +mind, but rather from carelessness and an unworthy estimate of the +abilities of the borele to overtake him. He had long been a successful +hunter, and success too often begets that over-confidence which leads to +many a mischance, that the more cautious sportsman will avoid. + +Suddenly he found his flight arrested by the thick scrub of thorny +bushes, known in South Africa as the "wait a bits", and the horse he was +riding did wait a bit,--and so long that the borele was soon close upon +his heels. + +There was now neither time nor room to turn either to the right or left. + +The rifle was at length loaded, but there would have been but little +chance of killing the rhinoceros by a single shot, especially with such +uncertain aim as could have been taken from the back of a frightened +horse. + +Arend, therefore, threw himself from the saddle. He had a twofold +purpose in doing so. His aim would be more correct, and there was the +chance of the borele keeping on after the horse, and leaving him an +undisturbed spectator of the chase. + +The field of view embraced by the eyes of a rhinoceros is not large; +but, unfortunately for the hunter, as the frightened horse fled from his +side, it was he himself that came within the circumscribed circle of the +borele's vision. + +Hastily raising the rifle to his shoulder he fired at the advancing +enemy, and then fled towards a clump of trees that chanced to be near +by. + +He could hear the heavy tread of the rhinoceros as it followed close +upon his heels. It seemed to shake the earth. Closer and closer he +heard it, so near that he dared not stop to look around. He fancied he +could feel the breath of the monster blowing upon his back. His only +chance was to make a sudden deviation from his course, and leave the +borele to pass on in its impetuous charge. This he did, turning sharply +to the right, when he saw that he had just escaped being elevated upon +the creature's horn. + +This manoeuvre enabled him to gain some distance as he started off in +the new direction. But it was not long maintained; for the borele was +again in hot pursuit, without any show of fatigue; while the tremendous +exertions he had himself been making rendered him incapable of +continuing his flight much longer. He had just sufficient strength left +to avoid an immediate encounter by taking one more turn, when, +fortunately, he saw before him the trunk of a large baobab-tree lying +prostrate along the ground. It had been blown down by some mighty +storm, and lay resting upon its roots at one end, and its shivered +branches at the other, so as to leave a space of about two feet between +its trunk and the ground. + +Suddenly throwing himself down, Arend glided under the tree, just in +time to escape the long horn, whose point had again come in close +proximity with his posterior. + +The hunter had now time to recover his breath, and, to some extent, his +confidence. He saw that the fallen tree would protect him. Even should +the rhinoceros come round to the other side, he would only have to roll +back again to place himself beyond the reach of its terrible horn. The +space below was ample enough to enable him to pass through, but too +small for the body of a borele. By creeping back and forward he could +always place himself in safety. And this was just what he had to do; +for the enraged monster, on seeing him on the other side, immediately +ran round the roots, and renewed the attack. + +This course of action was several times repeated before the young hunter +was allowed much time for reflection. He was in hopes that the brute +would get tired of the useless charges it was making and either go away +itself, or give him the opportunity. + +In this hope he was doomed to disappointment. The animal, exasperated +with the wounds it had received, appeared implacable; and for more than +an hour it kept running around the tree in vain attempts to get at him. +As he had very little trouble in avoiding it, there was plenty of +opportunity for reflection; and he passed the time in devising some plan +to settle the misunderstanding between the borele and himself. + +The first he thought of was to make use of his rifle. The weapon was +within his reach where he had dropped it when diving under the tree; but +when about to reload it, he discovered that the ramrod was missing! + +So sudden had been the charge of the borele, at the time the rifle was +last loaded, that the ramrod had not been returned to its proper place, +but left behind upon the plain. This was an unlucky circumstance; and +for a time the young hunter could not think of anything better than to +keep turning from side to side, to avoid the presence of the besieger. + +The borele at last seemed to show signs of exhaustion, or, at all +events, began to perceive the unprofitable nature of the tactics it had +been pursuing. But the spirit of revenge was not the least weakened +within it, for it made no move toward taking its departure from the +spot. On the contrary, it lay down by the baobab in a position to +command a view on both sides of the huge trunk, evidently determined to +stay there and await the chance of getting within reach of its victim. + +Thus silently beleaguered, the young hunter set about considering in +what manner he might accomplish the raising of the siege. + + + +CHAPTER EIGHT. + +RESCUED. + +The sun went down, the moon ascended above the tops of the surrounding +trees, yet the borele seemed no less inspired by the spirit of revenge +than on first receiving the injuries it was wishing to resent. + +For many hours the young hunter waited patiently for it to move away in +search of food or any other object except that of revenge; but in this +hope he was disappointed. The pain inflicted by the shots would not +allow either hunger or thirst to interfere with the desire for +retaliation, and it continued to maintain a watch so vigilant that Arend +dared not leave his retreat for an instant. Whenever he made a +movement, the enemy did the same. + +It was a long time before he could think of any plan that would give him +a chance of getting away. One at length occurred to him. + +Although unable to reload the rifle with a bullet, the thought came into +his mind, that the borele might be blinded by a heavy charge of powder, +or so confused by it as to give him an opportunity of stealing away. +This seemed an excellent plan, yet so simple that Arend was somewhat +surprised he had not thought of it before. + +Without difficulty he succeeded in pouring a double quantity of powder +into the barrel; and, in order to keep it there until he had an +opportunity for a close shot, some dry grass was forced into the muzzle. +The chance soon offered; and, taking a deliberate aim at one of the +borele's eyes with the muzzle of the gun not more than two feet from its +head, he pulled trigger. + +With a loud moan of mingled rage and agony, the rhinoceros rushed +towards him, and frantically, but vainly exerted all its strength in an +endeavour to overturn the baobab. + +"One more shot at the other eye," thought Arend, "and I shall be free." + +He immediately proceeded to pour another dose of powder into the rifle, +but while thus engaged a new danger suddenly presented itself. The dry +grass projected from the gun had ignited and set fire to the dead leaves +that were strewed plentifully over the ground. In an instant these were +ablaze, the flame spreading rapidly on all sides, and moving towards +him. + +The trunk of the baobab could no longer afford protection. In another +minute it, too, would be enveloped in the red fire, and to stay by its +side would be to perish in the flames. There was no alternative but to +get to his feet and run for his life. + +Not a moment was to be lost, and, slipping from under the tree, he +started off at the top of his speed. The chances were in his favour for +escaping unobserved by the rhinoceros. But fortune seemed decidedly +against him. Before getting twenty paces from the tree, he saw that he +was pursued. + +Guided either by one eye or its keen sense of hearing, the monster was +following him at a pace so rapid that, if long enough continued, it must +certainly overtake him. + +Once more the young hunter began to feel something like despair. Death +seemed hard upon his heels. A few seconds more, and he might be impaled +on that terrible horn. But for that instinctive love of life which all +feel, he might have surrendered himself to fate; but urged by this, he +kept on. + +He was upon the eve of falling to the earth through sheer exhaustion, +when his ears were saluted by the deep-toned bay of a hound, and close +after it a voice exclaiming-- + +"Look out, Baas Willem! Somebody come yonder!" + +Two seconds more and Arend was safe from further pursuit. The hound +Spoor'em was dancing about the borele's head, by his loud, angry yelps +diverting its attention from everything but himself. + +Two seconds more and Groot Willem and Hendrik came riding up; and, in +less than half a minute after, the monster, having received a shot from +the heavy roer, slowly settled down in its tracks--a dead rhinoceros. + +Willem and Hendrik leaped from their horses and shook hands with Arend +in a manner as cordial as if they were just meeting him after an absence +of many years. + +"What does it mean, Arend?" jocosely inquired Hendrik. "Has this brute +been pursuing you for the last twelve hours?" + +"Yes." + +"And how much longer do you think the chase would have continued?" + +"About ten seconds," replied Arend, speaking in a very positive tone. + +"Very well," said Hendrik, who was so rejoiced at the deliverance of his +friend that he felt inclined to be witty. "We know now how long you are +capable of running. You can lead a borele a chase of just twelve hours +and ten seconds." + +Groot Willem was for some time unspeakably happy, and said not a word +until they had returned to the place where the lion had been killed. +Here they stopped for the purpose of recovering the saddle and bridle +from the carcass of the horse. + +Groot Willem proposed they should remain there till the morning; his +reason being that, in returning through the narrow path that led out to +the open plain, they might be in danger of meeting buffaloes, +rhinoceroses, or elephants, and be trampled to death in the darkness. + +"That's true," replied Arend; "and it might be better to stay here until +daylight, but for two reasons. One is, that I am dying of hunger, and +should like a roast rib of that antelope I shot in the morning." + +"And so should I," said Hendrik, "but the jackals have saved us the +trouble of eating that." + +Arend was now informed of the events that had occurred to his absence, +and was highly amused at Hendrik's account of the misfortune that had +befallen Swartboy and Congo. + +"We are making a very fair commencement in the way of adventures," said +he, after relating his own experiences of the day, "but so far our +expedition has been anything but profitable." + +"We must go farther down the river," said Willem. "We have not yet seen +the spoor of either hippopotamus or giraffe. We must keep moving until +we come upon them. I never want to see another lion, borele, or +elephant." + +"But what is your other reason for going back to camp?" asked Hendrik, +addressing himself to Arend. + +"What would it be?" replied Arend. "Do you suppose that our dear friend +Hans has no feelings?" + +"O, that's what you mean, is it?" + +"Of course it is. Surely Hans will by this time be half dead with +anxiety on our account." + +All agreed that it would be best to go on to the camp; and, after +transferring the saddle and bridle from the carcass of the horse to the +shoulders of Congo, they proceeded onward, arriving in camp at a very +late hour, and finding Hans, as Arend had conjectured, overwhelmed with +apprehension at their long absence. + + + +CHAPTER NINE. + +AN INCIDENT OF THE ROAD. + +Next morning, they broke up their camp and moved down the river, +extending their march into the second day. + +After passing the drift where the Limpopo had been first crossed, Groot +Willem, accompanied by Congo, was riding nearly a mile in advance of his +companions. His object in leading the way so far ahead was to bag any +game worthy of his notice, before it should be frightened by the others. + +Occasionally, a small herd of some of the many varieties of antelopes in +which South Africa abounds fled before him; but these the great hunter +scarce deigned to notice. His thief object was to find a country +frequented by hippopotami and giraffes. + +On his way he passed many of the lofty pandanus or screw pine-trees. +Some of these were covered from top to bottom with parasitic plants, +giving them the appearance of tall towers or obelisks. Underneath one +of these trees, near the river, and about three hundred yards from where +he was riding, he saw a buffalo cow with her calf. The sun was low +down; and the time had therefore arrived when some buffalo veal would be +acceptable both to the men and dogs of the expedition. + +Telling Congo to stay where he was, the hunter rode to the leeward of +the buffalo cow, and, under cover of some bushes, commenced making +approach. Knowing that a buffalo cow is easily alarmed, more especially +when accompanied by her calf, he made his advances with the greatest +caution. Knowing, also, that no animal shows more fierceness and +contempt for danger, while protecting its young, he was anxious to get a +dead shot, so as to avoid the risk of a conflict with the cow, should +she be only wounded. When he had got as close as the cover would allow +him, he took aim at the cow's heart and fired. + +Contrary to his expectation, the animal neither fell nor fled, but +merely turned an inquiring glance in the direction from whence the +report had proceeded. + +This was a mystery the hunter could not explain. Why did the cow keep +to the same spot? If not disabled by the bullet, why had she not gone +off, taking her young one along with her? + +"I might as well have been stalking a tree as this buffalo," thought +Willem, "for one seems as little inclined to move as the other." + +Hastily reloading his roer, he rode fearlessly forward, now quite +confident that the cow could not escape him. She seemed not to care +about retreating, and he had got close up to the spot where she stood, +when all at once the buffalo charged furiously towards him, and was only +stopped by receiving a second bullet from the roer that hit right in the +centre of the forehead. One more plunge forward and the animal dropped +on her knees, and died after the manner of buffaloes, with legs spread +and back uppermost, instead of falling over on its side. Another shot +finished the calf, which was crying pitifully by the side of its mother. + +Congo now came up, and, while examining the calf, discovered that one of +its legs had been already broken. This accounted for the cow not having +attempted to save herself by flight. She knew that her offspring was +disabled, and stayed by it from an instinct of maternal solicitude. + +While Willem was engaged reloading his gun, he heard a loud rustling +among the parasitical plants that loaded the pandanus-tree under which +he and Congo were standing. Some large body was stirring among the +branches. What could it be? + +"Stand clear," shouted Willem, as he swerved off from the tree, at the +same time setting the cap upon his gun. + +At the distance of ten or twelve paces he faced round, and stood ready +to meet the moving object, whatever it might be. Just then he saw +standing before him a tall man who had dropped down from among the +leaves, while Willem's back had been turned towards the tree. + +The dress and general appearance of this individual proclaimed him to be +a native African, but not one of those inferior varieties of the human +race which that country produces. He was a man of about forty years of +age, tall and muscular, with features well formed, and that expressed +both intelligence and courage. His complexion was tawny brown, not +black; and his hair was more like that of a European than an African. + +These observations were made by the young hunter in six seconds; for the +person who had thus suddenly appeared before him allowed no more time to +elapse before setting off from the spot, and in such haste that the +hunter thought he must be retreating in affright. And yet there was no +sign of fear accompanying the act. Some other motive must have urged +him to that precipitate departure. + +There was; and Congo was the first to discover it. The man had gone in +the direction of the river. + +"Water, water!" exclaimed the Kaffir; "he want water." + +The truth of this remark was soon made evident; for, on following the +stranger with their eyes, they saw him rush into the stream, plunge his +head under water and commence filling himself in the same manner as he +would have done, had his body been a bottle! + +Hendrik and Arend, having heard the reports of the roer, feared that +something might have gone wrong, and galloped forward, leaving Hans and +Swartboy to bring up the pack-horses. + +They reached the scene just as the African, after having quenched his +thirst, had returned to the tree where the young hunter and Congo had +remained. + +Without taking the slightest notice of either of the others, the man +walked up to Groot Willem, and, with an air of dignity, natural to most +semi-barbarous people, began making a speech. Grateful for having been +relieved from his imprisonment, he evidently believed that duty required +him to say something, whether it might be understood or not. + +"Can _you_ understand him, Congo?" asked Willem. + +"Yaas, a little I can," answered the Kaffir; and in his own peculiar +manner he interpreted what the African had to say. + +It was simply that he owed his life to Groot Willem, and that the latter +had only to ask for whatever he required, and it should be given him. + +"That is certainly promising a good deal," said the sarcastic Hendrik, +"and I hope that Willem will not be too greedy in his request, but will +leave something for the rest of mankind." + +Hans and Swartboy at this moment came up with the pack-horses; and, +selecting a spot near the place where the cow had been killed, the party +encamped for the night. + +For some time, all hands were busy in gathering firewood and making +other preparations for their bivouac,--among which were the skinning and +cooking of the buffalo calf, duties that were assigned to the Bushman. +During his performance of them, the others, assisted by Congo as +interpreter, were extracting from the tall stranger a full account of +the adventure to which they were indebted for his presence in the camp; +and a strange story it was. + + + +CHAPTER TEN. + +MACORA. + +In the manner of the African there was a certain hauteur which had not +escaped the observation of his hearers. + +This was explained on their learning who and what he was; for his story +began by his giving a true and particular account of himself. + +His name was Macora, and his rank that of a chief. His tribe belonged +to the great nation of the Makololo, though living apart, in a "kraal" +by themselves. The village, so-called, was at no great distance from +the spot where the hunters were now encamped. + +The day before, he had come up the river in a canoe, accompanied by +three of his subjects. Their object was to procure a plant which grew +in that place,--from which the poison for arrows and spears is obtained. +In passing a shallow place in the river, they had attempted to kill a +hippopotamus which they saw walking about on the bottom of the stream, +like a buffalo browsing upon a plain. Rising suddenly to the surface, +the monster had capsized the canoe, and Macora was compelled to swim +ashore with the loss of a gun which once cost him eight elephant's +tusks. + +He had seen nothing of his three companions, since parting with them in +the water. + +On reaching the shore, and a few yards from the bank, he encountered a +herd of buffaloes, cows and young calves, on their way to the river. +These turned suddenly to avoid him, when a calf was knocked down by one +of the old ones, and so severely injured that it could not accompany the +rest in their flight. The mother, seeing her offspring left behind, +turned back and selected Macora as the object of her resentment. The +chief retreated towards the nearest tree, hotly pursued by the animal +eager to revenge the injury done to her young. + +He was just in time to ascend among the branches as the cow came up. +The calf, with much difficulty, succeeded in reaching the tree. Once +there, it could not move away, and the mother would not leave it. This +accounted for Macora's having been found among the branches of the +pandanus. He went on to say, that, during the time he had been detained +in the tree, he had made several attempts to get down and steal off, but +on each occasion had found the buffalo waiting to receive him upon her +horns. He was suffering terribly with thirst when he heard the first +shot fired by Groot Willem, and perceived that assistance was near. + +The chief concluded his narrative by inviting the hunters to accompany +him the next morning to his kraal; where he promised to show them such +hospitality as was in his power. On learning that his home was down the +river, and at no great distance from it, the invitation was at once +accepted. + +"One thing this man has told us," remarked Willem, "which pleases me +very much. We have learnt that there is or has been a hippopotamus near +our camping-ground, and perhaps we shall not have far to travel before +commencing our premeditated war against them." + +"Question him about sea-cows, Cong," said Hendrik. "Ascertain if there +are many of them about here." + +In answer to the Kaffir's inquiries, the chief stated that hippopotami +were not often seen in that part of the river; but that, a day's journey +farther down, there was a large lagoon, through which the stream ran; +there, sea-cows were as plentiful as the stars in the sky. + +"That is just the place we have been looking for," said Willem; "and +now, Congo, question him about camelopards." + +Macora could hold out but little hopes of their meeting giraffes +anywhere on that part of the Limpopo. He had heard of one or two having +been occasionally seen; but it was not a giraffe country, and they were +stray animals. + +"Ask him if he knows where there is such a country," demanded Willem, +who seemed more interested in learning something about giraffes than +either of his companions. + +Macora could not or would not answer this question without taking his +own time and way of doing it. He stated that the native country of +himself and his tribe was far to the north and west; that they had been +driven from their home by the tyranny of the great Zooloo King, +Moselekatse, who claimed the land and levied tribute upon all the petty +chiefs around him. + +Macora further stated that, having in some mysterious manner lost the +good opinion of Sekeletu and other great chiefs of the Makololo,--his +own people,--they would no longer protect him, and that he and his tribe +were compelled to leave their homes, and migrate to the place where he +was now about to conduct his new acquaintances. + +"But that is not what I wish to know," said Groot Willem, who never +troubled himself with the political affairs of his own country, and +therefore cared little about those of an African petty chief. + +On being brought back to the question, Macora stated that he was only +giving them positive proof of his familiarity with the camelopards, +since nowhere were these more abundant than in the country from which he +had been expatriated by the tyranny of the Zooloo chief. It was his +native land, where he had hunted the giraffe from childhood. + +Swartboy here interrupted the conversation by announcing that he had +enough meat cooked for them to begin their meal with; and about ten +pounds' weight of buffalo veal cutlets were placed before the hunters +and their guest. + +Macora, who, to all appearance, had been waiting very patiently while +the cutlets were being broiled, commenced the repast with some show of +self-restraint. This, however, wholly forsook him before it was +finished. He ate voraciously, consuming more than the four young +hunters together. This, however, he did not do without making an +apology for his apparent greed; stating that he had been nearly two days +without having tasted food. + +The supper having at length come to an end, all stretched themselves +around the fire and went to sleep. + +The night passed without their being disturbed; and soon after sunrise +they arose,--not all at the same time,--for one of the party had risen +and taken his departure an hour earlier than the rest. It was Macora, +whom they had entertained the evening before. + +"Here, you Swart and Cong!" exclaimed Arend, when he discovered that the +chief was no longer in the camp, "see if any of the horses are missing. +It is just possible we have been tricked by a false tale and robbed into +the bargain." + +"By whom?" asked Groot Willem. + +"By your friend, the chief. He has stolen himself away, if nothing +else." + +"I'll bet my life," exclaimed Willem, in a more positive tone than the +others had ever yet heard him use, "that that man is an honest fellow, +and that all he has told us is true, though I can't account for his +absence. He is a chief, and has the air of one." + +"Yes, he is a chief, no doubt," said Hendrik, sneeringly. "Every +African in this part of the world is a chief, if he only has a family. +Whether his story be true or not, it looks ugly, his leaving us in this +clandestine manner." + +Hans, as usual, had nothing to say upon a subject of which he knew +nothing; and Swartboy, after making sure that no horses, guns, or other +property were missing, expressed the opinion that he was never so +mystified in his life. + +Nothing was gone from the camp; and yet he was quite certain that any +one speaking a native African language understood by Congo, could not be +capable of acting honestly if an opportunity was allowed him for the +opposite. + +Having allowed their horses an hour to graze, while they themselves +breakfasted upon buffalo veal, our adventurers broke up their bivouac, +and continued their march down the bank of the river. + + + +CHAPTER ELEVEN. + +MACORA'S KRAAL. + +After journeying about three hours, the young hunters came to a place +that gave unmistakable evidence of having been often visited by human +beings. + +Small palm-trees had been cut down, the trunks taken away, and the tops +left on the ground. Elephants, giraffes, or other animals that feed on +foliage would have taken the tops of the trees, and, moreover, would not +have cut them down with hatchets, the marks of which were visible in the +stumps left standing. Half a mile farther on, and fields could be seen +in cultivation. They were evidently approaching a place inhabited by a +people possessing some intelligence. + +"See!" exclaimed Arend, as they rode on, "there's a large body of men +coming towards us." + +All turned to the direction in which Arend was gazing. They saw about +fifty people coming along the crest of a ridge, that trended toward the +north. + +"Perhaps they mean mischief," said Hans. "What shall we do?" + +"Ride on and meet them," exclaimed Hendrik. "If they are enemies it is +not our fault. We have not molested them." + +As the strangers came near, the hunters recognised their late guest, who +was now mounted on an ox and riding in advance of his party. His +greeting, addressed to Groot Willem, was interpreted by Congo. + +"I have invited you to come to my kraal," said he, "and to bring your +friends along with you. I left you early this morning, and have been to +my home to see that preparations should be made worthy of those who have +befriended Macora. Some of my people, the bravest and best amongst +them, are here to bid you welcome." + +A procession was then formed, and all proceeded on to the African +village, which was but a short distance from the spot. On entering it, +a group of about a hundred and fifty women received them with a chant, +expressed in low murmuring tones, not unlike the lullaby with which a +mother sings her child to sleep. + +The houses of the kraal were constructed stockade fashion, in rows of +upright poles, interlaced with reeds or long grass, and then covered +with a plaster of mud. Through these the hunters were conducted to a +long shed in the centre of the village, where the saddles were taken +from their horses, which were afterwards led off to the grazing ground. + +Although Macora's subjects had been allowed but three hours' notice, +they had prepared a splendid feast for his visitors. + +The young hunters sat down to a dinner of roast antelope, _biltongue_, +stews of hippopotamus and buffalo flesh, baked fish, ears of green maize +roasted, with wild honey, stewed pumpkin, melons, and plenty of good +milk. + +The young hunters and all their following were waited on with the +greatest courtesy. Even their dogs were feasted, while Swartboy and +Congo had never in all their lives been treated with so much +consideration. + +In the afternoon, Macora informed his guests that he should give them an +entertainment; and, in order that they should enjoy the spectacle +intended for them, he informed them, by way of prologue, of the +circumstances under which it was to be enacted. + +His statement was to the effect that his companions in the canoe, at the +time it was capsized by the hippopotamus, had reached home, bringing +with them the story of their mishap; that the tribe had afterwards made +a search for their chief, but not finding him, had come to the +conclusion that he had been either drowned or killed by the sea-cow. +They had given him up for lost; and another important member of the +community, named Sindo, had proclaimed himself chief of the tribe. + +When Macora reached home that morning, Sindo had not yet come forth from +his house; and, before he was aware of the chief's reappearance, the +house had been surrounded and the usurper made prisoner. Sindo, fast +bound and guarded, was now awaiting execution; and this was the +spectacle which the hunters were to be treated to. + +It was a scene that none of the young hunters had any desire to be +present at; but, yielding to the importunities of their host, they +accompanied him to the spot where the execution was to take place. This +was in the suburbs of the village, where they found the prisoner fast +tied to a tree. Nearly all the inhabitants of the community had +assembled to see the usurper shot,--this being the manner of death that +had been awarded to him. + +The prisoner was rather a good-looking man, apparently about thirty-five +years of age. No evil propensity was expressed in his features; and our +heroes could not help thinking that he had been guilty of no greater +crime than a too hasty ambition. + +"Can we not save him from this cruel fate?" asked Hans, speaking to +Groot Willem. "I think you have some influence with the chief." + +"There can be no harm in trying," answered Willem. "I'll see what I can +do." + +Sindo was to be shot with his own musket. The executioner had been +already appointed, and all other arrangements made for carrying out the +decree, when Willem, advancing towards Macora, commenced interceding for +his life. + +His argument was, that the prisoner had not committed any great crime; +that had he conspired against his chief for the purpose of placing +himself in authority, it would have been a different affair. Then he +would have deserved death. + +Willem further urged, that had he, Macora, really been lost, some one of +the tribe would have become chief, and that Sindo was not to blame for +aspiring to resemble one who had ruled to the evident satisfaction of +all. + +Macora was then entreated to spare the prisoner's life, and the entreaty +was backed by the promise of a gun to replace the one lost in the river, +on condition that Sindo should be allowed to live. + +For a time Macora remained silent, but at length made reply, by saying +that he should never feel safe if the usurper were allowed to remain in +the community. + +Groot Willem urged that he could be banished from the kraal, and +forbidden to return to it on penalty of death. + +Macora hesitated a little longer; but remembering that he had promised +to grant any favour to the one who had released him from imprisonment in +the tree, he yielded. Sindo's life should be spared on condition of his +expatriating himself at once and forever from the kraal of Macora. + +On granting this pardon, the chief wished all distinctly to understand +that it was done out of gratitude to his friend, the big white hunter. +He did not wish it to be supposed that the prisoner's life had been +purchased with a gun. + +All Macora's subjects, including the condemned man himself, appeared +greatly astonished at the decision, so contrary to all precedent among +his fellow-countrymen. + +The exhibition of mercy, along with the refusal of the bribe, proved to +the young hunters, that Macora had within him the elements of a noble +nature. + +Sindo, accompanied by his family, immediately made departure from the +place, going off to seek a home among kindred tribes, where his ambition +would, no doubt, be exercised with greater caution. + +During the evening, Macora provided a varied entertainment for his +guests. It included a grand feast, with songs and dancing, the latter +done to the sounds of the tom-tom drum, and one-stringed African fiddle. + +All retired for the night with the understanding that the hunters should +the next day be conducted to a place where hippopotami were plentiful. + + + +CHAPTER TWELVE. + +SPYING OUT THE LAND. + +Early next morning, after the hunters had reciprocated Macora's +hospitality by giving him the best breakfast they were capable of +cooking, they started off on their search for sea-cows. Macora, +accompanied by four attendants, acted as guide, while fifty others were +to follow, to assist in the chase. The pack-horses and all other +property were taken along, as they did not intend to return to the +kraal, although the chief earnestly requested them to remain and make +his village their home so long as they remained in the neighbourhood. + +For more than a mile their way led through small plantations of maize, +owned by Macora's subjects, and cultivated by the women and younger +people of the tribe. + +Our adventurers had seen many kraals of Bushmen, also of Bechuana and +Kaffir tribes, and were surprised to observe such evidences of +civilisation so far removed from the teachings and example of the Cape +Colonists. + +On their way down the river, buffaloes were observed in small droves, as +also herds of koodoos and zebras. They had reached a land that gave +good promise of the very adventures they were in search of. + +About five miles from the village they came upon a small open space +thickly covered with grass. Here Macora suggested that they should make +their hunting camp, as the thick growth of timber seen farther down the +river was the resort of every species of game to be found for many miles +around. + +Macora's suggestion was adopted; and his followers soon constructed a +stockade enclosure or kraal, to protect the camp. While this was being +done the young hunters were not idle. + +On the open plain beyond some antelopes were seen grazing, and Hendrik +and Arend went after them for the purpose of providing Macora's people +with food. + +Groot Willem, on the other hand, preferred going towards the timber, +where he had been told there was larger game; and, accompanied by Macora +and four attendants, he started off, leaving Hans with Swartboy and +Congo to take care of the pack-horses and other _impedimenta_, as also +to superintend the building of the kraal. + +Not far from the river-bank, Macora, with Willem, entered a dense forest +standing in a tract of low marshy ground. They had not gone far, before +coming within sight of some reet boks (reed bucks, _Antelope +eleotragus_, Schreber). These were not more than three hundred yards +away; and, from the unconcerned manner in which they continued their +occupation, Groot Willem saw that they had never been hunted by men +carrying fire-arms, although so near to a village of the Makololo. The +innocent creatures were unworthy of a shot from his roer, and he passed +on without molesting them. + +He was soon upon a path that showed signs of being nightly trodden by +large animals, on their way to the water. Amongst other spoor, he was +pleased to observe that of the hippopotamus. Several of these animals +had evidently left the river only two or three hours before, and were +then probably grazing in the neighbourhood. They had been so little +disturbed by man, that, contrary to their usual custom, they came out +upon the land to browse by day. + +Willem was satisfied that they had reached a place where they would be +content to stop for a while; and, without proceeding any farther, he +resolved to commence business by bringing down one of two buffaloes he +saw lying at some distance off, under the shade of a clump of trees. + +Leaving Macora and his men in care of his horse and three dogs which he +had brought with him, he passed to the leeward of the game, trying to +get between the buffaloes and the forest, to head them off in case of +their retreating to the cover. + +Willem was too much of a sportsman to think of stalking upon the +buffaloes, and shooting at them while asleep; and after gaining the +desired station, he whistled for his dogs, for the purpose of giving the +buffaloes a bit of a chase, and trying a shot at them while on the run. +His signal was scarce given, when he heard loud yells from the natives +and the report of Macora's musket. + +Something had gone wrong; for he saw that his own horse was loose and +galloping over the plain, while the natives were scampering in different +directions, evidently under the inspiration of fear. + +The ox upon which Macora sat seemed trying its speed with his horse. +The three dogs had answered his call and were coming towards him. They +were pursued by something,--by a creature that passed over the ground in +a succession of long low leaps, and yet so much time was lost in +gathering strength for each spring, that it did not much lessen the +distance between itself and the animals it was pursuing. + +The buffaloes had started up and gone off at full canter towards the +timber,--passing within less than fifty paces of the spot where Willem +stood. He allowed them to escape unmolested. A creature more deserving +of his attention was rapidly approaching from the other side. + + + +CHAPTER THIRTEEN. + +THE FAITHFUL "SMOKE." + +As yet, the dogs did not seem aware that an enemy was after them. They +had heard their master's whistle, and having been released from the +leash, were only intent in obeying the command. + +On rousing the buffaloes from their repose, they probably thought that +they had been called for the express purpose of pursuing and destroying +them; and, heedless of all else, they followed upon the heels of the +great quadrupeds, passing close to the hunter, who in vain endeavoured +to call them off. He was soon otherwise occupied. + +The creature in pursuit of the dogs, and which had caused the flight of +Macora and his attendants, was a large leopard. It was a female, and +rapidly there passed through the hunter's mind a conjecture of the +circumstances under which the animal was acting. + +It had left its young in its forest lair, and had been on a visit to the +river for water or food. It had not pursued Macora or his attendants, +as its solicitude was for its young, and the dogs were now running in +the direction where these were concealed. + +At sight of Groot Willem, the leopard desisted from its pursuit of the +dogs; and, crouching low upon the ground, crawled towards him,--not +slowly, but with a speed only checked by instinctive caution. As it +advanced, its whole body was covered by the head, its eyes being the +highest part of it presented to the view of the hunter. + +The _felidea_ was now within ten yards of him and rapidly drawing +nearer. Something must be done. The roer was raised to his shoulder, +and with a steady hand and eye,--nerved by the perilous position he was +in,--he drew a fine sight at the creature's snout and fired. + +The shot took effect, for the leopard rolled over, rose up, turned +around two or three times, and for a while seemed to have lost all +consciousness of what had transpired. Its young and its enemy were for +a time apparently forgotten in the agony it was suffering from a broken +jaw. This, however, was but for a few seconds, for the sight of the +hunter soon after aroused it to a perfect realisation of all that had +taken place. + +Willem, after firing, had run off to about fifty paces, and then stopped +to reload. While so engaged he kept his eye fixed upon the leopard. It +was again coming towards him, no longer with the caution it had before +exhibited, but in a manner that showed its whole animal nature was +absorbed by the spirit of revenge. + +By the time he had placed the bullet in the barrel of his gun and driven +it home, the brute was close upon him. There was not time for him to +withdraw the ramrod, much less to put on a cap. Grasping his roer by +the barrel, he prepared to defend himself, intending to use the weapon +as a club. The enraged creature was about to make a spring upon him, +when assistance came from a quarter altogether unexpected. + +One of the dogs--a large bull-dog called "Smoke"--had not followed the +buffaloes to cover. It had obeyed its master's command when called back +from the chase. Just as the leopard was crouching upon the earth to +gather force for the final spring, Smoke seized it by one of the hind +legs. Not a second of time was lost by Willem. One more chance for +life had been thus given him, and he hastened to avail himself of it. + +The hammer of the lock was thrown back and a cap placed on the nipple in +less time than nine out of ten well-drilled soldiers could have +performed the same feat; but by the time it was done, and the gun +brought to his shoulder, poor Smoke was lying in his death-struggle +along the grass. + +The _felidea_ had turned to renew the attack on its human enemy. One +second more, and its huge body would have been launched against him,-- +its sharp claws buried in his flesh. + +He pulled trigger and sprang backwards. A cloud of smoke rolled before +his eyes, and, as this cleared away, he saw the leopard laid out along +the earth by the side of the wounded dog,--like the latter, kicking out +its legs in the last throes of death. + +On looking for his companions, Willem saw that Macora and his men, +having stopped at a distance of about five hundred yards off, had +witnessed his victory. The chief was now hastening towards him on foot, +and was soon by his side, when, pointing to the ox about half a mile +away, he tried to make Willem understand that that animal had carried +him unwillingly away from his friend. + +Perceiving all danger was over, the others came up; when, by signs, the +big hunter gave them to understand that he wanted the hide taken off the +leopard. The four attendants went to work with their short assagais, in +a manner that told him he would not have long to wait for a beautiful +leopard skin, as a trophy of his victory, as also a memento of the +danger through which he had passed. + +He himself turned his attention to the wounded dog, which was still +moaning on the ground, and looking at him with an expression that seemed +to say, "Why do you not first come and assist me." + +Poor Smoke had sacrificed his own life to save that of his master. The +creature's back was broken, and it was otherwise severely injured. It +was evident that nothing could be done for it. The dog must die, and +the great heart of Groot Willem was sorely afflicted. + +Turning to Macora, he observed that the chief had reloaded his musket. +Willem pointed to the dog's head and then to the gun. + +The chief took the hint and raised the weapon to his shoulder. + +Groot Willem turned away with his eyes full of tears, and went off in +pursuit of his horse. + + + +CHAPTER FOURTEEN. + +THE LAGOON. + +On returning to the camp, they found that Hendrik and Arend had been +successful in their chase of the antelopes, and the greater part of two +were cooking over a large fire. + +A quantity of felled timber had been brought to the ground for +construction of the kraal, and the work of building it had already +commenced. + +For the labour of his followers Macora would accept nothing but a small +quantity of coffee, a bottle of Schiedam and some tobacco, and in the +evening he took his departure, after seeing his friends safely +established in their camp. + +Three of his people were left with the hunters, with orders to make +themselves useful in whatever way they could be employed. This addition +to the company was, however, a source of great annoyance to the Bushman. +Any communication made to them required the assistance of his rival, +Congo. + +Congo had others under him,--people to whom he gave instructions and +commands. Swartboy had not, and was, therefore, very discontented with +the arrangements. + +"You and I must do something to-day," said Arend to Hendrik, as they +were eating their first breakfast at the new camping-place. + +"Yes," replied Hendrik, "Willem has one day the start of us in +adventures, but I dare say fortune will favour us ere long." + +"She has favoured us all I think," said Willem. "How could we have a +better prospect of success? There is apparently an abundance of game; +and we have found people willing to assist us in getting at it,--willing +to perform most of the toil and leave us all of the sport." + +"You are quite right," said Hendrik; "our brightest hopes could not have +been crowned by a more favourable commencement, although two days ago we +were repining. What do you say, Swartboy?" he added, turning to the +Bushman; "are you content?" + +"I berry much content, Baas Hendrik," answered Swartboy, with an +expression that did not confirm his words. + +That day the young hunters, leaving Swartboy and the Kaffir in charge of +the camp, made a visit to the lagoon, where they expected to find +hippopotami. + +They passed by the place where Groot Willem had killed the leopard, and +observed that the bones of that animal, mingled with those of the +faithful Smoke, were scattered over the ground, clean-picked of their +flesh by the jackals and hyenas. + +Half a mile farther on they reached the lagoon; and while riding along +its shore, they all pulled up to listen to an unfamiliar and +indescribable sound, that seemed to proceed from two dark objects just +visible above the surface of the water. They were the heads of a brace +of sea-cows. The animals were making towards them, uttering loud cries +that could not be compared with anything the hunters had previously +heard. Any attempt to kill them in the water would only have resulted +in a waste of ammunition; for, with only the eyes and nose above the +surface, there was no chance for a bullet to strike them with fatal +effect. + +The monsters showed some intention of coming out and making war; but, on +getting nearer, they changed their design, and, turning about, +floundered off out of reach. + +Before proceeding many yards farther, they saw three other hippopotami, +this time not in the water, but out upon the plain. They were browsing +on the grass, unconscious that an enemy was near. + +"Let us get between them and the water," suggested Willem. "By that +means we will make sure of them." + +Riding forward at a sharp pace, the hunters succeeded in this design; +and, for a time, the retreat of the hippopotami appeared impossible. + +Instinct does not lead these animals to flee from a foe. They only make +for the water without regard to the position of the enemy. + +On the first alarm, therefore, the three hippopotami started for the +lagoon, going at a heavy rolling pace, and much faster than might have +been supposed possible for creatures of such ungainly shape. As they +ran in a direct line, the hunters were compelled to glide out of their +way, or run the risk of being trodden under foot. + +Hans and Groot Willem were together; and, as soon as the broad side of a +hippopotamus came fairly before them, both fired at the same beast, +taking aim behind the shoulder. Hendrik and Arend fired about at the +same time at another. + +Onward rolled the immense masses towards the river, but before reaching +it the one to which Hans and Willem had devoted their attention was seen +to go unsteadily and with less speed. Before arriving at the bank, it +gave a heavy lurch, like a water-logged ship, and fell over upon its +side. Two or three abortive efforts were made to recover its feet, but +these soon subsided into a tremulous quivering of its huge frame, that +ended in the stillness of death. + +Its two companions plunged into the water, leaving Hendrik and Arend a +little chagrined by the failure of their first attempt at killing a +hippopotamus. + +Hans and Groot Willem had no pretensions to military prowess, and the +first was generally absorbed in some subject connected with his +botanical researches. But he could claim his share in killing a +hippopotamus under circumstances no more favourable than the two who had +allowed their game to escape. + + + +CHAPTER FIFTEEN. + +HIPPOPOTAMI. + +Herodotus, Aristotle, Diodorus, and Pliny have all given descriptions +more or less correct of the hippopotamus, river-horse, or zeekoe +(sea-cow) of the South African Dutch. + +So great has been the interest taken in this animal, of which European +people have long read, but never until lately seen, that the Zoological +Society cleared 10,000 pounds in the year of the Great Exhibition of +1851, by their specimens exhibited in the gardens at Regent's Park. + +Hippopotami procured from Northern Africa were not uncommon in the Roman +spectacles. Afterwards, the knowledge of them became lost to Europe for +several hundred years; and, according to the authority of several +writers, they entirely disappeared from the Nile. + +Several centuries after they had been shown in Rome and Constantinople, +it was stated that hippopotami could not be transported alive to a +foreign country; but the progress of civilisation has refuted this +erroneous hypothesis, and the harsh, heavy sound of its voice, since +May, 1850, has been familiar to the frequenters of a London park. + +According to Michael Boyn, the hippopotamus has been found in the rivers +of China. Marsden has placed them in Sumatra, and others say they exist +in the Indus, but these statements have never been sustained by +well-authenticated facts, and the creature is now believed to be +exclusively a native of Africa. + +Monsieur Desmoulins describes two species,--one the _H. Capensis_, or +the hippopotamus of the Cape, and the _H. Senegalensis_ of the Senegal +river. + +How the animal obtained its name would be difficult to imagine, since a +quadruped more unlike a horse could hardly exist. + +When in the water, the hippopotamus can place its eyes, ears, and nose +on a level with the surface, and thus see, hear, and breathe, with but +little danger of being injured by a shot. It is often ferocious in this +element, where it can handle itself with much ease; but on dry land it +is unwieldy, and, conscious of its awkwardness, it is rather timid and +sometimes cowardly. + +These huge creatures are supposed to serve a good purpose by uprooting +and destroying large water-plants that might otherwise obstruct the +current of the stream and hinder the drainage of the surrounding +country. + +The hide of the hippopotamus is used by the natives for many purposes. +Although soft when stripped off, it becomes so hard, when thoroughly +dry, that the Africans manufacture spears and shields of it. + +Many of the Cape colonists are very fond of what they call "zeekoe +speek," which is a portion of the flesh salted and preserved. + +The greatest value which the hippopotamus has, in the eyes of man, is +found in its teeth,--its large canine tusks being the finest ivory +known, and much prized by the dentists. It keeps its colour much +better, and lasts longer than any other used in the manufacture of +artificial teeth. + +Tusks of the hippopotamus are sometimes found sixteen inches in length, +and weighing as much as a dozen pounds. Travellers have even affirmed +that some have been seen measuring twenty-six inches in length; but no +specimens of this size have as yet been exhibited in the museums of +Europe. + +The hide of a full-grown hippopotamus is thicker than that of the +rhinoceros; otherwise, it very much resembles the latter. Its thickness +protects the animal against the poisoned arrows and javelins of the +natives. But for this, it would soon become extinct in the rivers of +Africa, since, unlike most animals, there is no difficulty in +approaching the hippopotamus within bow-shot distance. It can only be +killed by the natives after a great deal of trouble combined with +ingenuity. + +The plan generally adopted is, by digging pits in places where the +hippopotami are known to pass in leaving the water to feed on the +herbage of the neighbouring plain. These pits have to be dug in the +rainy season, when the ground is soft; for during the dry months the +earth becomes so hard as to resist the poor implement used by the +natives in place of a spade. The pit is concealed with much care, and +as months may pass without a hippopotamus straying into the trap, it may +be imagined how strong an effort of perseverance and patience is +required in capturing one of these amphibious creatures. + +Another method of killing them is by suspending heavy pointed beams over +their paths, where they proceed from the river to the meadows adjoining. +These beams are elevated thirty or forty feet high, by a line which +extends across the sea-cow's track. This line is connected with a +trigger, and when rudely dragged by the force of the moving body, the +beam descends upon the animal's back, burying the sharp point in its +flesh. + +The use of fire-arms is now becoming general among the natives of +Africa; and, as the value of hippopotamus ivory well repays the trouble +of procuring it, it is not unreasonable to suppose that the ungainly +animal, now one of the commonest sights in the rivers of Southern +Africa, will soon become one of the rarest. + + + +CHAPTER SIXTEEN. + +HUNTING HIPPOPOTAMI. + +The hippopotamus killed by Groot Willem and Hans was a fine specimen,--a +bull full-grown and with teeth and tusks large and perfect. + +Measuring it with the barrel of his roer, Willem pronounced it to be +sixteen feet in length; and he estimated its circumference around the +body at but one foot less. + +Leaving it where it had fallen, they rode to another part of the lagoon. +The fine hippopotami they had seen inspired them with a cheerful +prospect for the future,--as far as hunting that species of game was +concerned,--but a still brighter one was in store for them. + +Not half a mile from where the first was killed, they reached a small +pool about four feet in depth. Seven hippopotami were wallowing within +it, and others were seen grazing the low swampy ground not far-away. +They had been so little molested by man that they were not afraid of +feeding by daylight. Those in the pool were wholly at the mercy of the +hunters; for they had not the courage to leave it; and the water was not +of sufficient depth either to conceal or protect them. + +For nearly half an hour the four young hunters stood by the side of the +pool, loading and firing whenever a favourable opportunity presented. +The seven huge creatures were then left dead or dying, and the hunters +returned to their kraal. + +Macora was waiting for them, having come over for the purpose of making +a "morning call." As a present to the young hunters, he had brought +them a milch cow, for which they were very thankful. + +The cow was consigned to the keeping of Swartboy, who had strict +injunctions to look well after it. "That cow is worth more to us than +either of the horses," remarked Hendrik to the Bushman, "and I would not +trust it to the keeping of Congo; but I know it will be safe with you." + +Swartboy was delighted. + +When Macora was told that they had that morning killed eight +hippopotami, he became roused to a state of tremendous excitement. Two +of his attendants were despatched immediately to his village, to convey +the pleasing intelligence to his people, that an unlimited amount of +their favourite food was waiting for them. + +Having done enough for one day, the hunters reposed in the shade of +their tent, until about two hours before sunset, when they were roused +by the arrival of nearly three hundred people, men, women, and children, +of Macora's tribe,--all anxious to be led to the bodies of the +hippopotami. + +Groot Willem was afraid that the disturbance made by so many people +would drive every sort of game from the neighbourhood, and that they +would have to move their camp. But knowing this argument would not be +strong enough to convince several hundred hungry people that so large a +quantity of good food should be wasted, no objection was made to +conducting them to the scene of the morning's sport. + +Groot Willem and Hendrik, attended by Congo, were soon in their saddles +prepared for a night's shooting at the lagoon. They started off, +accompanied by Macora and all his following, leaving Hans and Arend to +take care of the kraal. + +On reaching the place where the first hippopotamus had been killed in +the morning, a flock of vultures and a pack of jackals were driven from +the carcass; and several of the natives stopped to prevent these +carnivora devouring any more of the animal's body, by appropriating it +to themselves. + +Obeying the instructions of their chief, Macora's followers had brought +with them long and strong rheims,--that is, cords made of rhinoceros +hide,--and, on reaching the pool in which the seven dead hippopotami +were lying, Macora gave orders for the carcasses to be hauled out. + +This work, under ordinary circumstances, would have been next to +impossible; but taking into consideration the flatness of the ground, +and the united strength of some hundred and fifty men capable of +handling a rope, the thing was soon accomplished. + +The task of skinning and cutting up then commenced; while the women and +children kindled fires and made other preparations for a grand banquet. + +Until a late hour of the night, the natives remained at work. All the +flesh not required for immediate use was separated into long slips, to +be dried in the sun, and thus converted into _biltongue_, while the +whole of the teeth were to remain the property of those who had killed +the hippopotami. + +The two hunters, Groot Willem and Hendrik, on that night had not far to +travel in order to obtain a sufficiency of their favourite sport. + +Attracted by the odour of the slain pachyderms, lions, hyenas, and +jackals came prowling about the pool, loudly expressing their +disapprobation of the fact that they themselves had not been invited to +partake of the feast. Notwithstanding the large number of human beings +collected upon the spot, the hyenas came close up, and, with deafening +roars, threatened to make an attack. + +The guns of Groot Willem and Hendrik were, for a time, kept constantly +cracking, and the ugly brutes at length grew more wary, betaking +themselves to a safer distance. + +The hunters had no desire to lose time or ammunition, in mere wanton +destruction of life. They only desired to kill such game as might +contribute towards remunerating them for the long journey; and they soon +ceased firing at hyenas and jackals. Leaving the pool, they walked +along the shore of the lagoon, towards the ground where they had seen +the hippopotami during the earlier hours of the day. + +Night being the usual time for those animals to feed, the youths +calculated upon making an addition to the list of their prizes,--nor +were they disappointed. + +Half a mile from the spot where Macora and his tribe had been left +feasting, was an open plain, lit by the beams of a brilliant moon. Ten +or fifteen dark objects were seen moving slowly over its surface; and +leaning forward in their saddles, the hunters could see that they were +hippopotami. They rode gently towards them. + +The animals, entirely unacquainted with the dangerous character of those +who were approaching, neither stirred from the spot nor took any notice +of the horsemen, until the latter were within close range of them. + +"That seems to be one of the biggest of them," whispered Groot Willem, +pointing to a large bull that was browsing at less than a hundred paces +off. "I shall make sure of him. You, Hendrik, take another, and let us +both fire together." + +Willem, as he spoke, raised the heavy death-dealing roer to his +shoulder. Taking aim for the centre of the head, he fired. The next +moment, the monster was seen staggering backwards, drawing its shattered +head along the ground. + +It was not thinking of a retreat to the water,--of retiring through fear +of further danger, or of anything else. It was in the agonies of death! + +This manner of action was not long sustained, for after trailing about +ten yards from where it was struck, it fell heavily on the earth and +turned over on one side, to move no more in life. + +Hendrik had fired almost at the same instant of time; but for some +seconds, the creature to which his attention had been directed, made no +acknowledgment of the favour. It started off, and, along with the +others, made straight towards the lagoon. + +For a time, Hendrik was again chagrined to think that the rival hunter +had been more successful than himself. His chagrin, however, was not +destined to long continuance; for on their way to the water, one of the +hippopotami was observed to tumble over in its tracks. + +After loading their guns, the horsemen rode up to the prostrate animal +and found it struggling to rise. The bullet from Hendrik's rifle had +entered its right shoulder; and another from the same gun now put a +period to its struggles as well as existence. + +The two hunters, not yet contented with their success, took cover under +a cluster of trees; and, dismounting from their horses, lay in wait to +see if the hippopotami would again oblige them by coming out upon the +plain. Neither in this watch were they disappointed. Occasionally, +they could hear the harsh bellowing of the animals as they came to the +surface of the water, and before long, the bodies of three huge monsters +were seen moving slowly towards them. Reserving fire until one came +within a few yards of their position, both hunters discharged their +pieces almost simultaneously. + +With a cry that resembled the combined snorting of a hog and the +neighing of a horse, the "zeekoe" faced back towards the lagoon; but, +instead of moving off, it commenced turning slowly round and round, as a +dog may be sometimes seen to do before laying himself down to repose. +In a similar fashion did the hippopotamus lie down to rise no more. + +Three others were shot on that same night, making fourteen hippopotami +killed within twenty-four hours. This was a greater number, so Macora +said, than had been killed by his own people within the two preceding +years. + + + +CHAPTER SEVENTEEN. + +TO THE GIRAFFE COUNTRY. + +After passing some four or five weeks in hippopotamus hunting, Groot +Willem became anxious to engage in the real business for which he had +undertaken the hunting expedition. + +They had collected more than seven hundred pounds' weight of the finest +ivory, but this success did not hinder them from becoming weary of a +pursuit that was no longer amusement, but business. + +From several conversations held with Macora about giraffes, they had +learnt that the young of those animals could not be taken alive without +the greatest ingenuity and trouble. + +Where camelopards are discovered they can easily be run down and shot; +but to secure the young unharmed, is a different affair, and an +undertaking, which, from Macora's account, promised to occupy all the +time that the hunters wished to remain away from Graaf Reinet. + +Groot Willem was anxious to secure the name, fame, and reward, now +depending on the delivery of the two young giraffes to the Dutch Consul. +Hendrik and Arend wished to return to their sweethearts; and Hans was +longing to under take his intended voyage to Europe. + +Under these circumstances, a proposal from Willem, that they should make +a move, was well received by all. + +When the intention and object of their leaving was made known to Macora, +the chief seemed in much trouble. + +"I cannot allow you to go alone," said he; "there would be danger in +your journey to my native land, perhaps death. Instead of capturing +camelopards alive, you might leave your bones to bleach upon the plain. +You must not go alone. Though we may not procure what you are in search +of, I shall be your companion, and my best warriors shall attend you. +The tyrant Moselekatse may destroy us all, but I will go. Macora will +not allow his friends to encounter the peril without sharing it with +them. To-morrow I shall be ready with all my men." + +Such was the substance of Macora's speech, as interpreted by Congo; and +the young hunters, much as they respected the chief for his many acts of +kindness towards them, were gratified by this new proof of his +friendship. + +He proposed to forsake his home and undertake an expedition of nearly +two hundred miles, in which he had nothing to gain and everything to +lose. This he was willing to do, out of gratitude to one whom fate had +brought to his assistance through the merest accident. + +Macora's offer was not rejected; and preparations for the journey were +immediately commenced. + +The ivory obtained from the hippopotami was stored away for safe keeping +until their return. + +This was about the only preparation for a departure our adventurers had +to make; but such was not the case with Macora's warriors. Poisoned +arrows had to be prepared, bows and shields repaired, and assegais +sharpened. + +On the morning of the next day after Macora had determined on the +journey, he led forth from his village fifty-three of his best men; and +a start was made towards the North. + +Several oxen were taken along, laden with dried hippopotamus flesh, +crushed maize, and other articles of food to be used on the journey. +Several cows were also driven along to yield a supply of milk. + +One of the pack-horses belonging to our hunters had been placed at the +disposal of the chief; and on this he rode, generally keeping close by +the side of Groot Willem. + +Owing to the nature of the country, and the inability of the oxen for +fast travelling, their progress was but slow. + +They found plenty of game along the route, but none of it was pursued +for the sake of amusement. Only a sufficient quantity was killed to +provide the camp with fresh meat, and no time was lost in procuring it, +as antelopes were constantly coming within shot of the hunters, as they +moved along the line of march. + +Only one incident worthy of notice occurred during the journey, in their +camp of the sixth night after starting. One of the Makololo had risen +to put some fresh fagots on a fire burning near him. Placing his hand +upon the ground for the purpose of picking up a piece of wood, he +suddenly started back, at the same time uttering a cry of terror. + +Several of his companions sprang to their feet; and, for a moment, a +scene of confusion ensued that baffled every attempt on the part of the +young hunters to obtain an explanation of it. At length, it transpired +that a snake had caused the commotion. One of about eight feet in +length was dragged up to the light of the fire and submitted to +examination. It was writhing in the agonies of death. Its head had +been crushed by a blow. Its colour, which was nearly black, left no +doubt in the minds of the natives as to the nature of the reptile they +had killed. + +"Picakholu! picakholu!" exclaimed several at the same time, and their +attention was immediately turned to the man who had first made its +acquaintance. + +He exhibited two deep scratches on the back of his right hand. On +beholding them, his companions uttered a cry of commiseration, and stood +gazing at the unfortunate man with an expression that seemed to say: +"_You must surely die_." + +His colour soon changed to a deeper brown. Then his fingers and lips +began to move spasmodically, and his eyes assumed a fixed and glassy +expression. + +In about ten minutes from the time he had been bitten, he seemed quite +unconscious of anything but agony; and would have rolled into the fire, +had he not been held back by those around him. + +In less than half an hour, he was dead,--dead, while the body of the +serpent with the mangled head was still writhing along the grass. + +The Makololo was buried at sunrise, three hours after death; and so +virulent is the poison of the picakholu that, ere the body was deposited +in the grave, it was already in a state of decomposition! + + + +CHAPTER EIGHTEEN. + +A GIRAFFE CHASE. + +In the evening of the twelfth day after leaving the Limpopo, they +reached a small river, which Macora called the Luize. He informed the +hunters, that one day's journey down this stream would take him to the +ruins of the village where he had been born and had lived until within +the last two or three years, and his desire to see his native place was +about to be gratified. + +On one thing Macora could congratulate himself. The chief Moselekatse, +by driving him from his country, had profited but little. All the +Makololo cattle and other objects of plunder had been safely got away +out of reach of the robber chief. None of Macora's people had remained +in the land, so that there was no one to pay tribute to the conqueror; +and the country had been left to the undisturbed possession of the wild +beasts. + +Macora's tribe were not now living in a conquered condition; nor were +they now prevented from paying a visit to their former home. + +The plan proposed by the Makololo chief for catching the young giraffes, +was to build a _hopo_ or trap, in some convenient place where a herd of +giraffes might be driven into it,--the old ones killed and the young +ones secured alive. + +No better plan could be devised than this, and it was unanimously +adopted. + +A site for the _hopo_ has to be chosen with some judgment, so that +labour may be saved in its construction; and, satisfied that the chief +would act for the best, the hunters determined on leaving to him all the +arrangements regarding it. + +A suitable place for the trap, Macora remembered having seen, a few +miles down the river; and thither they repaired. + +On the way, they passed the ruins of the deserted village, and many of +the natives recognised amid the heaps of rubbish the places that had +once been their homes. + +Five miles farther down, they reached the place which was to be enclosed +as a hopo. It was a narrow valley or pass, leading from a large forest +to the river-bank,--and the variety and quantity of spoor over its +surface, proved that most animals of the country daily passed through +it. + +The forest consisted chiefly of mimosa-trees, whose leaves are the +favourite food of the giraffe. Plenty of other timber was growing near, +such as would be needed in constructing the required inclosure. + +Macora promised that his people should go to work on the following day; +when pits should be dug and trees felled for the fence of the hopo. + +Willem inquired if they had not better first make sure that giraffes +were in the neighbourhood, before expending their labour in constructing +the trap. This Macora declared was not necessary. He was quite certain +that they would be found by the time the trap was ready for receiving +them. He also advised the hunters to refrain from molesting any +giraffes they might see before the inclosure should be completed, which, +according to his calculation, would be in about two weeks. + +The hunters now began to understand the difficulties of the task they +had undertaken, and were thankful for the good fortune that had brought +them the assistance of the Makololo chief. But for him and his people, +it would have been idle for them to have attempted taking the giraffes +alive. + +Well mounted, they might ride them down and shoot as many as they +pleased, but this would have been but poor sport; and even Groot Willem +would, in due time, have got tired of it. It was not for this they had +come so far. + +Next morning, the work of making the hopo was commenced; and to inspire +the young hunters with the hope that the labour would not be in vain, +Macora showed them the spoor of a drove of giraffes that had visited the +river during the night. + +The chief would not allow his guests to take any part in the toil, and +unwilling to be idle, Groot Willem, Hendrik, and Arend determined on +making an excursion down the river. + +Hans remained behind, content in the pursuit of his botanical studies, +joined to the amusement of killing antelopes, and other game for the use +of Macora's workmen. + +Swartboy remained with him. + +Wishing to be as little encumbered as possible on an excursion, intended +to last only for a couple of days, Willem and his companions took with +them but one horse, besides those for the saddle. This was in the care +of Congo, who, of course, followed his master, "Baas Willem." + +Nothing could be more beautiful than the scenes passed through on the +first day of their hunt. Groves of palms, and other trees, standing +over flower-clad plains on which gnoos, hartebeests, and other antelopes +were browsing in peace. A flock of gayly-plumaged birds seemed at home +in every tree; and everything presented to their view was such as fancy +might paint for a hunter's paradise. On that day, our adventurers had +their first view of the lordly giraffe. Seven of those majestic +creatures were seen coming from some hill that stretched across the +plain. + +"Don't move," exclaimed Hendrik, "and perhaps they will stray near +enough for us to get a shot before we are discovered." + +On came the graceful animals across the sunlit plain, like living towers +throwing long shadows before them. The trees in perspective seemed +lower than their crested heads. When within about two hundred yards of +the hunters, the latter were discovered by them. Turning suddenly in +their tracks, the giraffes commenced a rapid retreat. + +"Our horses are fresh. Let us run them down," exclaimed Willem. "In +spite of what Macora has said, I must kill a giraffe!" + +The three leaped into the saddles, and started in pursuit of the flying +drove, leaving Congo in charge of the pack-horse. + +For some time, the horsemen could not perceive that they were gaining on +the camelopards trotting before them in long shambling strides. They +were not losing ground, however, and this inspired them to greater +speed. + +When the chase had been continued for about four miles, and the horses +began to show signs of exhaustion, the pace of the giraffes was also +observed to have become slower. They, also, were distressed by the rate +at which they had been moving. + +"One of them is mine," shouted Willem, as he spurred forward in a final +charge. + +A huge stallion, exhibiting more signs of distress than the others, had +fallen into the rear. The hunters soon came up with him; and, +separating him from the herd, they fired a volley into his massive body. +Their shots should have brought him down; but, instead of this, they +seemed only to reinvigorate his wearied limbs, and he strode on faster +than ever. + +The hunters only paused long enough to reload, and then, resuming the +chase, once more overtook the giraffe. + +Another volley was fired, Groot Willem taking aim just behind the +animal's shoulder, the others firing skyward towards its head. The +giraffe stopped suddenly in its tracks, and stood tottering like a +forest-tree about to fall. Its head began waving wildly, first to the +right and then to the left. A shuffle or two of its feet for a time, +enabled it to maintain its equilibrium, and then it sank despairingly to +the earth. + +Proudly the hunters dismounted by the side of the now prostrate but once +stately creature,--once a moving monument, erected in evidence of its +Creator's wisdom, but now with its form recumbent upon the carpet of the +plain, its legs kicking wildly in the agonies of death. + + + +CHAPTER NINETEEN. + +THE CAMELOPARD. + +There is perhaps no animal living so graceful in form, more beautiful in +colour, and more stately and majestic in appearance than the camelopard, +now generally known by the French appellation of giraffe. Measuring +eighteen feet from the hoof of the fore leg to the crest of its crown, +it stands, as an American would express it, "The tallest animal in +creation." There is but a single species of the giraffe, and from the +elegance and stateliness of its shape, the pleasing variety and +arrangement of its colours, and the mildness of its disposition, its +first appearance in Europe excited considerable interest. + +Although this animal was well known to the ancient Romans, and indeed, +played no inconsiderable part in the gorgeous exhibitions of that +luxurious people, yet, with the ultimate overthrow of the Roman Empire, +the camelopard finally disappeared from Europe, and for several +centuries remained a perfect stranger to the civilised world. + +It is not until towards the close of the fifteenth century, that we +again hear of the giraffe's appearance,--when it is related that Lorenzo +de Medici exhibited one at Florence. + +The first of these animals seen in England was a gift from the Pasha of +Egypt to George the Fourth. It arrived in 1828, and died during the +following year. + +On the 24th of May, 1836, four giraffes were exhibited in the Zoological +gardens at Regent's Park. They were brought from the south-west of +Kordofan, and were transported to London at an expense of 2386 pounds +three shillings and one penny. + +From a casual glance at the giraffe, its fore legs would appear nearly +twice as long as the hind ones, but such is not the case. This +difference of appearance is caused by the great depth of shoulder, +compared with the hips. In proportion to the rest of its body, the +camelopard has rather a small head, upheld by a neck nearly six feet in +length, gently tapering towards the crown. The animal's height, +reckoning from the top of the head to the hoofs of the fore feet, is +about equally divided between neck, shoulders, and legs. Measured from +the summit of the hips to the hoofs of the hind feet, it rarely exceeds +six and a half, or seven feet. + +The head of the giraffe is furnished with a pair of excrescences, +usually called horns, although very unlike the horn of any other animal. +They are of a porous bony texture covered with short, coarse bristles. +Naturalists have, as yet, failed to determine for what purpose these +osseous processes are provided. They cannot be either for offence or +defence, since they are too easily displaced to afford any resistance in +the case of a collision. + +The eyes of the camelopard are worthy of all praise. They are of large +size, even softer and more gentle than those of the far-famed gazelle, +and so placed that it can see in almost every direction without turning +its head. + +All its senses are very acute; and being an animal of timid habit, it +can only be approached by man when mounted upon a fleet horse. + +The camelopard feeds on the leaves and blossoms of an umbrella-shaped +tree,--a species of mimosa, called mokhala by the native Africans, and +cameel-doorn (Camelthorn) by the Dutch settlers of the Cape. + +As a grasper and feeler, the tongue of the giraffe is used, as the trunk +of the elephants; and its great height enables it to gather the leaves +of the mokhala far beyond the reach of the latter. + +The camelopard's skin is exceedingly thick,--often as much as an inch +and a half--and so difficult of penetration, that frequently, twenty or +thirty bullets are required to bring the creature to the ground. These +wounds it receives and suffers in silence; for the giraffe is dumb. + +Unlike that of most other animals, its hairy coat becomes darker with +age. + +The colour of the female is somewhat lighter than the male, and she is +also of much inferior stature. + +The camelopard can only defend itself by kicking; and it uses its heels +in this way more effectively than any other creature,--the horse not +excepted. The prominence of its eyes enables it to see behind, when +directing its heels against an enemy, and so secures its taking a +certain aim; while the blow it can give will crush in the skull of a +man, or leave him with a couple of broken ribs. If unmolested, it is +among the most innocent of animals. + +A creature so strangely shaped, and possessing so much speed and +strength, was certainly designed by the Creator for some other use than +browsing upon the leaves of mimosa-trees; but that use, man has not yet +discovered. + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY. + +A RACE FOR LIFE. + +Leaving the body of the giraffe very reluctantly, (Groot Willem having a +strong desire to take it along with him,) the hunters started off in +search of the river. Much to their gratification, the Luize, or another +stream equally as large, was seen not far from them, and they rode along +its bank for the purpose of finding a place where they might water their +horses, now thirsty after the long run they had made in chase of the +giraffe. + +For about half a mile they found the stream inaccessible, by reason of +the steepness of its banks; but a small pool was discovered a short +distance from the river, and by this they halted to give their weary +horses a little rest. These also needed food; and it was the intention +to give them an hour or two upon the grass that grew luxuriantly around +the pool. The saddles were taken off, and the horses turned out to +graze upon it. + +"I suppose that Cong will have sense to pack up and follow us," said +Hendrik. + +"Yes," answered Groot Willem, "I think we may expect to see him here +within two hours." + +"But are you sure that he can find us?" + +"Certainly he can," replied Willem. "He knows that we are bound down +the river, and the stream will guide him. If not, he has Spoor'em along +with him. We should probably meet him on his way if we were to go up +the river." + +"But we don't want to go up at present," said Hendrik. "Our way is +down." + +"Then we had better stay here till he comes." + +While they were thus talking, there was heard a dull, heavy sound, +accompanied by a real or fancied vibration of the earth. + +The trees in a neighbouring grove appeared to be shaking about,--some +being upset as if a violent hurricane was sweeping down among them. + +The horses took the alarm; threw up their heads, snorted, and galloped +to and fro, as if uncertain which way to retreat. + +Next moment, from among the moving trees, emerged a herd of elephants, +each or most of them uttering trumpet-like cries as they entered upon +the open plain. + +The horses galloped off the ground; and the hunters, believing that +their lives depended on recovering them, started in pursuit. + +Almost on the instant, this purpose had to be relinquished. One of the +elephants, in advance of its fellows, was charging upon them; and they +would have enough to do to secure their own retreat. The others went +after the horses, and all seemed to have gone mad with the exception of +three or four that remained by the pool. + +The situation of the hunters was now one of imminent danger. A +well-directed volley might stop the charge of the elephant rushing +towards them, and put the others to flight. This seemed to be the idea +of all three; for each took aim at the same instant of time and fired in +the same direction. The volley was delivered in vain. The elephant, +with louder rear and longer strides, came thundering on, only infuriated +by their attempt to check its course. + +There was no time to reload; and all three retreated, with a terrible +apprehension of being overtaken, and that one or two others of them +should fall a victim to the gigantic pursuer. They ran towards the +stream. To have gone in any other direction would have been to impale +themselves upon the trunks of the other elephants, now also coming +towards them, aroused to rage by the cry of their wounded companion. + +They succeeded in reaching the bank, and thought of throwing themselves +into the water; when a shout from Arend counselled them to a different +course. + +"Follow me," cried he, and the next instant he was seen upon the trunk +of a cotton-tree that had fallen across the stream. + +So close was the enraged elephant by this time, that Groot Willem, who +was hindmost, felt the tip of its trunk touching the calf of one of his +legs, as he scrambled on to the tree. + +The top of the tree was several feet lower than the bank of the river +where its roots still adhered; and in descending the trunk, they had, as +Hendrik said, to "climb downwards." + +The branches had lodged on some rocks in the middle of the stream, which +had prevented the tree from being carried away by the current that ran +rapidly past the spot. + +For a while, they considered themselves safe; and, although their +situation would have been far from agreeable under ordinary +circumstances, they experienced the indescribable emotions of happiness +that are felt after a narrow escape from some great peril. + +The elephant was tearing at the upturned roots of the tree, and making +other impotent attempts to get at them. They were besieged, but in no +danger for the time of a closer acquaintance with the besieger. + +On examining their place of refuge, they saw that the rock on which the +tops of the tree rested, was not more than thirty feet in circumference +at the water's edge; and not half that at the top, which was about ten +feet in diameter. + +There was but little more than room for them to stand upon it; but, as +the branches were large and long, they had plenty of room to move about, +proceeding in much the same manner as monkeys would have done in a +similar situation. + +From the behaviour of the enemy, he seemed to have come to a perfect +understanding of the position in which they were placed; and, for a +minute or two, he appeared to be meditating whether he should abandon +the siege, or continue it. + +Meanwhile, the hunters, after resting for a few moments from their late +severe exertion, commenced reloading their rifles and preparing for +further hostilities. + +As though aware of their intention, the elephant quietly walked away. + +"He is off now," said Groot Willem, "but we had better not be in any +hurry to follow him. I can endure a little more rest." + +"I hope we shall not have to make a longer stay than will be agreeable," +remarked Hendrik. "But we must not leave here until the whole herd has +taken its departure. Unlike any we have seen before, these elephants do +not seem to be the least afraid of us." + +The position in which our hunters were placed was several feet below the +level of the river's bank, so that they were unable to see anything of +the plain above. + +Arend proposed returning up the trunk of the tree and giving the enemy a +parting shot, should the animal be still within range. + +To this, Groot Willem and Hendrik objected. They were willing the +elephant should depart, if so inclined, without further molestation from +them. + +A few minutes passed and Arend again proposed going up to see if their +enemy was near. This was also opposed by the others. + +"No, not yet," said Willem. "Let us not show ourselves on any account. +He may be still watching for us, and, seeing you, may think we are +impatient to get away. That would encourage him to remain. We must be +as cautious as if we were dealing with a human enemy." + +Half an hour passed, and then Groot Willem ascended the tree, until his +head was on a level with the bank. One glance was sufficient, and, with +a grave countenance, he looked back to his companions. + +"It is as I thought," said he, "the brute is still there. He is +watching for us. He wants revenge; and I believe that he'll have it. +We shall be hungry before we get away from here." + +"Where is he?" asked Hendrik. + +"At the pool close by, giving himself a shower-bath; but I can see that +he keeps constantly turning his eye in this direction." + +"Is he alone?" inquired Arend. + +"Yes; the others appear to have gone off. There is only himself by the +pool. We have wounded him; but, for all that, he is able to move +rapidly about; and we shall have to kill him outright before we can pass +him upon the plain." + +To this there was no answer, and, Groot Willem again returning to the +rock, all three laid hold of their guns, and prepared to attack the +enemy. + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY ONE. + +A CREATURE HARD TO KILL. + +Groot Willem again ascended the tree, this time armed with his roer, and +followed by his two companions. The elephant was still at the pool; +and, to make him leave it and draw nearer, Willem showed himself on the +bank. This plan did not succeed. The elephant saw him, but with reason +or instinct that seemed almost human, it was evidently waiting until +they should leave their retreat before again commencing hostilities. + +"It's of no use my firing from here," said Willem, "I must endeavour to +get nearer. Don't be in my way, for in all probability, there may be +another chase." + +The distance from the tree to the pool was close upon a hundred yards; +and, after walking from the bank about one third of that distance, +Willem came to a halt. + +The elephant, coolly and philosophically, awaited his approach, +apparently satisfied to let him come as near as he pleased. + +The position in which the animal stood was unfavourable for Willem to +make his favourite shot; but, as it would not move, he was obliged to +fire at its head. The report of his gun was answered by a roar and an +impetuous charge. + +Willem instantly made for the tree, and secured his retreat, with the +elephant but a few paces in his rear. + +At the same time--and without evincing the slightest acknowledgment--the +huge beast received two further shots from Hendrik and Arend. + +While the guns were being reloaded, the monster again retired to the +pool. There it was saluted by seven more balls without even once +attempting to approach its tormentors in their place of retreat. + +It now wanted but two hours to sunset, and dark heavy clouds were +descried rolling up from the south-west. Thirteen shots had been +expended on the elephant, and to all appearance it was still uninjured. +There was a prospect of compulsory confinement before them. They might +have to remain in their aqua-arboreal retirement the whole night under +the pelting of a pitiless storm. Three more shots were fired, without +any apparent result. The rain soon came down,--not in drops, but +dishfuls. + +Often as they had been exposed to heavy showers, none of them could +remember witnessing anything like that. All their care was devoted to +keeping the ammunition and the locks of their guns dry; and any attempts +at breaking the blockade to which they were subjected, was, for a time, +relinquished. + +By the last light of day, Groot Willem made another reconnaissance and +found the elephant still patiently waiting and watching. + +A night so dark that they could not distinguish each other by sight now +mantled the river, and the heavens above continued pouring forth their +unabated wrath. They might now have stolen away unknown to the +besieger; but they had no longer the desire to do so. Confident that +the animal could not keep its feet till morning, after the rough +handling it had received, they resolved upon staying till it fell, and +securing its fine tusks. + +Two or three hours passed, and still the rain kept falling, though not +quite so heavily as at first. + +"I don't like this sort of thing," said Hendrik. "Swart and Cong, in +the pits, could not have been much unhappier than we are. I should like +to know if the enemy is still on guard. What do you say to our going +off?" + +"We mustn't think of it," counselled Arend. "Even if the elephant be +gone, we cannot find our horses in such a dark night. If it be still +waiting for us, we could not see it five paces off, while it might see +us. We had better stay when we are till morning." + +"Your advice is good, Arend," said Willem. I don't believe that we have +a gun among us that could be discharged; if attacked, as we are now, we +should be defenceless. + +Arend's suggestion was adopted, and they resolved to remain upon the +rock till morning. + +During the night, the rain continued to pour, half drowning them in +their exposed situation. The hours passed slowly and wearily. They +began to have serious doubts of ever seeing day again; but it came at +length. + +Just as the first faint gleams of the aurora appeared in the east, they +were startled by a sudden crashing among the branches of the tree, and +the next moment, they saw the bridge by which they had reached the rock, +in the act of being carried away by the current! + +"Look out!" shouted Arend; "the tree is off. Keep clear of the +branches, or we shall be swept along with it." + +All rushed together to the summit of the rock, reaching it just in time +to avoid the danger thus indicated; and, in another moment, their +communication with the main land was entirely cut off. + +The dawn of day found them on an islet of stone, of such limited extent +that there was barely standing-room for the three. The river, swollen +by the flood, lipped close up to their feet, and was threatening to rise +still higher. There was the prospect--not a very pleasant one--that +they themselves might be carried off after their treacherous bridge. + +The elephant was no longer a cause of the slightest anxiety. The means +by which they might have placed themselves within the reach of that +danger had been removed; and, like Prometheus, they were bound to a +rock. + +The banks on both sides were too high for them to effect a landing, even +should they be able to stem the rapid current. All three could swim, +and it might be possible for them to reach the shore by swimming down +stream to some place where the banks were on a level with the water. + +But to this method of getting out of their difficulty, there were +several objections. Their guns would have to be left behind, and could +not be recovered. A distant view of them lying upon the rock might be +all they would ever have. To abandon their arms was a thing not to be +thought of. Their hunting would be over for that expedition. + +Besides, they were in a part of the river where the current was swift, +turbulent, and strong. It would carry them down with irresistible +force. The rapids were full of rough jagged rocks, against which their +bodies might be crushed or lacerated; and the chances were that some of +them might never succeed in reaching the shore in safety. + +"And there is another reason why I don't like taking this water trip," +said Hendrik. "I noticed yesterday, just as we came forward here, a +couple of enormous alligators. In all likelihood, there are scores of +them." + +"Then I say, stop where we are for the present," said Arend. +"Alligators are always hungry, and I don't relish to be eaten by them." + +"I am not yet so hungry as to leave my roer behind me; therefore, I +second your proposal," said Groot Willem. + +It was carried _nemini dissentiente_. They did stay where they were, +but not very patiently. The sun ascended high into the heavens. Its +beams seemed to have their focus on the spot where they were standing. +They never remembered having experienced a day so hot, or one on which +all felt so hungry. Hendrik and Arend became nearly frantic with the +heat and the hunger, though Groot Willem still preserved a remnant of +calmness. + +"I wonder if that elephant is watching for us yet?" said he. "If so, he +is what Swartboy calls Congo,--an 'ole fool! I'm sorry we can't oblige +him by paying him a visit, and rewarding him for his prolonged vigil." + +Willem's attempt at being witty was intended to cheer his disconsolate +companions. But it was a sad failure. Neither could reply to it even +by a smile. + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY TWO. + +A SEPARATION. + +All day long did they stay on the islet of stone. They were no longer +apprehensive of being swept away by the flood. They saw that it had +reached its highest, but its subsidence had not yet commenced. + +The sun was already in the zenith, hotter than ever, literally roasting +them upon the rock. The situation was intolerable. + +"Shall we have to stay here another night?" impatiently asked Hendrik. + +"It looks deuced like it," answered Willem. + +"And to-morrow, what shall we do then?" inquired Arend. "There may be +no better chance of getting off than there is now." + +"That is true," said Willem. "We must think of some way of getting out +of this disagreeable prison. Can any of you think of a plan?" + +"I have a proposal to make," said Hendrik. "Let one of us take to the +water and look down stream for a landing-place. If he succeeds in +reaching the bank in safety, he could come up again, and by swinging out +one of those long climbing plants we see hanging to the trees, there +would be some chance of the other two catching it. By that means we may +get off." + +"That's not a bad idea," rejoined Arend; "but which of us is to run the +risk of the swim. For my part, I'm quite willing to incur it." + +"There is certainly great danger," said Hendrik; "but there is also +danger of starvation if we stay here." + +"Quite true," rejoined Arend. "But for my part, I would rather feed a +crocodile than die of hunger myself. So I'm willing to risk the swim. +If you don't see me on the bank in three or four hours you may conclude +that either the crocodiles have eaten me, or that I've been shattered +among the rocks." + +The others would not listen to Arend's self-sacrificing proposal; and +for a time, it was debated among them, as to who should run the risk, +each protesting what under other circumstances he would scarce have +done,--that he was a better swimmer than either of the other two. + +As each insisted on taking the peril upon himself,--and none of them +would yield the point, a proposal was made to cast lots. + +This was done; and Hendrik, the suggester of the plan, was the one +chosen by fate to carry it into execution. + +"I am glad of it," said he, after the thing had been decided. "It is +but just that I should be permitted to carry out my own proposal. So +here goes!" + +Hastily undressing himself, he shook hands with Arend and Willem, +dropped into the flood, and was away with the rapidity of an arrow. + +Anxiously the others gazed after him; but in less than three minutes, he +was no longer under their eyes, the rough rapid current having carried +him clean out of sight. + +Two hours passed, which were spent by Arend and Groot Willem in, a state +of anxious suspense. Two hours more and it became terrible. + +"Night is fast approaching," remarked Arend. "If Hendrik does not +return before night, I shall swim after him." + +"Yes, we may as well, while we have the strength to do it," answered +Willem. "If you go, so will I. We shall start together. How long do +you think we should wait?" + +"Not much longer. Certainly within a mile, he ought to have found a +place where he could land. That distance he must soon have made, at the +rate he was travelling when he left us. He should return soon now, or +never." + +Another hour passed and still no signs of Hendrik. + +"Remain you, Willem," proposed Arend, "and let me go alone." + +"No," replied the great hunter; "we go together. I once thought that I +should never abandon my gun as long as I lived; but it must be. We must +not stay here any longer. I grow weaker every hour." + +The two were taking off their boots and preparing to enter the water, +when their ears were saluted by the sound of a familiar voice. + +Congo was seen upon horseback on the bank of the river, just opposite +the rock. + +"Nebber fear, baas Willem," shouted he. "I come back by-'m-by." + +As he said this, he galloped away. The loud roar of an elephant +proclaiming the cause of his sudden departure. + +"O heavens!" exclaimed Arend. "How much longer must we stay here?" + +"Until to-morrow, I expect," answered Willem. "Congo cannot return to +the camp and be back before to-morrow." + +"But do you think he will go off without trying to assist us?" + +"Yes. What can he do alone? Nothing. He knows that, and has gone for +help. Of himself, he could not kill the elephant; and even if it was +not there, he could do nothing to get us off the rock." + +"The distance to the bank must be about twenty yards. Of course there +is a way by which we may be got ashore; but it will require a rope. The +climbing plants would do, but Congo has not noticed them. I believe +that he understood at a glance the difficulties to be overcome, and has +gone to the camp for assistance." + +"I hope so," replied Arend, "and, if such be the case, we need not fear +for ourselves. We have now only to endure the annoyance of waiting. My +only anxiety is for Hendrik." + +Willem made no reply, but by his silence Arend could perceive that he +had but little hope of ever seeing Hendrik gain. + +Slowly the sun went down and the night once more descended over the +rolling river. Their anxiety would not allow them to sleep, even had +they not been hindered by hunger. Of water they had a plentiful +supply,--too much of it,--although this was not obtained without some +difficulty, as they had to dip it up in one of their powder-flasks, +emptied for the purpose. + +Another morning dawned, and the sun made his appearance,--again red and +fiery,--his beams becoming fiercer as he ascended the cloudless sky. + +They had but a few hours more to wait until they might expect the return +of the Kaffir; but would he surely come? They knew that travelling in +Africa was a very uncertain business. Their present position was proof +that some accident might occur to hinder him from reaching the camp. + +By this time they were almost certain that some serious misfortune, +perhaps death itself, had befallen Hendrik. + +As if to confirm them in this belief, just then three large crocodiles +were seen swimming around the rock, lingering there, as though they +expected ere long to get their sharp teeth into the flesh of those who +stood upon it. + +The great hunter became angered at the sight. It suggested the probable +fate of their companion, as it might, in time, be their own. He seized +hold of his roer, and, drawing the damp charge, freshly loaded the gun. +Aiming at the eye of one of the hideous monsters, he pulled trigger. + +The loud report was followed by a heavy plunging in the water, and the +behaviour of the crocodile gave evidence of the correctness of the +hunter's aim. + +After springing bodily above the surface, it fell back again, and +commenced spinning around, with a velocity that threw showers of spray +over those, who stood watching its death-struggles. + +Its two companions retreated down the river, and, as the brothers saw +them depart, the thoughts of both were dwelling upon the same subject. + +Both were thinking of Hendrik! We also must go down stream, and see +what has become of him. + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY THREE. + +FROM BAD TO WORSE. + +On finding himself in the water as he parted from his companions, +Hendrik had not much exertion to make. + +A gentle motion of the limbs sustained him on the surface, and he was +borne onward with a velocity that promised a speedy termination of his +voyage. + +Some place must soon be reached where the banks would be low enough to +be ascended, and the current not too quick to hinder him from crossing +to the shore. He was spirited past several rocks, one of which he only +avoided with great difficulty, so swiftly did the current carry him +along. + +When about a mile from his companions, as he supposed himself, he saw +that the banks on both sides were shelving and he tried to reach the +shore. + +The current was still rapid as ever, and for each foot made in the +direction of the land, he was borne several yards down the channel of +the stream. + +The velocity with which he was moving awoke in his mind a vague sense of +a danger not thought of before starting, and altogether different from +those that had been taken into calculation. His voyage, so far, had +been successful. He had escaped unharmed by rocks or crocodiles; but he +had evidence that a danger, as much, if not more to be dreaded, now +threatened him. The water seemed gliding down an inclined plane, so +rapidly was it sweeping him on; and beyond this, directly before him, he +could hear the roaring of a cataract! What had been at first only a +conjecture, soon became a certainty. He was going at arrow-like speed +towards the brow of a waterfall. Throwing all his energies into the +effort, he struggled to reach the shore at a point where the bank was +accessible. + +He had nearly succeeded. Ten feet nearer, and he would have been able +to grasp the o'erhanging bushes. But that distance, little as it was, +could not be accomplished, and on he glided towards the engulfing fall. + +On the brink of the water-precipice he saw the sharp point of a rock +jutting about three feet above the water. More by good luck, than any +guidance on his part, he came within reach of it as he was hurried +onward. Reaching out, he caught hold; and hugging it with both arms, he +was able to retain his hold. His body was swung around to the leeward +of the rock, until his legs hung dangling over the fall. Although the +force of the current was partly broken by the interposition of the rock, +it required him to exert all his strength to save himself from being +washed over. After a time, he succeeded in gaining a footing. There +was a little ledge on the rock just large enough for one foot, while the +other sought support on the pointed apex. To have attempted to swim +ashore could only end in his destruction. Though almost within leaping +distance of the bank, he had no place to spring from, and to have fallen +short, would have been fatal. He could do nothing but remain as he was. + +Hours passed, and the torture of standing in one position irksome at +that, became unbearable. He could only obtain rest by getting into the +water again and hugging the rock with both arms as he had done before. +But this method of resting himself, if such it could be called, could +not be endured longer than two or three minutes, and he was compelled +soon to return to the upright attitude. + +"There is not the least danger of crocodiles here," thought he while in +the water hanging on to the rock. "Should one pass this way, it would +not have time for touching me, even if it were starving." All night +long did he continue in this dread position. + +Morning dawned, and once more he had to endure the agony of gazing on +the bank within a few feet of where he stood, though as unapproachable +as if miles of moving water separated him from it. + +Fortune seemed determined to torture him to the last extreme. + +There was no hope of his gaining the bank above, and it now occurred to +him to look below. Craning out as far as he could, he made an +inspection of the fall. It was about thirty feet in clear descent. +Below, the water ran frothing away and soon became smooth and tranquil, +as if reposing after the violent leap. + +Should he allow himself to be carried over the cataract? This was the +question he now commenced considering. If he could only have assured +himself that there was deep water underneath, he would at once have +decided to commit himself to the descent. But there was the probability +that he might be precipitated upon jagged rocks, and of course killed by +the fall. Besides, he saw that the banks below were steep on both +sides, and he might have to swim for a long distance before being able +to land. After a descent of thirty feet he might be incapable of +continuing above the surface of the water. At all events, he would be +in no condition for a long swim. + +After long and earnestly debating the question in his own mind he gave +up the thought of making the too perilous attempt. + +Notwithstanding the agony arising from his own position, he was not free +from concern for his comrades left upon the rock. + +Willem and Arend would in all likelihood come after him, if they had not +already done so. One or the other, or both, might have left the rock +and been carried over the cataract in the night, unseen by him during +the darkness. + +As the time passed on, his sufferings approached the point of despair. +They at length became so great that once or twice was he tempted to put +a termination to them by giving his body to the cataract, and his soul +to Him who had bestowed it. But this demon of temptation was driven out +of his mind by a mental vision of angelic loveliness. + +The remembrance of Wilhelmina Van Wyk came before him like some fair +angel, commanding him to hope and wait. He obeyed the command. + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY FOUR. + +REUNION. + +Time was passing. They upon the islet rock were getting very impatient +for the return of Congo. They were certain that he would bring +assistance with as little delay as possible, but most of his journey +would have to be made in the night,--a dangerous time for travelling. + +He had now been gone long enough to reach the camp and return. "Sister +Ann" on the watch-tower of Bluebeard's castle could not have gazed more +earnestly than did they for his reappearance upon the bank above them. +Their anxious vigil was at length rewarded. Near the hour of noon their +ears were greeted by shouts, and shortly after they saw Hans, Congo, and +Macora standing on the bank above them. The chief was accompanied by +about a score of his followers, carrying long ropes by the direction of +Congo. + +"Where is Hendrik?" was the first question of Hans, asked in a trembling +voice. + +"We cannot tell," was the reply. "He swam down the river in the hope of +being able to make the bank below. We have great fear that some +misfortune has befallen him." + +While the three yagers continued the solemn conversation, Macora took a +number of his people a short distance up the river. + +Near the bank was found the prostrate trunk of a tree about fifty feet +in length. It had long been down; and was quite dead and dry. After +making the lines fast to one end of it, it was pushed into the stream +and directed in such a manner as to drift down to the rock on which the +two youths were standing. The other end of the rope was firmly grasped +by several of Macora's men. + +Swiftly the log, carried by the current, came in contact with the rock; +when the men, keeping the rope on a taut stretch, prevented it from +going farther. + +With the nimbleness of a couple of cats, Willem and Arend sprang on to +it, and, setting themselves astride, were hauled to the bank, where both +were at length safely landed. + +The first thing they saw, was the body of the elephant at which they had +fired so many shots. The animal had at length succumbed, sinking into +its eternal sleep in spite of its implacable anger. + +As the hunters were no longer in any anxiety for themselves, their +apprehensions became all the more keen for the fate of their missing +friend. Although suffering greatly from fatigue as well as the want of +food, Willem and Arend would not stay even to eat, till a search had +been made for him. + +There is no sentiment of the human mind, unless it is self esteem, that +is capable of resting on so unstable a foundation as hope. Hendrik had +now been absent more than twenty-four hours. The chances were a hundred +to one against their ever seeing him again, either dead or alive; and +yet they had hope. + +Provided with food to eat along the way, they started down the river,-- +many of the Makololo _very_ unwillingly. They had just performed a +journey of near thirty miles in only a few hours' time, and of course +they were weary. + +But this was not the only reason why their exertions were prolonged with +some reluctance. They had been told of the manner in which Hendrik had +left his companions; and, guided by reason,--instead of a strong feeling +of friendship,--unlike Hans, Willem, and Arend, they had no hope of +seeing him again. For, from their acquaintance with the country, they +knew of the cataract; and were confident that he must have been carried +over the falls; thence a shattered, inanimate mass rolling onward to +ocean. + +When little more than a mile down stream, Groot Willem discharged his +gun. The report echoed in afar along the banks. Every one paused and +stood listening to hear if there should be any response. + +It came. + +Faintly and from afar they could distinguish the sounds of a human +voice. Uttering a shout of joy, the three hunters rushed forward, and +soon after, when Hans shouted "Hendrik," they heard from the river the +words, "Here, this way." + +A minute more, and they were standing within a few feet of the object of +their search, and had a full comprehension of what had hindered him from +returning to the succour of his companions. + +As the Makololo had come out well provided with comestibles, the hungry +hunters were fed to their full satisfaction and then all went back to +the place where the elephant had breathed its last. There forming their +camp, they kindled fires, and made ready to pass the night,--the +followers of Macora feasting upon one of their favourite dishes,--baked +elephant's foot. + +Congo had still his tale to tell. When deserted by the others in their +pursuit of the giraffes, he had waited two or three hours, expecting +them to return. He then started off along their spoor, but being +hampered by caring for the pack-horse, he progressed but slowly. + +Night overtook him by the body of the dead giraffe. Unable through the +darkness to follow the trail any farther, he remained by the carcass +till morning. + +By that time, the heavy rain had obliterated the spoor so completely +that even Spoor'em, the hound, could only follow it with great +difficulty. After a time, Congo saw that the horse-tracks separated, +going in different directions. He followed one set of them for some +time till the horse himself was found, but without saddle, bridle, or +rider. + +This was Willem's horse, that had taken flight on the approach of the +elephants. + +Congo had gone the wrong way for finding his master, and he now returned +upon the horse's tracks. This, of course, brought him to the place +where the elephant had first charged; and, on reaching the bank of the +river and looking over, he saw the situation in which the hunters were +placed. But the wounded elephant was there, and this, charging upon +him, hindered him from continuing the observation. He had seen enough +to knew that he must go to the camp for assistance, and this was just +what he did. + +They passed the night by the pool, pleasantly enough. The joy of once +more being together would have deprived them of sleep, had it not been +for their extreme weariness. But Hans and the chief, seeing the other +three so exhausted, did not insist on hearing the details of the +dangerous adventure; and at an early hour the camp was buried in the +silence of slumber. + +Two horses had been lost. This, under the circumstances, was a serious +misfortune; but their own lives had been miraculously preserved; and +none of them was now disposed to find fault with fortune for anything +that had occurred. + +Next morning, they started back to the place where the giraffe-trap was +being constructed. On reaching it, they found Swartboy impatiently +waiting for their return. His expressions of joy at seeing them once +more safe and sound were accompanied with the declaration that they had +been more fortunate than he had expected, considering that they had gone +forth with only Congo for their guide. + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY FIVE. + +MISTAKES OF A NIGHT. + +As nearly two weeks would be required for constructing the hopo, Groot +Willem determined on making another hunting expedition. There was +plenty of game in the immediate neighbourhood; but the chief strongly +protested against the firing of guns, lest the sounds should betray +their presence in the place. + +Several giraffes had been seen in the mimosa groves, and the banks of +the river were marked with their spoor. + +Macora objected to their being alarmed, as it would drive them away +before the pen could be got ready for them. + +Groot Willem was a hunter, and out on a hunting expedition. This being +the case, he could not remain for two weeks idle; and taking Hendrik and +Congo along with him, he left the camp to visit a river, which, +according to the chief's account, lay about thirty miles to the +north-west. They expected to reach it in one day, and could have done +so, but for a large drove of elands, which was encountered upon the way, +and the pursuit of which delayed them. + +They encamped that night, as they supposed, about five miles from the +river, and the next morning continued on, to reach it. A ride of +between ten and fifteen miles was made, but no river was arrived at. + +Early in the afternoon, they came upon a tiny rivulet running out of a +pool, or _vley_. Supposing it to be a tributary of the river they were +in search of, they concluded that by following it down, they should +reach the main stream. This, however, they were in no haste to do, +since the country around the pool appeared to be the best sort of +hunting-ground. The fresh tracks of many varieties of animals could be +seen in the mud; and Willem proposed that they should stay over night +and lie in wait by the vley. + +To this Hendrik agreed; and the horses were tethered out to graze. + +A suitable place for a pit was chosen twenty paces from the pool, and, +in less than an hour, two excavations were made, in which the hunters +might conveniently conceal themselves. + +Early in the evening, leaving Congo at some distance off, under the +protection of a large fire, they repaired to the pits, and there +commenced their silent vigil. + +The first animals that made their appearance were antelopes of a small +species; and, as the hunters were not in want of food, no attempt was +made to hinder the little creatures from having their drink and +retiring. + +Suddenly there was a commotion in the herd, which ended in a rush from +the pool. A leopard had pounced on one of them, and, as the others left +the ground, the leopard was seen shouldering its victim with the +intention to carry it off. As it turned side towards them, Willem +fired, and the large heavy bullet from the roer went crashing through +the creature's ribs. + +With a loud roar it sprang upwards; then, standing on its hind feet, it +walked forward a few paces and fell. The shot had been discharged at +random through the dim light, but a better could not have been made with +the most deliberate aim, and in the light of day. + +After this, the pool was visited by hyenas, jackals, and various other +creatures not worth the powder that would be required in killing them. + +Some time elapsed, during which the hunters had nothing else to interest +them than listening to the snarls, laughter, and growling of the +carrion-eaters assembled around the pool. + +"I can't say there's much sport in this," muttered Hendrik, +discontentedly. "I've hard work in keeping awake." + +Another hour passed without their seeing any game worthy of their +attention, when Willem, too, became weary of inaction. + +They were thinking of vacating the pits and joining Congo by the +camp-fire, when something heavier than hyenas was heard approaching the +spot. With only their eyes above the surface of the ground, they gazed +eagerly in the direction from which proceeded the sound. Two large +animals appeared through the darkness, evidently approaching the vley. + +"Quaggas!" whispered Willem, as he strained his eyes to assure himself +of their species. + +"Yes," answered Hendrik. "Let us knock them over. They're not much +good, but it will serve to wake us up." + +Doubtful whether a shot at anything better might be had that night, +Groot Willem was nothing loath, and was the first to fire. The animal +at which he had aimed fell forward, and they heard a heavy plunging, as +it rolled over into the pool. + +Its companion was about turning to make off when Hendrik fired. There +was no apparent interruption to its flight, and Hendrik was under the +impression that his shot had missed. He was soon undeceived, however, +by hearing the animal fall to the earth with a dull heavy sound, at the +same time uttering a groan, which did not seem unfamiliar, and yet was +not the cry of a quagga. + +Without saying a word, both leaped out of the pits, and hastened towards +the fallen animals, with a strong presentiment that there was something +amiss. + +The animal brought down by Hendrik was first reached. + +It was not a quagga, but a horse! + +"A horse!" exclaimed Willem as he stooped over the carcass to examine +it. "It is not mine, thank God, nor yours neither." + +"That is rather a selfish remark of yours, Willem," said Hendrik. "The +horse belongs to some one. I can see a saddle-mark on its back." + +"May be," muttered Willem, who thought nearly as much of his steed as +his great roer. "For all that I'm glad it isn't mine." + +They then proceeded to the vley, where the other horse was still +struggling in the shallow water. As it was evidently unable to get to +its feet, and wounded to the death, another shot was fired to release it +from its misery. + +Wondering to whom the two horses could belong, they returned to the +camp-fire; both under the impression that they had destroyed enough of +animal life for that night. + +Early the next morning they left the pool, and, continuing down stream, +within two hours reached the river they had been so long in search of. +Here they determined to stop until the next day, and their horses were +again tethered out; and, as they were somewhat wearied, they lay down to +take repose under the shade of a mokhala tree. From this they were +startled by the loud barking of Spoor'em and the calls of Congo. + +Springing to their feet they found themselves surrounded by a party of +about forty Africans, some armed with spears, while others carried bows +and arrows. + +From the hostile attitude of the new-comers the hunters saw that they +meant mischief; and, seizing their guns, they determined to defend +themselves to the last. + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY SIX. + +CAPTURED. + +Pushing in front of Groot Willem, Congo entreated him not to make +resistance; and so strong seemed his desire that they should surrender +without making an effort to maintain their freedom, that he caught hold +of the gun which Hendrik had already brought to his shoulder. + +"Poison! arrows and spears all poison!" shouted the Kaffir, who appeared +well-nigh scared out of his senses. + +Both Willem and Hendrik had heard, seen, and read enough of the African +tribes who use poisoned spears and darts, to feel something of Congo's +alarm. + +They were not cowards, but they saw before them several men carrying +weapons more deadly at short distance than their own fire-arms. Only +one drop of blood had to be drawn by the point of one of their javelins, +to cause certain death accompanied by horrible agonies! + +They could not expect to conquer thirty or forty men, without receiving +a scratch or two in the encounter; and knowing this, they took Congo's +advice and surrendered. + +When the Kaffir saw that the capture of himself and his masters had been +effected without a battle, he recovered his self-possession, and +demanded of the natives the cause of their strange conduct. + +An individual then stepped forward who appeared to have some influence +over the others; and by his eloquence Congo became a little wiser, and a +great deal more alarmed. + +The African spoke in a language which only the Kaffir understood. He +stated that he had lost two horses,--both of which had been killed at a +vley where they had gone to drink. Although grieved at the loss of his +horses, both which he had received as presents, he was quite happy in +having discovered the party whom he believed to have wilfully destroyed +his property. + +The hunters directed Congo to inform him that the horse had been shot by +mistake,--that they very much regretted the circumstance; and were quite +ready and willing to make ample compensation for the damage he had +sustained. + +This the black chief declared was all he required, and the hunters were +invited to accompany him to his village, where they could talk over the +terms of compensation. + +All started up the river, but the behaviour and methodical division of +their escort convinced the hunters that they were considered as +captives. + +"This is very unfortunate," said Hendrik. "We shall have to part with +something we can ill spare. They will not be satisfied with trifles, +and perhaps will want our horses in exchange for those killed." + +"They shall not have them then," rejoined Willem, with an air of +determination, forgetting at the moment that he was a prisoner, and the +horses already in possession of their captors. + +About a mile from the place where the Africans had come upon them, they +reached a small collection of huts, from which issued a large number of +women and children. It was evidently the kraal of their captors. + +The leader of the party lost no time in proceeding to business. He was +anxious to have his claim settled; so also were Groot Willem and +Hendrik. Congo was again called to act as interpreter. + +The black chief desired him to inform his masters, that the horses he +had lost were of immense value. They had been given to him by an +esteemed friend, a Portuguese slave-merchant; and he declared that, in +his opinion, they were the best horses in the world. No others could +replace them. + +"Very well," said Groot Willem, when this communication had been made; +"ask him what he expects us to pay." + +"All this ceremony is not for nothing," remarked Hendrik, while Congo +was again talking to the chief. "We shall have some trouble in getting +off from this fellow unless we surrender everything we've got." + +"He mustn't be too greedy," replied Willem, "or he will get nothing at +all. We have performed a silly action, and expect to pay for it." + +"Those are brave words," answered Hendrik, "but I don't think we have +power to act up to them. It will be they who will dictate terms; and +what can we do?" + +The chief, before making known his conditions, desired it to be +understood that, a mistake having been committed, on that account he +would not be hard upon them. He would not punish them for what they had +done, more than to require compensation for his loss, which he at the +same time gave them to understand was wholly irreparable. + +From the appearance of the horses they had killed, the hunters believed +that the animals had been left behind by some slave-trader, too merciful +to take them any farther. They had evidently been used up by a long +journey, and the chief had probably been thanked by their former owner +for allowing them to die a natural death in his dominions. + +The amount of damage was at length declared by the plaintiff, who was at +the same time acting as judge. + +"Tell them," said he to the interpreter, "that all I require, by way of +compensation, will be their own horses along with their guns and +ammunition." + +"What!" exclaimed Groot Willem, jumping to his feet in rage, "Give them +my horse and roer? No, not for all the horses in Africa." + +Hendrik was no less surprised and enraged at the attempt to extort from +them; and, seeing the folly of continuing the parley any longer, the +youths, without saying a word, walked off towards their horses, +intending to mount and ride off. + +This intention was opposed by the chief and others of the tribe, when an +affray ensued, in which Groot Willem measured his strength against half +a score of the natives. In their attempt to take his gun from him, +several were hurled to the earth, and amongst them the chief himself. +He did not desire to discharge the piece. A shot could only have killed +one, while his enemies were legion. + +Whether they would have conquered him without taking his life, or not, +was doubtful, had not one of the Africans, more cunning than his +fellows, adopted an ingenious expedient to terminate the struggle. +Seizing a large cone-shaped basket, used for catching fish, he ran +behind the young hunter and clapped it, extinguisher-like, over his +head. The basket was immediately laid hold of by two or three others; +by whom the giant was dragged to the earth and held there until they had +bound him with thongs of zebra hide. + +Before this feat had been accomplished Hendrik had received a blow from +one of the natives that prevented him from making any resistance; and he +too was trussed up for safe keeping. + +Congo had not interfered in the outrage on his masters, but on the +contrary he seemed rather pleased at the turn events had taken. This, +however, did not prevent the Africans from tying him like the others. + +The rage of Hendrik, on awaking from a brief period of stupor and +finding himself fast bound, would be difficult to describe. There can +be no greater agony to a brave and sensitive man than to find himself +helpless for revenge after having undergone a deep humiliation. + +Groot Willem, no less brave but of a different temperament, was more +resigned to the indignity they were enduring. His anger had been +aroused by the attempt to take from him a thing he greatly prized,--his +gun. He had been defeated in trying to retain it; but now that it was +gone, and along with it his liberty, he determined to exert some degree +of philosophy and patiently wait for what should happen next. + +Congo, who had appeared indifferent to seeing his masters bound,--in +fact rather pleased at it,--now looked sad enough while submitting to +similar treatment. His fellow-captives could have no sympathy, since +his behaviour had not failed to beget suspicions of his ingratitude. + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY SEVEN. + +IN THONGS. + +The prisoners were compelled to remain inactive spectators of a division +of their property, most of which was appropriated by the chief himself, +as a sort of compensation for the loss of his horses, and the damage his +own person had sustained in the capturing of one of his prisoners. For, +before securing Groot Willem, he had been sent to the earth under a blow +from that sturdy hunter's roer. + +Beyond this present humiliation, the hunters had placed themselves under +another and more serious obligation,--that of satisfying a desire for +revenge. + +"It is no use, baas Willem," said the Kaffir, who had managed to get +close beside his master. "We'll be killed for showing fight." + +Congo next expressed his opinion that, had no resistance been offered to +the chief, an opportunity might have been afforded them for returning to +Macora. He was quite positive now that no chance for this would be +allowed, not even to himself, who had only been pretending to be a +traitor for the sake of gaining favour, and thus being enabled to assist +them, his young masters. + +"Do you think they really intend to kill us, Congo?" asked Willem. + +"Yaas, baas. Sure they intend it," answered the Kaffir. "They 'fraid +now to let us go." + +"But, if they intend killing us, why do they not do so at once?" +inquired Hendrik. + +Congo explained, that their captors belonged to a wandering tribe of +Zooloo Kaffirs, a warlike people, who had but little respect for white +men. They were of a race that demanded tribute of the Portuguese at the +north, and obtained it; and he was sure that they would never forgive +the insult of their chief being knocked down in the presence of his +subjects. That, alone, would lead to their being killed. + +His explanation of the reason why they were not killed immediately +showed him to be so well acquainted with the manners and customs of the +people into whose hands they had fallen, that, after its relation, +Willem and Hendrik could no longer doubt the truth of his assertions. + +He said that white men were never put to death within sight of the +kraal, lest the affair might be talked of by the women and children in +the presence of other white men who might pass through the country. +Although all might be well aware of their fate, but few would witness +their execution. They would be led away some night, two or three miles +from the village and then put to death. Their executioners would return +to the kraal with the story that they had been sent back to their own +country. + +The chief, Congo believed, was not yet ready to witness their execution, +being too well pleased with his late acquired property to think of any +other business for the present. + +Willem and Hendrik, after all that had been told them, were not prepared +to give up every hope. Some chance to escape might offer, though it +should be with bare life; for they could not expect to take with them +their horses and guns. + +As evening came on, the watch over the prisoners seemed less strictly +kept than during the earlier hours of the day. But in vain they strove +to rend the thongs that bound them, or slip from their embrace. They +had been too securely tied, most likely by one whose experience, alas! +had been but too well perfected in the enslavement of his own unhappy +countrymen. + +During the evening, an individual was observed approaching. Stepping up +to where Groot Willem was bound, he commenced an earnest scrutiny of his +features. + +Willem fancied that the man had a familiar look, and, examining him +attentively, he recognised no less a personage than the banished Sindo, +the individual whom he had saved from the wrath of Macora. Here was a +sudden transition from despair to hope. Surely the would-be chief could +not be ungrateful! Perhaps he would intercede in their behalf! This +was but his duty. + +Willem strove to make him understand that he was recognised, hoping the +knowledge of that would stimulate him to exert himself on their behalf. +The attempt wholly failed. With a scornful expression upon his +features, the man moved away. + +"That's Sindo," muttered Willem to his fellow-prisoners. "He appears at +home among them. Will he not assist us?" + +"Yaas, that is Sindo," said Congo, "but he no help you." + +"Why do you think so, Cong?" + +"He no big enough fool do dat." + +This might be true. Sindo had once got into trouble through treason, +and had narrowly escaped death. He would be a fool to incur such a +danger again, in the new home he had found for himself. + +This was the construction Groot Willem was inclined to put on the +African's conduct. Sindo was acting ungratefully. He had not shown the +slightest sympathy for those who had befriended him in his hour of +adversity. On the contrary, he had cut their acquaintance in the most +unceremonious manner. + +All night long they lay in their thongs. Morning came and still they +were not set free. + +"What does this treatment mean?" asked Hendrik. "What do they intend +doing with us?" + +"I am beginning to have fears that Congo is right," answered Willem. +"They do mean harm. They have robbed and kept us tied up all night. +Those acts look suspicious." + +"But dare they deprive us of life?" asked the ex-cornet. "We are white +men, and of a race who avenge each other's wrongs. Will they not be +afraid of the consequences of proceeding to extremities?" + +"So I once would have thought," replied Willem, "but from the way we are +now treated, I believe they fear nothing." + +"I tell you, baas Willem," joined in Congo, "the chief here got too much +fear." + +"Indeed! He has a peculiar way of showing it." + +"I mean, he's 'fraid to let us go. We'll have to die, baas Willem." + +The Kaffir uttered these words with a resigned expression of +countenance, that proclaimed him inspired by a firm conviction of their +truth. + +"Must this be, Hendrik?" said Willem, turning to his companion. "It +hardly seems possible. Tell me, am I dreaming?" + +"I can answer for myself," replied Hendrik, "for I was never more awake. +The rheims around my wrists are nearly cutting off my hands. I shall +die if I have to remain tied up much longer. But dare these people put +us to death?" + +For a time, the captives remained silent. They were reflecting upon the +many atrocities which they had heard to have been committed by Zooloo +Kaffirs on the white settlers of the Cape country,--deeds of unprovoked +violence performed much nearer the reach of retribution than these now +were. The savages into whose hands they had fallen were protected by +distance from any chance of being chastised from the south; and they had +no respect for the cowardly Portuguese of the north. + +This was not all. The hunters had first done them an injury, and then +refused what had been demanded for compensation. In that resistance, a +chief had been outraged by a blow. Moreover, there was property which +the natives dearly prized; and the safest way to secure it would be to +render their captives incapable of ever afterwards claiming it, or +seeking redress for the spoliation. + +The whole case wore a black look. Our adventurers began really to +believe that Congo was telling the truth, when he said, they _would have +to die_! + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY EIGHT. + +LED OUT TO DIE. + +Another day passed over, and no change was made in the treatment of the +prisoners. In fact very little notice was taken of them, except by the +women and children. The chief with some others of the tribe spent the +day amusing themselves by firing the captured guns at a target, and +learning the use of the various articles they had taken from their +captives. + +"What are they waiting for?" exclaimed Hendrik in an impatient tone. +"If they are going to put us to death, it would be almost better for us +than to endure this misery." + +"True," rejoined Willem; "life is not worth much, suffering as we do; +still, where there's uncertainty, there is hope. Think of that, +Hendrik. We have seen nothing of Sindo to-day. How carefully the +ungrateful wretch keeps out of our sight!" + +"If we were not in need of a friend," said Hendrik, "I dare say he would +acknowledge our acquaintance. But never mind. He's the last that will +ever prove ungrateful, since we're not likely ever again to have an +opportunity of befriending any one in distress." + +Night came on, and amongst the tribe the captives observed an unusual +excitement. Several of the men were hurrying to and fro carrying +torches and evidently making preparations for some great event. The +horses were also being saddled. + +"I tole you so," said Congo. "They take us away to die." + +Willem and Hendrik remained silent spectators of what was going on. A +party of the natives then approached them, and the three prisoners were +set loose from the trees. Some scene, solemn and serious, was about to +be enacted; but worn out with their misery, and weary of their long +imprisonment, almost any change appeared a relief. + +The chief of the tribe was now seen mounted on Willem's horse, heading a +procession of from ten to twelve men. He rode off towards the pool, +where his horses had been killed. The prisoners were conducted after +him. Spoor'em and the other dogs accompanied the party, wholly +unconscious of the fears that troubled their masters. As the procession +passed out of the village, the old men, women, and children were ranged +along the road, to see them depart. These gazed after them with +expressions of curiosity, not unmingled with pity, though there were +some that appeared to show satisfaction. The captives observed this, +and talked of it. Why did they, the villagers, feel so much interested +in their departure? They had not taken much heed of their arrival; and +but little attention had been paid to them while bound to the trees. +Why should there be now? There was but one answer to these questions. +The natives were looking upon them with that expression of sad curiosity +with which men gaze upon one who is about to suffer a violent death. + +The chief was carrying Willem's roer, and from his behaviour he seemed +preparing for an opportunity to use it. At intervals he brought it to +his shoulder and glanced along the barrel. + +"Ask them where we are being taken, Congo," said Hendrik. + +The Kaffir spoke to one of the natives who was near him, but only +received a grunt in reply. + +"He don't know where we go," said Congo, interpreting the gruff answer +to his question, "but I know." + +"Where?" + +"We go to die." + +"Congo!" exclaimed Willem, "ask after Sindo. He may do something to +save us, or he may not. There can be no harm in trying. If not, we may +get him into some trouble for his ingratitude. I should feel a +satisfaction in that." + +In compliance with his master's command, Congo inquired for Sindo. The +chief heard the inquiry and immediately ordered a halt, and put several +questions to his followers. + +"The chief just like you, baas Willem," said Congo. "He too want know +where Sindo am." + +The procession was delayed while the parley was going on. After it had +ended, the chief and another rode back to the village;--they were now +about half a mile distant from it. The prisoners, with their guards +remained upon the spot. The chief was absent nearly an hour, when he +returned seemingly in a great rage. By his angry talking, every one was +made aware of the fact. Congo listened attentively to what he said. + +"He's talking about Sindo," said the Kaffir. "He swear he kill dat +nigga to-morrow." + +"I hope he'll keep his oath," said Willem. "I suppose we have succeeded +in awaking his suspicions against the wretch he was harbouring; and he +will be punished for his ingratitude. He should have tried to save +us,--even at the risk of having again to make change of his tribe." + +The march was again resumed, the chief leading the way with two of his +subjects, one on each side of him carrying torches. + +After proceeding a little farther the prisoners recognised the spot +where they had been made prisoners. The chief then delivered an +harangue to his followers, which Congo interpreted to his +fellow-captives. The bearing of it was, that the white strangers had +wilfully and maliciously killed two of his horses,--the finest animals +in the world. They had refused to make such reparation as lay in their +power; and, when he had attempted to recompense himself for their loss, +he had been resisted, knocked down, and severely injured in the presence +of his own people. He stated, furthermore, that it was the unanimous +opinion of the oldest and wisest of his subjects, that for these crimes +the prisoners ought to be punished,--that the punishment should be +death; and that he had brought them to the spot where the first offence +had been committed as a proper spot for executing this just decree. + +After Congo had translated the speech to his fellow-captives, they +directed him to inform the chief that he was welcome to the horses, +guns, and other property, if he would let them depart, and they would +promise never to return to his country or trouble him any more. +Moreover, they would send him a present, by way of ransom for their +liberty and lives. + +In answer to this communication they were told, that, as they were white +men, their words could not be relied upon. Instead of presents, they +would be more likely to seek some revenge; and that, to guard against +this, he was determined they should die. + +Against this decision they were not allowed to make any appeal. From +that moment no attention was paid to anything they said. Their guards +only shouted, when Congo attempted to put in a word; while those who +were around the chief began to make preparations for carrying out the +dread sentence of death. + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY NINE. + +JUST IN TIME. + +It was soon known to the captives, what mode of death was to be adopted +for them. The gestures of the chief made it manifest, that he was about +to make trial of his new weapon,--Willem's roer. + +One reason why his prisoners had been spared so long may have been for +the purpose of learning how to use the weapon with effect, on an +occasion so important as the execution of two white men. + +The rheims that bound Hendrik's wrists had been tied much tighter than +was necessary. The green hide had shrunk in the burning sun to which +the prisoners had been exposed during the day. In consequence, his +hands were lacerated and swollen, and he was suffering more torture than +either of the others. + +This was not all the agony he was enduring. The fate Congo at first +only conjectured had now assumed a horrible certainty. Death seemed +inevitable; and Hendrik's active mind, susceptible of strong emotions, +became painfully anxious at the approach of death. He feared it. Nor +did that fear arise from an ignoble cause. It was simply the love of +life, and the desire to cling to it. + +He who loves not life is unworthy of its blessings; for those who hold +them cheap, and would part with them willingly, have either not the +sense to appreciate, or are so evil as only to know life's bitterness. + +Hendrik had a strong desire to live,--to enjoy future days;--and, as he +looked upon the preparations being made to deprive him of it, he felt an +unutterable anguish. Of all his regrets at parting with the world, +there was one supreme,--one thought that was uppermost. That thought +was given to Wilhelmina Van Wyk. He should never see her again! His +love of her was stronger than his love of life. + +"Willem," he exclaimed, "must this be? Shall we die here? I will +not,--I cannot!" + +As he spoke, the whole strength of his soul and body was concentrated +into one effort for regaining his liberty. He struggled to release his +wrists from the rheims. The effort was not without a result. It sent +the drops of blood dripping from the ends of his fingers. + +Groot Willem was not unmoved in these dire moments. He too had his +unwillingness to die,--his chapter of regrets. One, that he should +never again see his relatives; another, that the object for which he had +undertaken the expedition could never be accomplished. + +The faithful Kaffir was not rendered insensible by knowing that death +was awaiting him, and now near at hand. + +"Baas Willem," he said, looking pityingly upon his young master, "you be +going to die. I bless that God your father and mother has told me +about. I never more go back to Graaf Reinet, to see them cry for you." + +The arrangements for the execution were by this time completed; but the +cruel chief was not allowed to try his skill in the manner he had +designed. + +Just as he was about to raise the roer to his shoulder and take aim at +one of the condemned captives, a large party of dark-skinned men made +their appearance upon the spot. + +In the scene of confusion caused by their arrival, the would-be +murderers knew not whether they were friends or foes, until they heard a +war-cry that was strange to their ears, and saw themselves surrounded by +a body of stalwart warriors armed with bows, spears, and guns,--at least +two guns were seen, carried by two white men, whom the captives joyfully +recognised. It was Hans and Arend. Their companions were Macora and +his Makololo. + +The reprieve was effected in an instant, and along with it the release +of the prisoners. + +There was no occasion for the shedding of blood, for there was no +resistance made on the part of the intended executioners. Their +captives were at once delivered up along with their guns, horses, and +other property,--the principal part of which was restored before any +explanation could be given. + +And now again was Groot Willem called upon to obey the dictates of a +humane heart, and intercede with Macora to obtain mercy for others. But +for him, the Makololo chief would have put to death every Zooloo upon +the ground, and then proceeded to their village to seek further +retaliation. + +They all united in restraining him from violence; and the baffled +murderers were permitted to take their departure without the least +outrage being inflicted upon them. + +"Your arrival was very fortunate," said Hendrik, addressing Hans and +Arend. "Just in the nick of time; but to me it is very mysterious. How +came you and your friends here to know of our dilemma?" + +"There's no great mystery about it," answered Hans. "When we were told +this morning that you were captured and in danger of being killed, of +course we started immediately, and have been travelling all day in hot +haste to your rescue." + +"But how was it possible for you to learn that we were in trouble?" + +"From Sindo, the man Macora was going to kill for his ambition." + +Sindo, then, had not been ungrateful; he had walked, or rather run, all +night, to give warning of the danger threatening those to whom he owed +his life. Having no influence among their captors, he knew that the +only plan for serving the captives was to give notice to those who had +power to assist them. This act of gratitude he had successfully +accomplished. + +There is many a slip between the cup and the lip. The adage was in +their case illustrated. But for the mention of Sindo's name, as the +captives were being conducted to the place of execution, awakening in +the Zooloo's mind a suspicion of treachery, the rescuers would have +arrived too late. The delay caused by the inquiry after Sindo, at the +village, was that which had caused the cup to slip. + +The released captives now inquired for Sindo, wishing to embrace him. + +He was not upon the ground. Completely exhausted with his long run, he +had not been able to return with the deliverers, but had remained at the +camp, where the hopo was being constructed. + +No time was lost in staying by a spot fraught with so many unpleasant +memories; and by the dawn of day our adventurers and their African +friends were well on the way towards their encampment. + +On reaching it they found Swartboy in a state of strange mental +confusion, through joy at their return, and anger at Congo, for having +allowed those under his care to get into such terrible trouble. + +The service that Sindo had rendered his white friends fully +re-established him in the favour of Macora, and he was invited to make +his home again among his own people,--an invitation that was eagerly +accepted. + + + +CHAPTER THIRTY. + +THE HOPO. + +Groot Willem was, for the time, cured of the desire to seek further +adventures in the chase. He had come to the place for the express +purpose of procuring two young giraffes, and taking them safely to the +Dutch consul. The experience of the last few days had shown him that +his object would not be better accomplished by thus exposing himself to +the chances of dying some horrible death. Guided by this dearly-bought +belief he was contented to amuse himself by joining the Makololo in the +construction of the trap. In this work he was assisted by the other +three, all of whom were now thinking more of home than of giraffes, or +anything else. + +The trap was to consist of two high fences converging upon each other, +so as to form a figure somewhat in shape like the letter V. They were +to be about a mile and a half long; and at the point of convergence a +space was to be left open, wide enough to permit of the largest animal +to pass through. Beyond the angle, or where it should have been, had +the fences met, was dug a pit about forty feet long, fifteen wide, and +eight deep. Heavy trunks of trees were laid along its edges, slightly +projecting over them. The intention was, that any animal driven through +would be precipitated into the pit from which escape would be +impossible. Near it the fences were made of great strength and height, +to resist any attempt at leaping over them, or pressing them down. + +The pit was covered with reeds and rushes; and no means were neglected +to make the hopo as effective as possible for the purpose required of +it. + +Working with a will,--both white hunters and black Makololo,--the hopo +was soon pronounced complete, and ready to receive the game; and the +next day was appointed to carry out the objects of its construction. A +mimosa forest lay in front of it,--for on this account had the situation +been selected. This forest was to be "beaten" by the men of Macora, and +all its four-footed denizens driven into the trap. + +Early in the morning the whole tribe, with the white hunters and their +dogs, mustered for the grand drive. They were divided into two parties. +Willem, Hendrik, and Macora led one to the left, while Hans, Arend, and +a principal warrior and hunter of the Makololo conducted the other to +the right, thus taking the mimosa forest on both flanks. The area to be +surrounded was about four miles in length and three in breadth. + +On arriving at its northern edge, the great cover was entered by the +beaters along with most of the dogs. The white hunters, who were +mounted on their own horses, and some of the Makololo who rode upon +oxen, kept along the borders, to prevent the startled game from breaking +cover at the sides. For a time the beaters and their canine companions +appeared vying with each other, as to which could make the greatest +noise; and the effect of their united efforts was soon observed by those +riding outside the timber. + +Before they had proceeded half a mile from the point of separation, they +had sufficient evidence that the repose of many species of wild beasts +had been disturbed. Mingled with the loud trumpeting of elephants were +the sounds of crashing branches, the roar of lions, the shrieks of +baboons, and the wild, horribly human, laughter of hyenas. + +Those riding outside had been instructed by Macora to keep a little in +the rear of the line of beaters; and the wisdom of this counsel was soon +made clear to Groot Willem and Hendrik. A herd of elephants broke from +the bushes, but a few yards ahead of them, and were allowed to shamble +off over the plain unmolested. They were not wanted in the trap. + +Some zebras also broke from the cover soon after and they also were +permitted to escape scot free. + +When not far from the termination of the drive, at that side where +Willem and Hendrik were guarding, a grand drove of buffaloes rushed into +the open ground. Fortunately the party were at some distance from the +timber at the time, and also a little to the rear of the rushing herd, +else they would have had some difficulty to escape from being run over +and trampled to death. Several of the buffaloes left the forest nearly +opposite to them, and in joining the main drove they took a course that +caused the hunters some hard riding to get out of the way of their +horns. + +Immediately after the fortunate escape of the buffaloes,--fortunate for +the hunters themselves,--the eyes of Groot Willem were blest with the +sight of the objects he most desired to see. A small herd of seven or +eight giraffes, in escaping from the skirmishers, noisily advancing +among the trees, shot forth into the open ground. They were near the +funnel-shaped extremity of the trap. If once outside the fence they +would get off; and the toil of two weeks would all have been undertaken +to no purpose. Striking the spurs into the sides of his horse, Groot +Willem, followed by Hendrik, galloped forward to cut off their retreat. +Never did Willem remember a moment of more intense excitement. + +Two young giraffes were seen with the herd. Were they to escape the +enclosure of the _hopo_? A few seconds would decide. The herd and the +hunters were now moving in two lines at an angle to each other, their +courses rapidly converging. This was soon observed by the timid +giraffes; and, unconscious of the danger that threatened them, they +turned and were soon within the wide and far-extended jaws of the hopo. + +Had they continued in their first course only a few paces farther, they +would have been safe from the fate that awaited them; but, as man +himself often does, in seeking safety they took the direction leading to +danger. + +The beaters had now reached the termination of the mimosa forest; and +the parties from both sides were now coming together to the open ground. +Within the two walls of the hopo they could see before them a living, +moving mass, composed of many varieties of animals; among them they saw +with regret two elephants and a rhinoceros. + +Towering far above the heads of all others were those of the giraffes, +which seemed striving to be the foremost in precipitating themselves +into the pit. + +The mass of moving bodies became more dense, as the space in which they +moved grew contracted by the enclosing fences. + +When about a quarter of a mile from the pit, the sagacious elephants +turned, and, seeing an army of men and dogs advancing towards them, +broke through the fence and were free. Several zebras--much to the +delight of the hunters--followed through the breach they had made. The +camelopards were too far ahead to avail themselves of this means of +escape. They were doomed to captivity. + +The Makololo were all mad with the excitement of the chase. Uttering +discordant ear-piercing yells, they rushed onward, impatient to witness +the struggles of the multitudes of victims certain to be precipitated +into a hole, towards which they were rushing heedless of all else but +fear. Every demoniac passion existing in earthly life appeared to be +fully aroused within the souls of their pursuers. They seemed frantic +with rage at the escape of the elephants, though these would undoubtedly +have defeated the object for which the hopo had been erected. Their +only object seemed to be the destruction of animal life, the shedding of +blood, the sight of agony. + + + +CHAPTER THIRTY ONE. + +DISAPPOINTED. + +Before reaching the pit, several antelopes and other animals had been +passed,--killed or injured in the crush and rush. Such of these as were +still living, received but a passing glance and a blow from those who +were hastening onward to a scene more wild--more frightful and horribly +human in origin and execution--than words will describe. + +The novelty and excitement of the scene, and the infectious example of +the maddened Africans, inspired Groot Willem and his companions with a +savage, blood-seeking intoxication of mind that urged them forward with +nearly as much insane earnestness as the most frenzied of the Makololo. + +The herds they had been driving before them were now concentrated into a +quivering, struggling, noisy mass. The pit was soon full of roaring, +bellowing, bleating, growling victims of the chase, that were piled one +upon another, until hundreds escaped by passing over the backs of those +that had preceded them. + +When the overflowing of the pit had passed off, and the hunters came up +to gaze on what remained, they beheld a scene never to be forgotten in +life. Underneath, they could hear the roaring of a lion, being +smothered by its favourite game. For the first time, it had too many +antelopes within its reach. There was one creature in the crowd that +was not to be overlain by the others. It was the muchocho, or white +rhinoceros, they had seen while driving in the game. Every time it +moved, bodies were crushed, bones broken, and the cries of rage and +distress from what seemed a miniature representation of a perdition for +animals became imperceptibly diminished by several voices. The muchocho +was apparently standing on its hind legs in the bottom of the pit, while +the upper part of its body was supported by the creatures that were +screaming under its immense weight. + +Mingled with the struggling mass were seen some of the camelopards; and, +fearing they might be subjected to the destroying power of the huge +rhinoceros, Willem placed the muzzle of his roer near one of its eyes, +and fired. + +The report of the gun was scarcely heard, so stunning to the ears of all +was the fracas that continued; though the effect of the discharge was +soon evident on the muchocho. It ceased to live. + +All hands now set to work at clearing the pit, in order to save the +young giraffes from being killed; that is, if they were yet living. +Rheims with loops at the ends were thrown over the heads of the +antelopes and other small game, by which they could be hauled out. + +After a short time spent at this work, a partial clearance was effected. +The body of a young giraffe was now carefully got out. It was examined +with an interest verging on delirium. It was quite warm, but lifeless, +its neck being broken. + +One of the old ones,--a large bull,--struggling violently, was now the +most conspicuous animal in the pit, and being, as Hendrik said, "too +much alive," was killed by a bullet. + +The head and neck of another young giraffe was seen, whose body was +nearly buried under animals larger than itself. It was apparently +unharmed. Every care was taken to get it out without injury, and it was +drawn gently up and two rheims placed around its neck, in order to +hinder it from running away. It was not more than two months old,--just +the age the hunters desired,--but it soon became evident that there was +something wrong. While continuing its struggle for freedom, they +observed that one of its fore feet was not set on the ground. The leg +was swinging to and fro. It was broken. + +The creature was young, bright, and beautiful, but could not be taken to +the Colony. It could never visit Europe. The only favour that could be +shown this suffering, trembling, frightened victim of Groot Willem's +ambition was to put it out of pain by shooting it, and the young hunter +witnessed its death with as much pity and regret as he had felt at the +loss of poor Smoke. + +The pit was at length emptied; and the hunters now paused to contemplate +their spoil. Seven giraffes had been destroyed, nearly all of them by +having their necks broken. These, six or seven feet in length, had been +too delicately made to resist the impetus of the heavy herds passing +over them. + +Although they had failed in procuring what they wanted, it was not yet +proved that the hopo had been built in vain. It might still be +available for another time. So they were informed by Macora, who said +that, in two or three days, other giraffes might be found in the mimosa +grove, and a second drive could be tried. + +This partly reconciled the hunters to the disappointment of the day, +though all felt a strong regret that two of the beautiful creatures, +such as they wished-for, had been driven into the trap only to die. +Many herds might be discovered, without having among them any young, +such as the two now lying dead at their feet. Other young camelopards +might be caught and killed; but many failures must occur before Groot +Willem would relinquish the undertaking for which he had travelled so +far. + +The time was not wholly lost to the Makololo, for a supply of food had +been obtained that would take them some time to preserve, and longer to +eat. + +The day after the grand hunt, long rheims, suspended on upright poles, +were covered with strings of meat drying in the sun, while all the +bushes and small trees in the vicinity were festooned after the same +fashion. For the dried meat, or _biltongue_, only the best and +favourite portions of each animal were used, and the rest was removed +beyond the encampment, where it formed a banquet for vultures, hyenas, +and other carrion creatures of the earth and air. + +Three days after the butchery, all that remained of the slaughtered +animals was the dried meat and polished bones. + + + +CHAPTER THIRTY TWO. + +DRIVEN AWAY. + +Four days after the unsuccessful attempt to capture the young giraffes +in the hopo, the spoor of others were found on the river-bank. + +Another herd of camelopards had made a home in the forest of +_cameel-doorn_. Some of the herd were young. This was evident from the +spoor. + +The hopes of Groot Willem, that he might succeed in accomplishing his +dearest wishes, were again high and strong; and his companions were no +less enthusiastic. + +Another attempt to fulfil their mission might be successful. + +If so, Hendrik and Arend within a few weeks would be in the society of +those of whom they were hourly thinking, and Hans would be making +preparations for the long-contemplated visit to Europe. + +The chief Macora had not shown the least inclination to abandon them on +the failure of the first attempt. He had promised his assistance until +the object they desired should be obtained; and, although domestic and +political duties called him home, he stated his determination to stay +with them. + +His promise had been given to Willem, and everything was to be +sacrificed before that could be broken. + +For his devoted friendship the hunters were not ungrateful. They had +learnt by this that without his assistance they could do nothing. + +On the evening before the day intended for the second trial of the hopo, +the giraffe hunters, in high spirits, were sharing with the chief their +last bottle of Schiedam, as a substantial tribute of respect to the man +who had made their wishes his own. + +While indulging in pleasant anticipations of the morrow, their designs +were suddenly upset by a communication from Sindo. + +He had but just returned from a journey to the north,--to the place +where he had found a home after being banished by Macora,--to the tribe +which owned for its chief him whose horses had been shot by our hunters. + +Sindo's visit had been a stolen one, for the purpose of bringing away +his wife and children. In this he had been successful; but he had also +succeeded in bringing away something more,--information that the Zooloo +chief, that our young hunters had offended, was still thirsting for +revenge for his losses and disappointments. + +He had seen Moselekatse, the tyrant-king of all that part of Africa, and +had informed him that the Makololo chief, Macora,--his old enemy,--had +returned to his former home, and had robbed a friend of the noble chief +Moselekatse of valuable property,--of horses, guns, and slaves. + +A large force had immediately been sent to capture Macora and his +people, or chase them, as Sindo said, "out of the world." + +The enemy might be expected in two or three hours! + +Sindo's warning was not unheeded; and scouts were at once sent out to +watch for the approach of the enemy. A danger that Macora had already +apprehended was now threatening them. + +Early next morning the scouts returned with the report that +Moselekatse's warriors were indeed coming. They had camped during the +night about five miles off, and might be upon them within an hour. + +Hastily springing upon their horses, Arend and Hendrik galloped off in +the direction of the enemy, for the purpose of making a reconnaissance. +During their absence the others were packing up all their valuables, and +making preparation for either a fight or a flight. + +The two cornets returned half an hour afterwards, bringing the report, +that about three hundred armed men were approaching. + +"There is not the least doubt but that they mean war," said Hendrik. +"We rode up to within three hundred yards of them. Immediately on +seeing us they commenced yelling, and rushing about the plain; and, as +we turned to ride back, several spears were sent after us." + +"Then the sooner we get away from here the better," suggested Hans. +"There are too many of them for us to hold our own with." + +"Macora does not seem to think so," observed Groot Willem. + +All turned to the chief, who, along with his men, was observed making +preparations for a pitched battle. + +"Ask him, Congo," said Willem, "if he thinks we can drive the enemy +back." + +The Kaffir made the inquiry, and was told, in reply, that Moselekatse's +men were never driven back except by superior numbers, and that they +certainly would not be defeated by a few. + +"But what means that? Is he going to stay here for all of us to be +killed?" + +To this question the chief answered that he and his men were going to +act according to the desire of his friend Willem. + +"Then they shall be off as quick as possible," said Willem. "None of +them shall lose their lives on my account, if I can help it." + +Not a moment was lost in getting away from the ground and so sudden was +the departure that the Makololo had to leave behind them the dried meat +they had taken so much trouble in curing. + +The retreat was not commenced one moment too soon. As Groot Willem and +Hendrik remained a little behind the others, they beheld the enemy +approaching the spot that had been relinquished by the Makololo, +apparently eager for a conflict. + +There was no longer a doubt of the real object of their visit. They had +come for the purpose of taking vengeance. Their cries and angry +gestures proclaimed it; and, without waiting to see or hear more, the +young hunters put spurs to their steeds and joined Macora in the +retreat. + + + +CHAPTER THIRTY THREE. + +THE RETREAT. + +Macora and his party were in hopes that the pursuit might not be +continued far,--that the enemy, satisfied in having broken up their camp +and driven them off the ground, would return to their own country. + +In this hope they were doomed to disappointment. It turned out that +those in pursuit of them formed an expedition sent out by Moselekatse +for the purpose of extending his dominion and there was not the least +likelihood that the tyrant would relinquish his object until he had +obtained success. This soon became the conviction of Macora; and he +lost no time in hastening back to his home, and preparing for the +invasion. + +As the Makololo are of a race superior to most other South African +tribes, the young hunters were surprised to see the feeling of alarm +exhibited by them on learning that on of Moselekatse's armies was +advancing to attack them. In place of preparing to resist the +approaching foe, a majority of the Makololo seemed only to contemplate +flight. + +A little information from Macora concerning Moselekatse was a +satisfactory explanation of this mystery. He informed his white guests +that the Matabili--that is, the people of Moselekatse--were the greatest +warriors in Southern Africa,--that Moselekatse, their king, could +command five thousand men, and that frequently his orders to the +officers who led them to battle were to give no quarter to the enemy. +Macora admitted that his own people were not cowards, but that he could +not maintain a war against such a king as Moselekatse. He was quite +certain that, should they make a stand and give battle to the foe, at +least one half of his tribe would be killed. They would moreover be +stripped of all their property, and what was left of the tribe would +have to become slaves of the tyrant, and look after his cattle. There +was but one way of holding their own with Moselekatse; and that was to +remove everything of any value beyond his reach. By this means had +Macora and his people maintained their independence for several years, +and the same method must be resorted to again. + +This was the decision arrived at; and, on reaching his own kraal, Macora +at once put the design into execution. + +The cattle were hastily collected and driven off, while the men, women, +and children started after them, each carrying a load of household +utensils, elephants' teeth, and such other property as could be +conveniently removed in such a hasty decampment. The women, children, +and cattle were sent on in advance, while Macora and his warriors +followed behind as a rear-guard, to protect them against any surprise. + +Some time would be required in crossing the Limpopo, and, as the +distance to the nearest drift was about five miles, there could be +danger of an attack before all could effect the crossing of the stream. +This fear was fully realised. The ford was not a safe one; and there +was great difficulty in getting some of the cattle to take it: many of +them had to be assisted in landing on the opposite bank. All this +required time; and, before the crossing was completed an alarm was +given. The Matabili were coming up in the rear. + +So accustomed were Moselekatse's warriors to success in any engagement, +that they made no halt before commencing hostilities, although not more +than two hundred of them had got forward upon the ground. + +Armed with assegais, and defended with shields, they rushed forward with +hideous yells, exhibiting an insatiate thirst for blood that can only be +acquired by long familiarity with deeds of violence. + +But although the Makololo had fled from their home without striking a +blow in its defence, they now proved themselves warriors in the true +sense of the word. + +Rushing to the encounter, they met the Matabili hand to hand, and in the +conflict that followed both parties fought with the fury of demons. One +might have supposed that Macora's principal object was the protecting of +his white friends. From the behaviour of his men it was evident that he +had commanded them to keep between the young hunters and the enemy. But +the opportunity for practising a little of their own profession was not +lost upon the two young soldiers Hendrik and Arend. They were foremost +to fire on the Matabili; though their example was quickly followed by +Willem and Hans, who took their first sight at the body of a human being +along the barrel of a gun. + +As the four pieces were discharged, a like number of Moselekatse's men +went to the earth; and two more were shot down the next instant by +Macora, Sindo, and another Makololo, all three of whom chanced to be +armed with muskets. + +Under cover of their horses the hunters loaded again, and four more of +their enemies were prevented from taking any further part in the +conflict. + +Could the assailants have closed with those who were shooting them down, +the hunters would soon have fallen before their assegais, but this they +were prevented from doing by the Makololo. Protected by their shields, +and each side having great skill in using them, a single pair of the +native combatants would contend for a long time before either would be +seen to fall. + +This, however, was not the case when any of the four hunters selected an +antagonist for his aim. Every report of their guns was followed by the +fall of a dusky assailant; and the Matabili warriors soon discovered the +thinning of their ranks. They learnt too, that fire-arms, which they +had long held in contempt, might, if properly handled, become very +destructive weapons. + +They now saw that they had made a mistake in commencing the action so +confidently, and before the arrival of their full force, and were at +length compelled to retreat, leaving more than thirty of the dead upon +the ground. + +In the affray, Macora lost but six men, and was so gratified with the +result that he was half inclined to pursue his enemies, in the hope of +rendering the victory more substantial and complete. Knowing, however, +that any advantage he might obtain would be but temporary, that several +thousand men would soon be against him, and that in the end he would be +compelled to retreat, he abandoned the idea of pursuing the discomfited +enemy, and continued the crossing of the stream. + +By sunset the whole tribe, with all their property, was safe on the +opposite shore, where the warriors were placed in a strong position to +repel any attempt on the part of the Matabili to effect a crossing. +This being done, the retreat was continued. Macora had now no country. +He had lost his home, by assisting his white friends. He was now a +fugitive, with a vengeful foe in his rear, and without friends in front. +His tribe was too small to command respect amongst those he might +encounter upon his march. They would soon hear that he was pursued by +the great chief Moselekatse, and there was a prospect of his people +being hunted from place to place, and allowed no rest until robbed of +all their cattle,--their only wealth,--and perhaps also of their lives. + +While Willem and his companions were regretting the misfortunes they had +been the means of bringing upon their protector, the chief's greatest +trouble appeared to be his disappointment in having failed to assist +them. + +The last things taken over the river were the bodies of the Makololo +killed in the battle; and these were buried during the night. + +On the contrary, the bodies of the Matabili were left where they had +fallen, to be stripped of their flesh by the beasts of prey. + +To give the hunters some idea of the character and customs of his +enemies, Macora informed them that none of the Matabili ever buried +their dead, not even their own kindred; but that sons will drag the +bodies of their parents out from their village into the open plain, and +there leave them to the tender mercies of the hyenas and vultures. + +During the night, the roars, growls, and other evidences of brutish +strife, heard across the river, convinced the Makololo guard left there, +that by morning only the bones of their slain enemies would be found +upon the field of battle. This was music to the ears of the Makololo, +while the thought of their having defeated the renowned warriors of +Moselekatse almost compensated them for the loss of their homes. + + + +CHAPTER THIRTY FOUR. + +TYRANNY AND LOYALTY. + +Before a start could be made the next morning, Moselekatse's braves were +seen assembling in large force on the opposite bank of the river. As we +have said, the women, children, and cattle had been sent forward with +all possible haste, while most of the men remained to check the advance +of the enemy, and, if possible, cover the retreat for another day. + +The Bushman Swartboy had been put in charge of several oxen laden with +ivory,--a responsible trust, that partly reconciled him to the annoyance +of leaving his white masters behind, and with no one to look after them +but Congo, who, as he asserted, was always leading them into trouble. + +On leaving home, the young hunters had taken the precaution to bring +with them several guns, besides those used in the chase; and now the +reserve pieces were brought out and made ready for use. By early +daybreak the Matabili commenced crossing. Urged by the fear of the +tyrant's displeasure, in case their cowardice being reported to him, +they advanced recklessly into the stream. + +The first five or six were shot down. This did not check the ardour of +the others, who rushed madly down the bank, and commenced wading through +the water, which rose above their waists. + +The only landing-place on the opposite side was by a small galley or +ravine, not more than ten feet in breadth. To ascend through this +gulley would be a work of some difficulty, even if unopposed. But with +the passage disputed by the spears of the opposing Makololo, it would be +one of desperate danger. For all that, the Matabili determined on the +attempt, and were soon in the act of making it. + +Plunging madly across the drift, they were soon gathered in a grand +crowd at the entrance of the gulley, and striving to ascend it five or +six at a time. The passage would admit of no more. At the first glance +Macora saw the advantage of his position, and encouraged his men to hold +it. Not one of a dozen of the Matabili, who strove to enter the ravine, +succeeded in getting up its slippery sides. Without a firm footing +their assegais and shields could not be used to any advantage; and their +dead bodies were soon swept off by the current of the river. + +Those who succeeded in getting a little way up the gulley were opposed +by enemies on both sides of it, and easily speared to death. Meanwhile +the white hunters were constantly loading and firing upon those who +could not be reached by the spears of the Makololo; and in less than ten +minutes the enemy again discovered that they had made a mistake. They +saw the impracticability of getting across the river while opposed from +the opposite bank. When this fact became fully comprehended, they +retreated to the other shore, and the roar of battle was again hushed, +or only continued by wild cries of vengeance. + +In this second combat only four or five of the Makololo were wounded; +their wounds being caused by assegais thrown by those who had no other +opportunity of using their weapons. + +Knowing that, should he abandon such a good position for defence, his +enemies would immediately pursue, Macora determined to hold it, if +possible, until such time as the unprotected portion of his tribe could +get to some point distant from the scene of danger. For two hours the +hostile parties on both sides of the river remained without further +strife, except that which might be called a war of words. Threats and +taunting speeches were freely exchanged, and mutual invitations to come +across,--none of which was accepted. + +It was at length determined by Macora and his people to leave the place, +and proceed after the retreating tribe. It was not to be done, however, +without a _ruse_; otherwise the Matabili would immediately cross and +follow them. But this very thing had been thought of by Hendrik, who +now laid his plan before the chief. + +"Let all of your people steal off," said he to Macora. "The trees will +hinder the enemy from seeing them go. We that are mounted can easily +escape at any time. Let us stay, then, and keep showing ourselves to +the enemy as long as we can deceive them." + +The plan appeared feasible, excellent. Macora at once gave consent to +its being put into execution. + +"Stay," said Groot Willem. "Don't make any movement till I open +practice upon them with my long roer. I think the gun will carry to +where they are, over yonder. An occasional bullet whistling past their +ears will let them know that some of us are still here, and keep them +from suspecting that the others are gone." + +As Willem spoke, he crept out to a projecting point upon the bank, and, +taking aim at a big Matabili who stood conspicuous on the other side, +let fly at him. The man, with a loud yell, tumbled over in his tracks, +while others, also exposed, hastened to conceal themselves behind the +bushes. At this crisis the Makololo stole silently away, leaving their +chief, with Sindo and one or two others who had horses, along with the +four hunters, to guard the crossing of the stream. + +During nearly an hour that they remained by the drift, no other attempt +was made by the Matabili to approach near the bank. Nothing was seen of +them; and Macora, beginning to suspect that they might have withdrawn +from the place and got over by some other drift, suggested the giving up +the guard, and hastening on after his tribe. There was good sense in +the suggestion; for if the Matabili had found another crossing, the +tribe might be in danger. It was determined, therefore, to withdraw, +but in such a way that the enemy might still believe them to be there. + +Several articles of dress were hung upon the bushes, only slightly +showing towards the opposite side of the stream, and in such fashion as +to look like a portion of their persons; and then, Groot Willem firing a +last shot from his great gun, the guard withdrew one after another, +riding stealthily off among the trees. + +The sun was not more than an hour high, when they overtook their +retreating comrades on foot, and a little later, all going together, +came up with the women and children. As it was now near sundown, and +water chanced to be close at hand, they decided to halt there for the +night. + +The Makololo chief was fortunate in overtaking his people at the time he +did. Ten minutes later and they would have met with a greater +misfortune than had yet befallen them; for, scarce had Macora commanded +the halt, when a party of about a hundred Matabili were discovered +hovering upon the flanks of the proposed camping-place, that, but for +the arrival of Macora and his men, would have instantly made their +attack. This party of the enemy must have crossed a drift higher up the +river, as it was from that direction they appeared to have come. + +Not thinking themselves strong enough to begin the assault, for their +design had been to come up with the women and children while the +warriors were by the river, the Matabili kept their distance. But this +was soon increased by the action of the white hunters, who, mounted on +their horses and making use of their guns, were more than a match for +the hundred. These riding towards them, and firing a few shots, sent +the Matabili scampering off to a safer distance. Having chased the +hundred warriors out of sight, they returned to the camp, where they +found Macora in a state of great anxiety. He could see nothing before +him but the destruction of himself and his tribe. Groot Willem demanded +an explanation of his increased apprehension, and reminded the chief +that in their encounters with the enemy they had been so far successful. +Macora stated in reply his belief that two of more detachments of +Moselekatse's army had been sent against him. They would yet unite and +show no quarter to him, his tribe, or his friends. Their losses in the +last two encounters had been too great for them to show the least mercy. + +He furthermore informed his guests that none of Moselekatse's warriors +dare return to their chief unsuccessful. Both they and their leaders +would be put to death; and this knowledge would stimulate them to a +total recklessness of danger and a determination to succeed in their +enterprise. + +"There is but one plan I can think of," continued the Makololo +chief,--"but one way of saving my poor people, and that is, by +sacrificing myself. By hurrying on to the west, they may yet succeed in +evading the pursuit of these Matabili, and join their own kindred under +the sway of the great chief Sebituane. He would be able to protect +them. As for me," added Macora with a sigh, "I cannot go along with +them." + +The young hunters asked for an explanation, and it was given. Owing to +some long past misunderstanding, Macora had incurred this ill-will of +Sebituane, who never forgot nor forgave an offence, and, were he to +return there, would surely order him to be killed. + +Macora's advice to the hunters was, that, provided as they were with +horses, they should remove themselves out of the reach of danger, by +taking their departure for their homes. This generous counsel Groot +Willem at once refused to follow, and all the rest joined him in +declining it, each saying something to give encouragement to the other. +As for Macora's own people, they now gave a rare proof of their loyalty. +When counselled by their chief to save themselves, and leave him to his +fate, one and all rebelled against the proposal; the warriors loudly +declaring that sooner than forsake him they would die by his side. + +For the first time in their lives our adventurers saw a chief who +appeared to suffer affliction from being too much beloved by his people! +He proposed saving their lives at the expense of his own, by requesting +them to carry him a captive to Sebituane! But his followers were loyal +to a man: to a man they rejected the proposal. + + + +CHAPTER THIRTY FIVE. + +WELCOME TIDINGS. + +The white hunters were greatly vexed at thought of the trouble they had +brought upon the chief and his tribe, and tried to devise some plan by +which all might be extricated from their difficulties. + +They proposed that Macora and his people should seek refuge from their +enemies by retreating to the country of the Bakwains,--a western branch +of their own great nation, the Bechuanas, which was not far-away. + +In reply to this proposal, Macora said that none of those people would +give them protection. They dreaded to incur the displeasure of +Moselekatse, and, to keep friends with him, would even assist his +warriors in their destruction. + +The hunters then proposed that Macora should take leave of his tribe and +accompany them to the south, while his followers might go on to the +country of Sebituane. + +This plan the chief emphatically declined to adopt. Death would be +preferable to that. He would not desert those who had so nobly stood by +him. + +Moreover, it was still doubtful whether they could succeed in reaching +Sebituane. They might look for the Matabili by the break of day; and, +encumbered as they were with women, children, and cattle, their flight +was too slow for safety. + +This opinion Macora expressed to some of his followers, and, at the same +time, told them that there was one ox belonging to the tribe that the +Matabili should not have. He described the ox as the fattest one in +their possession. + +His men took the hint; and in less than two hours an ox was killed, +cooked, and eaten. + +Early in the evening, a fire was seen and shouts were heard not more +than half a mile from them. They believed that a body of their enemies +was encamped near, and only waiting for a concentration of their forces +before commencing another attack. + +They were agreeably disappointed about this; for, when morning dawned, +their eyes were gratified by the sight of two large covered wagons +outspanned upon the plain, with several oxen and horses grazing near +them. They were at no great distance off, and must have come there in +the night. It could be nothing else than an encampment of white hunters +or traders. + +Our adventurers, one and all, rode hastily for the camp, and in a few +minutes were exchanging salutations with the owners of the wagons. As +they had conjectured, it was a party of traders. They were from Port +Natal. They had been on an excursion to the north, and were now +returning to the Port. They were attended by some Kaffirs who had +accompanied them from Natal, and also a number of natives they had +picked up in the north. + +While our adventurers were trying to obtain from them a supply of +ammunition and such other things as they stood in need of, their +attention was called to Macora, by seeing that individual behaving +somewhat after the manner of a mad man. Although his people were more +than half a mile away, he was shouting to them and gesticulating in the +most violent manner, as if imparting some communication or command. + +The hunters looked in every direction, and with feelings of +apprehension. They expected to see the Matabili again coming to the +attack. But no foe was in sight. + +It was not until the chief had succeeded in attracting the attention of +his followers, and had worked them into a high state of excitement, with +what he was saying to them, that our hunters understood the meaning of +his words and gestures. It turned out that some of the native +attendants who accompanied the white traders were from the country of +Sebituane, and, therefore, the kindred of Macora's people. Only a few +days before they had left their native place. From these, the chief had +learnt that Sebituane was no longer a living man. He had died some +weeks before, leaving his daughter Ma-Mochisane in full authority at the +head of the Makololo nation. + +Macora was no longer afraid of returning to his nation. His only fear, +now, was that the Matabili might come up in such strength as to destroy +all chance of his ever revisiting his native land. + +There was now an opportunity for his followers to have a secure and +permanent home; and, at thought of this, old and young exerted +themselves to hasten their departure from the perilous spot. + +The party of traders consisted of three white men with nine African +attendants, all of them well-armed. Their assistance--especially those +who had fire-arms--might have been very valuable to the hunters in the +difficulty in which they now found themselves. + +Groot Willem, wholly unconscious that there were people who would not do +as they would be done by, lost no time in telling them of the danger +that threatened himself and his friends, and that they were every moment +expecting an attack from a large party of hostile Matabili. He +expressed his pleasure at the good fortune that had brought them a +distance at such an opportune moment. He fancied that his communication +would be sufficient to secure the co-operation of the traders, and that +they would at once take the retreating party under their protection. + +To his great surprise and indignation, as also that of his friends, the +effect of his story upon the traders was the very opposite to that he +had anticipated. They had not time for another word of conversation, +but immediately commenced _inspanning_ their oxen. + +In ten minutes after, they were _trekking_ to the south-east, _en route_ +for Port Natal. They were not the men to endanger their lives and +property by remaining longer than they could possibly avoid in the +society of those who had the misfortune to be surrounded by enemies. + +Had there been in the minds of our adventurers the slightest desire to +abandon the chief Macora in his hour of need, the conduct of the white +traders would have killed it. The mean behaviour of the latter had one +good effect. It inspired all hands with a determination to do their +best in making their retreat before the Matabili; and the march was +immediately resumed. + +Men, women, and children were all equally active and earnest in getting +beyond the reach of the pursuing foe. They knew that a long journey was +before them, and a powerful and merciless enemy in their rear. Even the +dogs seemed to understand the danger that menaced their masters, and +exerted themselves in urging along the droves. + +By travelling until a late hour, a good distance was made that same day; +and as nothing was seen or heard of the pursuing savages, our +adventurers began to think that the pursuit had been abandoned. + +Although riding on horses, they were far more fatigued than the +Makololo, who went on foot, and who, used to such an exodus, thought +nothing of its toils. The hunters would gladly have given up their +flight, thinking there was no longer a need for it. "It is only the +wicked and foolish who flee when no man pursueth," was their thought. + +But in this, the chief did not agree with them. Instead of neglecting +to take precautions, he was very particular about all the appointments +of their night camp, stationing guards around it, and outlying pickets, +to prevent any sudden surprise. Never, since the retreat commenced, had +he appeared more apprehensive of an attack. + +Our hunters became anxious to ascertain for what reason all these +precautions were being taken; and with Congo's assistance, they made +inquiry. + +The explanation Macora condescended to give was, that Moselekatse's +warriors never slept till they had accomplished their purpose. They +would certainly not relinquish the pursuit without a greater defeat than +they had yet sustained. They were, he said, only waiting until their +different parties could be got together, and they should be in force +sufficient to insure the destruction of him and his tribe. In two days +more he would be able to reach the Makololo territory, where they would +all be safe; and for that reason he was determined not to neglect any +means that might secure the safety of his followers or that of the +guests under his protection. His own life was little to him compared +with the duty he had to perform for others. + +Next morning, they were on the move before daybreak, and hastening +forward with all possible speed. Hendrik, Arend, and Hans accompanied +Macora with some reluctance, partly because they believed that flight +was no longer necessary. + +"Never mind," urged Groot Willem, to encourage them. "It will only last +two days longer, and we are going to a part of the country we have not +yet visited." + +Before noon, there was some reason for believing that Macora had +reasoned aright. A party of the Matabili suddenly appeared in advance +of the route they were pursuing. + +It was not large enough to attempt opposing the progress of the +Makololo, and, on seeing the latter, fled. + +In the afternoon, some scouts that had been left in the rear hastened +with the news that a large body of the enemy was coming up in pursuit. + +The forces of Moselekatse had become concentrated; and the hunters now +agreed with Macora that flight could no longer avail them, and that in +less than twenty-four hours a contest would be inevitable. + +It would never do to be attacked when on the march. They must halt in +some place favourable for defence. There was no such place within +sight, but Macora believed he might find a more defensible position on +the bank of the river; and towards that he hastily proceeded. + + + +CHAPTER THIRTY SIX. + +BESIEGED. + +It wanted but an hour to sundown when the Makololo reached the river. +The enemy could not be far-away, and preparations were immediately +commenced for receiving them. + +Hendrik and Arend, laying claim to more wisdom in military affairs than +the others, rode a little in advance for the purpose of choosing the +battle-field. + +Good fortune had conducted them to a spot favourable to the carrying out +of their scheme. + +A little above the place where they first struck the stream, the current +had made a sort of horseshoe bend, leaving a peninsula, which, during +the rainy season when the river was swollen, formed a large island. The +narrow and shallow channel was here uncovered with water to the width of +about fifty yards, and over this the cattle were driven. Quickly did +the Makololo secure themselves and their property in a position where +they could not be surrounded. + +There was but one way in which the enemy could easily reach them,--by +the isthmus, which was not more than fifty yards in width. Growing by +the side of the river and on the edge of the isthmus, was a gigantic +nwana-tree, which nature had been for hundreds of years producing,--as +Hendrik declared, for the special purpose of saving them. + +The nwana is one of the most remarkable trees of the African forest. +Some of them obtain the extraordinary size of ninety feet in +circumference, and are lofty in proportion. Its wood is as soft as a +green cabbage-stalk, and has been pronounced "utterly unserviceable." +The hunters did not find it so. + +Amongst other implements brought from Graaf Reinet were two good axes, +which their former experiences of a hunter's life had taught our young +adventurers were indispensable on an expedition. + +The nwana-tree was to be felled across the bar, so as to block up the +approach to the peninsula. It would form a barricade behind which an +enemy could be efficiently opposed. Swartboy produced the axes, and the +hunters set to work to cut down the tree,--two working at a time, and in +turns relieving each other. At every blow the axes were buried in the +soft spongy wood. A grand gingerbread cake could not have yielded more +readily to their efforts. + +Fortunate that it was so, as they believed that their safety depended on +felling this forest monarch before the arrival of the Matabili. The +latter could not be far-off, and every exertion was made to get the +fortress ready for receiving the attack. There was a doubt as to the +direction the tree would take in falling. Should it topple over into +the water, their labour would be lost, and the way would be open for the +Matabili to reach them by a rush. Should it fall across the isthmus, it +would form an insurmountable barrier to their enemies. In silence and +with intense interest did the Makololo stand watching for the result. +At length the tree began to move; slowly at first, but as they gazed +upon its trembling top, they could see that it was going to come down in +the right direction. Gaining velocity as it got lower, a swishing sound +was made by its branches as they passed through the air; and then the +gigantic mass struck the ground with a crash, till its huge trunk lay +stretched across the isthmus, filling it from side to side, with the +exception of a few feet at each end. They had now a barricade that +could not be easily broken, if but manfully defended. They were ready +to receive the attack of the foe. + +They would not have long to wait. As night came down, large fires were +observed in the distance. The Matabili had evidently arrived, and were +probably waiting for day, to obtain a knowledge of their position before +they should commence the attack. Before taking their stand by the +river, Macora had called for four volunteers to proceed by stealth from +the spot, and if possible reach some neutral tribe that might come to +his rescue. He was now in a position from which he could not move +without the certainty of being defeated and of course destroyed. He +might be able to maintain it for several days; and knowing that his +enemies would not raise the siege until compelled to do so, his only +hope was that of obtaining aid from some neighbouring chief, jealous of +the encroachments of the Matabili. + +Anxious to become fully reinstated in the good opinion of his chief, +Sindo was the first who had offered to go upon this perilous scout. +Three others having also volunteered, they had been despatched in +couples,--one pair leaving an hour after the departure of the first. +This division of the embassy was to insure a greater chance of its being +successful. If one couple should have the ill luck to get captured, the +other might escape. + +By the earliest hour of day the enemy began to show himself, not far +from the fortified camp. From the top of the fallen nwana our hunters +could see a large crowd of dusky warriors, that appeared to number at +least six hundred. To oppose these, Macora had not more than two +hundred and fifty men who were capable of taking part in the fight. + +At either end of the great trunk, as already stated there was an open +space that would require to be carefully watched. At both points Macora +had placed some of his bravest warriors, while the others were +distributed along the barricade, with instructions to spear any of the +enemy that should attempt to scale it. + +The Matabili had already examined the position and appeared confident of +success. They had at last brought their game to bay, and were only +resting from the fatigue of the long chase before taking steps to "carry +the fortress." + +It was bright daylight as they advanced to the assault. Dividing +themselves into two parties, they made a rush at the open spaces by the +ends of the barricade. A fierce conflict came on which lasted for some +ten minutes, and at length resulted in the assailants being forced to +retreat, after leaving several of their warriors dead in the gaps. + +But this temporary victory was not obtained without loss. Eight of the +Makololo had also fallen dead, while several others were severely +wounded. + +Macora's features began to assume an anxious and troubled expression. +Knowing that an enemy of superior force to his own was before him, that +all means of retreat was now cut off, and that an attempt to enter the +enclosure had nearly proved successful, he could not avoid feeling a +gloomy foreboding for the fate of his people. + +He knew too well the disposition of the Matabili to suppose that they +would easily relinquish their design. + +Fear of Moselekatse's displeasure on account of the losses they had +already sustained, as well as the prospect of plunder, would inspire +them with the determination to fight on as long as there was the +slightest hope of obtaining a victory. + +No assistance could be expected from other tribes of the Makololo in +less than three days. Could his position be maintained for that time? + +As the chief looked at the dead and wounded lying around him, this +question could not be answered in a satisfactory manner. His foes were +too numerous, and repeated attempts would in the end enable them to +succeed. + +This was the belief of the Makololo chief; and, notwithstanding his +confidence in the wisdom and strategic prowess of the white hunters, he +was now in a state of great anxiety. + +Two hours after the attack the only Matabili in sight were those they +had killed, but for all that it was well known that the survivors were +not far off. + +Night descended over the scene. The camp-fires of the enemy could be +distinguished through the darkness; but that signified nothing. + +Morning found our adventurers still undisturbed. To all appearance +Moselekatse's warriors, yielding to despair, had returned to their +chief, to suffer the punishment that would certainly follow from their +permitting themselves to be defeated. + +This was the belief of the white hunters, who now earnestly urged Macora +to make no further delay, but hasten on towards his countrymen. + +This advice the chief positively refused to follow. He admitted the +superiority of his allies in the arts of hunting and even war, but in a +knowledge of the character of Moselekatse and his warriors he knew +himself to be their superior. He was now in a position where he and his +people might successfully sustain themselves, and he disliked leaving +it, lest they should fall into some ambuscade of the enemy. Had he not +had reasons for expecting assistance, the case might have been +different, but confident that aid would be immediately sent to him, he +thought it better to remain where they were. + +Believing that there was a possibility of the chief being in the right, +Groot Willem and his companions of course consented to remain; not, +however, without stipulations. + +If within thirty-six hours there was no appearance of either friends or +enemies, Macora promised that he would continue the march towards his +country. + + + +CHAPTER THIRTY SEVEN. + +NOT QUITE TOO LATE. + +The stipulated time passed, and nothing was seen of the Matabili; +neither was anything known of the result of the mission of Sindo and his +companions. + +The young hunters were now quite certain that their enemies had +relinquished the idea of conquering a band protected by the intellects +and weapons of white men, and that they had returned home. + +With this opinion, that of the chief did not quite coincide. +Nevertheless, according to the agreement, he commenced making +preparations for departure. + +The cattle were driven out of the enclosure, and again started along the +track, all acting as drovers, and urging the animals onward with as much +energy as if they believed that the enemy was in close pursuit. To +Groot Willem and his companions there was something very inconsistent in +the conduct of the Makololo. + +They fought like brave men when forced to face the foe but now that no +enemy was near, they exhibited every sign of cowardice! + +At Willem's request, Congo asked the chief for an explanation of this +unaccountable behaviour. + +Macora admitted the truth of what was said, but added that his white +friends would see nothing strange in it, if they were only better +acquainted with the strategy of Moselekatse and his warriors. + +The precaution of keeping scouts in the rear was not neglected; and, a +few hours after the march had commenced, one of these brought the news +that the Matabili were in pursuit. + +As Macora had supposed, they had been waiting for him to forsake a +position so favourable for defence. + +As the white hunters had now experienced the advantage of receiving the +pursuers in a fortified place, Hendrik and Arend, spurring their horses, +rode some distance in advance of the herds, for the purpose of selecting +a second battle-field. + +In finding this, fortune refused to favour them for the second time. +The country through which they were now passing was an open plain, +presenting no natural advantages for anything but a "fair field and no +favour." This was not what they required. + +"We have gone far enough," said Hendrik, after galloping about a mile. +"Our friends can hardly reach this place before being overtaken. We +must turn back to them." + +"Of course we must," mechanically replied Arend, who was earnestly +gazing across the plain. + +Hendrik turned his eyes in the same direction, and to his surprise saw +from twenty to thirty men coming rapidly towards them. + +"We are going to be surrounded!" said Arend, as he turned his horse to +retreat. + +Without further speech, the two galloped back to their companions. + +"Macora was right," said Hendrik, as he joined Groot Willem and Hans. +"We should not have left the place where we were able to keep these +Matabili at bay. We have made a mistake." + +While Macora was being informed that warriors had been seen ahead, +several of the scouts driven in reported that a large body of the +Matabili was rapidly approaching from the rear. For a moment Hans, +Hendrik, and Arend were not quite certain that the white traders they +had met the day before were much to blame for withdrawing from the scene +of danger. To them life seemed of too much value to be relinquished +without some powerful reason. + +Hopes long and dearly cherished were now before the minds of our young +adventurers. They could not avoid thinking of their own safety. But +they had too much honour to think of deserting the brave Makololo, whom +they themselves had been instrumental in bringing into trouble. + +They all looked to Groot Willem, who would not abandon the brave chief, +to whom they were so much indebted,--not even to save his own life. +They faltered no longer. Macora's fate should be theirs. + +The chief was now urged to order a halt of his people; and, in +compliance with the request, he gave a shout that might have been heard +nearly a mile off. + +It was answered by several of those in advance, who were driving the +cattle; but amongst the many responsive voices was one that all +recognised with a frenzied joy. + +The sound of that particular voice was heard at a great distance, and +only indistinctly, but on hearing it the Makololo commenced leaping +about the ground like lunatics, several of them shouting, "Sindo! +Sindo!" + +All hastened forward as fast as their limbs could carry them, and in a +few minutes after were met by a large party of Makololo warriors, who +communicated the pleasing intelligence that more were coming up close +behind. + +Sindo and his companions had succeeded in the accomplishment of their +mission. + +Ma-Mochisane, just at that crisis, chanced to be on a visit to the +southern part of her dominions, and to have with her many warriors of +different tribes of her people. + +Macora, a friend of her childhood, was remembered. The desire of aiding +him was backed by the hereditary hatred for the Matabili, and not a +moment was lost in despatching a party of chosen fighting men to his +assistance. + +They had arrived just in time. Two hours later, and those they had been +sent to rescue would have been engaged with their enemies without the +advantage of a position favourable for defence. + +The result was that, instead of encountering a small band of outcast and +wearied Makololo, Moselekatse's men found themselves opposed by a large +force of warriors fresh and vigorous for any fray,--men who had often +been led to victory by the noble chief Sebituane. + +Moselekatse's soldiers saw that there was but one way of saving +themselves from the disgrace that threatened them; that was by a sudden +change in the tactics they had been hitherto pursuing. They resolved on +an immediate onslaught. + +They made it, only to be repulsed. + +After a short conflict they were completely routed, and retreated in a +manner that plainly expressed their intention to discontinue the +campaign. + +From that hour the young hunters never heard of them again. + +Three days after the retreat of the Matabili our adventurers were +introduced at the court of Ma-Mochisane by Macora, who made formal +declaration of his fidelity to his new sovereign. + +On the return of the chief from his long exile he was enthusiastically +received by his countrymen,--the more as from his having incurred the +resentment of the Matabili. + + + +CHAPTER THIRTY EIGHT. + +A TALK ABOUT HOME. + +"I have a favour to ask of you, my friends," said Hendrik, the day after +they had been introduced at court. "I want a little information, if +either of you can give it." + +"Very well," said Willem; "I, for one, will do all in my power to +instruct you. What do you wish to know?" + +"If we are to stay in this part of the world any longer," continued +Hendrik, "I wish some one to give me a good reason for our doing so. I +am ready to return home." + +"And so am I," said Arend. + +"And I also," added Hans. "The last three or four weeks have given me +quite enough of hunting giraffes, or anything else. We have been hunted +too much ourselves." + +"I'm sorry to hear you talking in this way," said Groot Willem, "for _I_ +am not ready to return yet. We have not accomplished the purpose for +which we set forth." + +"True," replied Hendrik, "and I believe we never shall." + +"Why do you think so?" asked Willem, with a look of surprise. + +"Tell me why I should _not_ think so," answered Hendrik. "To begin with +general principles, people are rarely successful in every undertaking in +life. We have been fortunate on our two former expeditions, and we have +no great cause to complain should we be disappointed in this one. We +cannot always expect to win. Fortune is fickle; and my chief desire now +is that we may reach home in safety." + +"I am not prepared to go home yet," rejoined Willem, in a way that told +his companions he was in earnest. "We have only been in the +neighbourhood of the Limpopo for a few short weeks; and we have been +successful in getting a good many hippopotamus teeth. We have made but +one attempt to capture giraffes; and I have not come more than a +thousand miles, to relinquish an undertaking because I have met with one +failure. What are we here for? The journey from Graaf Reinet to this +place should not be made for nothing. We must have something to show +for the loss of our time, besides the loss of our horses; and when we +have made four or five more unsuccessful attempts at procuring what we +came for, then I'll listen patiently to your talk about returning,--not +before." + +Hendrik and Arend were thinking of the many narrow escapes from death +they had met within the last few weeks, but perhaps more of their +sweethearts. Hans could not withdraw his thoughts from the anticipated +voyage to Europe but these motives for action would have been powerless +as arguments with Groot Willem, even had they made use of them. He had +come to the north for two young giraffes. Both time and money had been +lost in the expedition, and his companions could give no substantial +reason why they should not make some further attempt to accomplish the +object for which it had been undertaken. + +Willem was generally inclined to yield to the wishes of his companions. +On trivial affairs, he never made them unhappy by any spirit of +opposition, nor did he suffer himself to be made so. But they could not +control him now. It was not in the nature of either Hans, Hendrik, or +Arend to return home and leave him alone; and since he continued, as +Hendrik said, "obstinate as a _vlacke varke_" they were reluctantly +compelled to remain. + +They were told that within one day's journey to the west, there was a +large forest of _cameel-doorn_, where giraffes were often seen, and they +determined to pay this forest a visit. + +Macora had become a great favourite at court; and, having the business +on hand of establishing his tribe in a new home, he could not accompany +them. He assured them, however that there was no fear of their not +finding giraffes in the aforesaid forest, as well as a convenient place +for constructing a trap to capture them. They would also have men to +assist them. + +In order not to put them to any trouble in communicating with him, he +sent four of his best messengers along with them, two of whom were to be +sent to him whenever the hunters had any important news to communicate. + +With feelings of renewed pleasure, our young hunters once more set forth +upon an expedition, which, instead of being a retreat from savage foes, +was but the parting from friends,--that might be met again. + +Hendrik and Arend had occasionally forgotten the allurements of home in +the excitement of the chase; but when driven from one place to another, +and often in danger of losing their lives, it is not to be wondered at +that their thoughts should revert to the tranquil scenes of civilised +life. + +Swartboy was highly delighted at thought of parting with the Makololo. +For several days past he had been sorrowing within himself at the +misfortune of being found in bad company, or professing to sorrow for +it. What the Bushman's real opinions were, will ever be an unimportant +mystery on earth; though he never lost an opportunity of endeavouring to +prove that all the misfortunes occurring to his masters had been owing +to the fact that they were guided by Congo,--that they had been in +company with people who spoke a language the Kaffir could understand, +and that he himself could not. This he seemed to think was sufficient +reason for any trouble that might befall them. They had left the tribe +now, and Swartboy had become one of ten, and not one among hundreds. He +had certain duties to perform that gave him a status in the company. +His complaints and suggestions were now listened to, and he began to +give expression to the hope that he might yet succeed in bringing the +expedition to a successful issue! + +On the way to the mimosa forest nothing of any interest occurred, even +to Hans, who, along the route, kept lingering behind his companions to +examine the plants that were to be seen along the way. There was one +little incident, however. Apparently a very interesting one to the +dogs. + +While passing an elevation that might almost have been called a +mountain, a troop of chacmas, or dog-faced baboons was seen descending +from the summit, probably in search of water. The hunters had often +heard that dogs have a greater hatred for these animals than for any +others; and they now had strong evidence of the truth of this statement. +Only one dog of the whole pack had ever encountered chacmas before; +yet, immediately on seeing them, all seemed aroused to the highest pitch +of fury it was possible for canine nature to attain. Simultaneously +they rushed towards the baboons, baying savagely as they ran. + +Sheer instinct seemed to have stirred them to this animosity against +animals whose aspect, in some respects, resembled their own. + +"Ride forward," shouted Willem, "or our dogs will be killed." + +Up to this time the baboons had shown no disposition to retreat. They +appeared to think that the trouble of fighting dogs was not so great as +that of returning up the mountain; but at the first report of Groot +Willem's roer, they scattered off after a fashion that left the dogs not +the slightest chance of overtaking them. + +Only one of them remained behind, and it was the animal that had +received the shot. Being wounded, it was immediately attacked by the +dogs, who could not be choked off till they had torn the ugly brute into +shreds. + + + +CHAPTER THIRTY NINE. + +AMONG THE MIMOSAS. + +The hunters were now intent upon but one object,--that of procuring the +giraffes. The roar of a lion near the camp could not have drawn them +out of it. An elephant carrying many pounds of ivory was a sight that +did not awaken sufficient interest to tempt a pursuit. All had a full +appreciation of the task to be accomplished before they could return to +their home, and they would allow nothing to interfere with the business +before them. + +By the side of the mimosa grove, which was now to be the scene of their +labours, ran a small stream. On its banks they soon discovered the +spoor of giraffes. Some of the tracks were of small dimensions, +evidently the hoof-marks of young calves. Groot Willem was in high +spirits. There was once more a prospect of satisfying his hunter +ambition. His companions, though not so confident of success, were +equally as anxious to obtain it. + +The day after their arrival on the borders of the _cameel-doorn_ forest, +a drove of giraffes was seen coming out from among the timber and making +their way to the stream. + +The timid animals, unaware of their proximity to man, walked on until +within one hundred and fifty yards of the spot where the hunters stood, +before seeing the latter. They then turned suddenly, and with a swift +but awkward gait retreated westward across the open plain, and entirely +away from the mimosa forest. Hendrik and Arend were with some +difficulty restrained from pursuing them. There was an opportunity for +an exciting chase; and to remain inactive and see the giraffes disappear +over the plain, required a strong self-denying effort. + +It was Groot Willem who held them in check. + +"Did you not see that there were three young ones in the drove?" said +he. "Their home is very likely in this forest and we must not frighten +them away from it." + +"They have already been hunted," answered Hendrik. "I am sure I saw an +arrow sticking in the side of one of them. Some black has amused +himself by torturing a creature he was unable to kill." + +"It's a great pity they saw us at all," said Willem; "but they will +probably return to the shelter of the trees. We must make sure that +they have their haunt about here; and then we can send for some of +Macora's people, and let them build us another trap. That appears to be +the only way of catching them." + +Another day passed, in which the hunters amused themselves in killing +reed bucks and other game in larger quantities than they required. +Nothing more of the giraffes was seen; and on the next day the party +started off on the spoor of the giraffes they had seen. + +Another mimosa forest was discovered about fifteen miles farther to the +west; and on riding around it, they came upon a small lagoon. Its banks +were trampled with the hoof-marks of many giraffes, some of which were +very small. They had evidently been lately made, and by the same drove +they had seen three days before. From this it was evident that the +flock frequented both forests. + +"We have seen quite enough for the present," said Willem. "Our next +plan is to send for Macora's promised assistance, and construct another +trap." + +In this all the others agreed; and then arose the question. Where shall +the trap be built? + +"We may as well have it at the other grove," said Hendrik, "for we can +easily drive them back to the place where they were first seen." + +No strong reasons could be advanced against this suggestion, and it was +adopted. + +Next morning two of the Makololo were despatched to Macora, for the +purpose of claiming his promised assistance; and all went back to the +forest first visited, and there encamped. + +On the day the chief's workmen were expected to arrive, Hendrik and +Arend had ridden a few miles up the stream seeking for something to +destroy. Impelled by that incomprehensible desire for taking life so +natural to the hunter, they could not rest quietly at night unless they +had killed something during the day. + +They had arrived at a thick belt of forest, consisting of acacias and +evergreen shrubs, and trees of the strelitzia, zamia, and speckboom, +when their ears were assailed by the sound of breaking branches, and the +unmistakable rushing of some large animals through the thicket. + +"Prepare yourself, Arend; we may have some sport here," cried Hendrik, +and both drew rein to await the _denouement_. + +A few seconds only elapsed when the forms of two full-grown giraffes +were observed breaking from the thicket. On the back of one of these +was a leopard. Blood was streaming down its breast, and it was reeling +wildly in its gait. + +Knowing that the leopard is a cowardly creature, and that its capability +for taking its prey is so great that it rarely suffers from want of +food, and never where there is an abundance of game, the youths knew +that its attack on the giraffe must have been caused by some other +motive than that of satisfying the appetite of hunger. Its young had +been disturbed in their lair, or the giraffes had in some other way +aroused its animosity. On reaching the open ground it was seen that the +unencumbered giraffe quickly forsook its companion, which was now +showing unmistakable signs of being able to go but a very little +farther. Its life-blood was flowing from its neck, and the stately +monster was about to topple over under the injuries it had received from +its fierce, agile enemy. The hunters were spectators of an incident +such had probably never before happened,--that of a leopard killing a +giraffe. Circumstances had favoured the beast of prey; and the huge +ruminant, that had in some unconscious way aroused its anger, was being +destroyed by an animal not the tenth part of its own strength or bulk. + +Two dogs that were along with the hunters, not heeding the voices of +their owners, essayed to take a part in the destruction of the innocent +creature. Both ran yelping after it, and endeavoured to lay hold of its +heels. Lifting one of its feet, the tottering camelopard dashed it with +unerring aim against one of the dogs, with a force that threw the cur +several feet backward, where it lay sprawling in the last convulsive +motions of life. By making this effort, the reeling body of the giraffe +lost its balance, and throwing its head violently to one side it fell +heavily to the earth, its shoulders covering part of the leopard's body, +and crushing the latter to death. Like Samson, the leopard had brought +destruction upon itself! + +Handing the reins of the bridle to Arend, Hendrik walked up within a few +feet of the leopard's head, and put an end to its snarling screams by a +ball through the brain. + +What little life remained in the giraffe soon departed from it, along +with the blood which the beast of prey had let out of its veins. +Standing over the two carcasses, the hunters tried to arrive at some +comprehension of the strange scene they had witnessed. They had heard +of a lion having ridden on the back of a giraffe for a distance of many +miles, and had treated the story as a fabrication. Before them was +evidence that a leopard had travelled no little distance in a similar +manner. Why should not a lion do the same? Notwithstanding the +thickness of the hide that covered the neck of the giraffe, it had been +torn to shreds, that were hanging down over its shoulders. The long +claws and tusks of the leopard had been repeatedly buried in its flesh, +arteries and veins had been dragged from their beds and laid open, ere +the strength and life of the animal had forsaken it. This could not +have been the work of a few seconds. + +Several minutes may have been required for inflicting the injuries the +giraffe had suffered, and during that time its merciless foe was +probably wholly unconscious that it was being borne far from the scene +where the attack had been commenced. Death had saved it from the +surprise of discovering that, in the practice of its ferocious fury, it +had been carried far away from the young it was making such efforts to +defend. + + + +CHAPTER FORTY. + +ANOTHER DISAPPOINTMENT. + +Three days after the departure of the messengers, Macora's promise of +aid was again fulfilled by the arrival of thirty workmen. A site for +the hopo was chosen about half a mile from the forest edge, and the +construction of it was immediately commenced. + +Anxious to learn the result of another attempt at capturing giraffes, +the hunters toiled early and late. Two of them were constantly handling +the axes, felling small trees, which the blacks transported to the place +where they were to be used, while the other two superintended the +setting of the sticks. The labour of constructing this trap was not so +great as the other, for a more convenient site had been chosen. The two +fences were to be placed a little beyond the sides of the mimosa grove, +which was not more than half a mile wide; nor was the pit made so large +as the first; and by toiling nearly all the time from sunrise to sunset, +the contrivance was got ready for use in seven days. + +While the work was progressing, several giraffes had been seen in the +neighbourhood, and the hopes of the hunters were once more in the +ascendant. All were in high spirits with the prospect that, within two +or three days, they might be on their return to Graaf Reinet. To make +more sure of success they paid a visit to the second mimosa grove, +taking along with them a large party of the Makololo. Their object was +to drive the giraffes out of that tract of timber into the one where the +trap was being prepared for them. During their excursion no camelopards +were seen in this second grove; but this, in the opinion of the hunters, +was of little consequence. They would be discovered in the place where +they were wanted; and in this hope they hastened back to the hopo. + +The same means for driving the giraffes into the trap were again +employed. A regular battue was established,--all hands taking share in +it. The Makololo, accompanied by their dogs, and making as much noise +as lay in their power, passed through the tract of timber, while Willem +and Hendrik rode along one side, and Hans and Arend on the other. + +As the beaters drew near the end where the trap was established, Willem +began to have an apprehension that something was wrong. No herds of +large game were seen escaping from the cover. No sounds of crashing +sticks and breaking branches struck upon his ear. The forest seemed +deserted by all but the noisy Makololo, who were working their way +through its shady aisles. The termination of the battue was at length +reached. Within the pen were seen enclosed a few small antelopes of +common species, a pair of brindled gnus, and some wild hogs. + +This was a bitter disappointment. The giraffes had got away, no one +knew how or where. They might return again; but no one could be certain +of this. Those amongst the Makololo who professed to be best acquainted +with their habit, expressed the belief that they had migrated to same +extensive forests far-away towards the south, and that no more +camelopards might be found in that neighbourhood for the six months to +follow. They (the Makololo) were anxious to return to their homes. +Perhaps this may have guided them in their opinion. They had huts to +build, and land to cultivate for their families, and had neglected these +duties in obedience to the command of their chief. The hunters could +not reasonably detain them longer, and, though with reluctance, +permitted them to take their departure. + +Three days were passed in riding about the neighbourhood, and exploring +it within a circle of twenty miles. Several small groves of +_cameel-doorn_ were found, but no camelopards could be seen. They had +evidently forsaken that district or country, and might not return for +many weeks or months. The Makololo appeared to have spoken the truth. + +"I don't say that we have been acting like fools," said Arend; "but I +will say that we deserve to be called nothing else, if we squander any +more time in search of what fate has decreed that we are not to obtain." + +"Go on, Arend!" exclaimed Hendrik. "I could not talk more sensibly +myself." + +"I have nothing more to say at present," said Arend, with a significant +shake of the head, as much as to say that the subject was too plain to +require discussion. + +"What should we do, Hans?" asked Groot Willem. + +"Start for home," was the ready answer. "I am now of Hendrik's +opinion," continued the botanist. "We should not expect to be +successful in every undertaking, and we have for some time been engaged +on one in which we seem destined to fail." + +"Very well," said Groot Willem. "Let us first go back to the country of +Macora. It will be so far on our way to Graaf Reinet." + +Seeing that Swartboy was anxious to give his opinion on this important +subject, Hendrik was kind enough to give him a chance by asking for it. +The Bushman possessed to an extraordinary degree the not unusual +accomplishment of saying a very little in a great many words. +Fortunately, for the gratification of his vanity, the hunters were at +supper, and had time to listen to his circumlocution. + +The failure of the expedition so far was, in Swartboy's opinion, wholly +owing to Congo. He had known from the first that no success could +attend them while guided by a Kaffir, or any race of blacks whose +language a Kaffir could understand. + +Swartboy further informed them that in his childhood he had daily seen +giraffes; and that if they were amongst his countrymen, the Bushmen, +who, in his opinion, were honest and intelligent compared with other +Africans, they would have no difficulty in procuring what they required. +This communication, to those who knew that the Bushmen were, perhaps, +the lowest specimens of humanity to be found in all Africa, only created +a smile on the faces of his listeners; but with this proof of his +eloquence Swartboy seemed quite satisfied. + +On their arrival at Macora's new settlement, the chief expressed much +regret at the failure of their expedition, but could give Willem but +little or no hope that there was other chance of success, at least for +some time to come. + +Camelopards, he said, often migrated from one district to another, +travelling for several days at a time, and often going thirty or forty +miles a day. A drove containing young ones, such as were required, +might not be seen in the neighbourhood for several weeks. He still +promised to render all the assistance himself and tribe were capable of +affording. + +Willem might have remained to try another trap, but the voice of his +companions was in favour of at once setting out for Graaf Reinet. This +soon became too emphatic for him to resist, and the great hunter had to +yield. A sort of compromise was, however, agreed upon, which was that +they should go home, not on a direct course for Graaf Reinet, but +through the country of the Bechuanas,--crossing some districts inhabited +by the Bushmen. Thence they could turn eastward and homeward. + +In this journey Willem promised to cause them no unnecessary delay; and +his companions agreed to do their best in aiding him to accomplish his +cherished purpose. + +In Macora's tribe were four young men who had a strong desire to visit +the white settlements, and learn something more of the customs of a +civilised people than could be gathered from occasional hunters and +traders. These young men were furnished by their friends with an outfit +of oxen, and some merchandise in the shape of leopard skins, +ostrich-feathers, and ivory. They were instructed by Macora to render +all the assistance they could to his friend Willem and his young +associates. + +On leaving, the hunters were escorted by the chief and other leading men +of the tribe for a distance of several miles. At parting with these, +our adventurers had every reason to know that they were taking leave of +true friends. + +The chief and Sindo were nearly disconsolate at the separation, +especially from Groot Willem, to whom both declared that they owed their +lives. Each promised sometime to pay him a visit in his far-away home. +The hunters started forth on their journey under the firm impression +that amongst the Makololo were men possessing almost every noble +attribute of human nature. + + + +CHAPTER FORTY ONE. + +A HERD OF BUFFALOES. + +When on what might be termed the way back to Graaf Reinet, Hans, +Hendrik, and Arend were on very good terms with themselves and everybody +else. This was not the case with Groot Willem. He moved on along with +the others because there was still a prospect of meeting with giraffes; +but the fear of reaching the settlements without taking a pair of young +ones back with him was a source of constant annoyance. + +He was inclined to linger on the road, and never lost an opportunity of +delaying the march in pursuit of different animals, either for amusement +or for food. + +On the third morning after parting with Macora a large herd of buffaloes +was observed. They were pasturing around the base of a hill about half +a mile from the line of route on which our travellers were proceeding. +In an instant Groot Willem was in his saddle and riding towards them. +The others seemed rather reluctant to accompany him. + +"Here's a delay of another day," exclaimed Arend. "Willem will kill a +buffalo, and insist on our staying to eat it." + +"Very likely," said Hendrik; "but I don't see why he should have all the +sport to himself." + +Leaping into their saddles Hendrik and Arend rode after Willem, and were +followed by two of the Makololo mounted on oxen. The patient and +philosophical Hans remained behind, to await their return. + +Following a course that would place him in advance of the herd, Willem, +who did not wish to frighten the buffaloes by charging rapidly upon +them, was soon overtaken by the others. + +The buffaloes--more than two hundred in number--were all moving in one +direction, but very slowly, as they were engaged in grazing. + +When the hunters had got within about three hundred yards of them, they +all raised their heads, and, after gazing for a moment at the strange +creatures who had come to disturb their repast, again lowered them, and +continued quietly pasturing. + +The leader of the herd had not yet given the signal for flight. + +"We must ride farther to the left and get round them," suggested Willem. +"Some of the old bulls may charge upon us, and, if so, we had better +retreat up the hill." + +By the time the hunters had reached the sloping ground, and got within a +hundred paces of the herd, several of the bulls had placed themselves in +an attitude of defiance, and stood fronting the enemy, as if to cover +the retreat of the cows and calves, for there were several of them in +the drove. + +A good shot is seldom made from the back of a horse. Knowing this, the +hunters dismounted; and, taking steady aim, fired, each having selected +a victim. The three shots were discharged within the same number of +seconds; and, on firing, each of the hunters hastened to regain his +saddle. On receiving the volley, several bulls broke from the line and +charged furiously forward upon their assailants. + +At sight of them, the horses, anxious to get out of the way, began to +pitch and rear, so that it was difficult to mount them. Hendrik and +Arend succeeded in regaining their saddles; but Willem failed. + +The horse which had often carried him within a few yards of an enraged +elephant, was new struck frantic with fear at the bellowing of the +wounded bulls. As they made their impetuous charge, he endeavoured to +get loose from his master. The more the hand of Willem strove to +restrain him, the more anxious he seemed to be off; and notwithstanding +the hunter's great strength, he was dragged on the bridle until one of +the reins broke; and the other was pulled through his grasp with a +velocity that cut his fingers nearly to the bone. By this time one of +the bulls was close up to him. Notwithstanding his great size, Groot +Willem was neither unwieldy nor awkward in action. On the contrary, he +was swift of foot; but, for all this, there was no hope of his being +able to outrun an African buffalo. + +So sudden had been the charge of the angry animals, that one of the oxen +ridden by the Makololo, had not time to be got out of the way, and was +abandoned by his owner. As good luck would have it for Willem, the +unfortunate ox was the means of saving his life. Charging upon it, the +buffalo thrust one of its long horns through the ribs of the ox, lifting +the saddle clear from its back, and laying the animal itself along the +earth, dead as if struck down by a pole-axe. + +The buffalo was itself now attacked by three or four dogs, that served +for some time to engage its attention. + +For a good while its canine assailants continued to keep clear of both +its hoofs and horns; till one of them, essaying to seize it by the +snout, was struck down and trampled under foot. The vindictive nature +of the African buffalo was now displayed before the eyes of the +spectators. Not contented with having killed the dog, it knelt down +upon the carcass, crushing it under its knees, as if determined to leave +not a bone unbroken! The animal seemed angry with itself for its +inability to mangle its victim with hoof and horns, at the same time. + +While this scene was transpiring, Groot Willem was given time to reload +his roer. A bullet through its body brought the buffalo again to its +knees, from which it had just arisen to continue the pursuit. Bellowing +in a manner that caused the air to vibrate for a mile around the spot, +the creature once more rose to its feet, staggered a pace or two, and +then sank back to the earth, to rise no more. It had been severely +wounded by the first fire, and the grass for a large space round it was +sprinkled with its blood. + +Groot Willem was not the only one who had been charged upon. Arend and +Hendrik were also obliged to retreat, each pursued by a brace of bulls. +Fortunately the hill was close at hand, and against its sloping side +they urged their horses both with whip and spur. + +The immense weight of the buffalo bull hinders him from running rapidly +up hill, although in the contrary direction he will often overtake a +horse. As the animals in question soon perceived the hopelessness of +the chase, they abandoned it; and trotting back to the drove, now going +off over the plain below, they left the young hunters in quiet +possession of the spoil they had obtained. This was what the hunters +supposed they would do. They soon saw their mistake, as the four bulls, +instead of continuing on after the retreating drove, turned suddenly to +one side, and rushed towards a wounded bull that was lagging a long way +in the rear. A spectacle was now witnessed which caused astonishment to +those who saw it. Instead of trying to protect their injured companion, +the four bulls set upon it, flinging it from its feet, and goring it +with their horns. This cruel treatment was continued until the +unfortunate animal lay still in death. They did not appear to be +inspired by any feeling of rage, but only acting under some instinct not +understood. There seemed something horrible in this attack upon their +disabled companion. But alas! it was not so very unlike what, often +occurs among men,--misfortune too frequently turning friends into +enemies. + +After settling with their wounded comrade, the four bulls continued +their retreat, and soon overtook the herd they had tarried to protect. + +The buffalo shot by Willem was the largest our hunters had yet killed; +and curiosity led them to make a note of its dimensions. It was eight +feet in length, and nearly six in height to the summit of the shoulders. +The tips of its long horns were five feet three inches asunder. Across +one shoulder, and a part of the neck, was a broad scar more than two +feet in length. This scar was conspicuous at some distance, +notwithstanding the animal's hide was covered with a thick coat of dark +brown hair, showing that it was not very far advanced in years. The +wound leaving this mark had evidently been given by the claws of a lion. +This they knew to be the case, from seeing three scratches parallel +with each other, showing where the lion's claws had been drawn +transversely across the shoulder. + +Some steak and other choice portions, being cut from the brace of bulls, +were packed upon the saddle croup to be carried away; and after a short +halt, and a feast upon fresh buffalo beef, our adventurers resumed their +interrupted journey. + + + +CHAPTER FORTY TWO. + +THE POISONED SPRING. + +On the evening of the eighth day after leaving Macora the hunters +encamped on the bank of a small stream, which they computed to be about +one hundred and twenty miles south of the place from where their return +journey commenced. + +Within the mind of Groot Willem, there was still a lingering hope that +they might again meet with giraffes; and he had never lost an +opportunity of looking for them along the route. + +The delays caused by his explorations had been a source of constant +annoyance to the others; but as Willem had a will of his own,--one, +nevertheless, united with a disposition so cheerful as to be proof +against any attempts at a controversy,--his companions were compelled to +be content with the knowledge that they were slowly progressing towards +Graaf Reinet. + +In the morning after entering their new camp, they arose to look upon a +scene more beautiful than any other they had yet beheld in the extended +country over which they had wandered. Near them was a grove of oleander +bushes, loaded with beautiful blossoms. Every branch was adorned by the +presence of two or more beautiful green sugar-birds,--the _certhia +(Nectarinia) famosa_. Nothing in nature can exceed in splendour the +plumage of the sugar-bird. The little vale in which the hunters had +encamped seemed a paradise, bathed in golden sunlight; and even the +cattle appeared to leave it with some reluctance. + +On moving down the bed of the watercourse, they found that they were not +travelling by the side of a running stream, but by what, in the dry +season, was a chain of lakelets or water-holes. After crossing a bar +between two of these ponds, they were much annoyed by a horrible stench +borne upon the breeze, and coming from the direction they intended to +take. As they journeyed on, so offensive grew the smell that a halt was +made, and a resolution passed without a dissenting voice, that they +should turn to the east and get to windward of this offensive odour, +still unexplained. + +While doing this, they observed to the west, a flock of vultures, +wheeling high up in the air; and, down upon the plain below, hundreds of +jackals and hyenas were seen leaping about. So large an assemblage of +these carrion-feeding creatures called for an explanation; and, on +riding nearer, the hunters saw a number of dead antelopes lying within a +few feet of each other. + +As they rode farther along the plain, more dead antelopes were seen, and +they began to fear that they had entered some valley of death, from +which they might never go out. The mystery--for such it was to them-- +was readily cleared up by the Makololo and Congo. The antelopes had +been drinking water from a pond or spring poisoned by the natives; which +proved that our travellers had arrived in the neighbourhood of some +tribe of the Bechuanas. Of this method for wantonly destroying animal +life, practised by many of the native African tribes, the hunters had +often heard. The many stories which they had been told of the wholesale +destruction of game by poison, and which they had treated with +incredulity, after all, had not been exaggerated. They estimated the +number of dead antelopes lying within a circumference of a mile, at not +less than two hundred. One of the water-holes of the chain by which +they had halted, had been poisoned. A herd of antelopes had quenched +their thirst at the place, and had only climbed up the bank to lie down +and die. + +"We have been very fortunate," remarked Groot Willem, "in not encamping +by the poisoned water ourselves. Had we done so, we would all, by this +time, have been food for the jackals and hyenas, as these antelopes now +are." + +To this unqualified surmise, Congo did not wholly give his assent. He +believed that men would not be likely to drink a sufficient quantity of +the water to cause death; though he further stated that their cattle and +horses, had they quenched their thirst at the pond, would have been +killed to a certainty. + +For the sake of procuring three or four antelopes for food, with the +least trouble, the Bechuanas had destroyed a whole herd. This is the +usual economy practised by those who live in a land teeming with a too +great abundance of animal life. + +To get away from the sickening scene thus presented to their view, even +Groot Willem was willing to continue the journey; and it was resumed, +all being thankful that the distance accomplished on the day before had +not been so long, by a mile or two, as it might have been. + +Knowing that they were in the neighbourhood of Bechuanas, the Makololo +professed some fear for their cattle. They said that these might be +stolen or taken from them by force. But the hunters believed such fears +too flattering to the Bechuana character. From all they had heard of +the people composing that numerous nation, they were under the +impression that they were too cowardly and indolent to be regarded with +any apprehension. + +The next morning, when continuing their journey, Arend, who was riding a +little in advance, suddenly reined up, at the same time, calling out-- + +"I see a kraal and a field of maize." + +Groot Willem and Hendrik rode forward, and became convinced that Arend +was in the right. Almost at the same instant, the hunter descried other +objects in which he was more interested than in a village of Bechuanas, +or anything belonging to them. Two large elephants were seen moving +across the plain, in the direction of the maize-field. + +"Let us steal upon them silently," suggested Willem. "We need not all +go. Two or three will be enough. Some one must stay with the cattle." + +Saying this, he rode off, followed by Hendrik and Arend. + +Hans assented to stay behind, attended by Swartboy; and Congo, with the +assistance of the Makololo, halted the cattle and pack-horses; thus +tarrying, they were witnesses of what they expected to prove an +interesting scene. They saw nothing to prevent the stalkers from +obtaining a fine opportunity for a shot; and they knew that a wounded +elephant seldom seeks safety in flight. One or both of the animals +would be killed; and the violent death of an elephant is, under all +circumstances, a spectacle painfully interesting. + +"But for us," said Groot Willem, as he rode by the side of Hendrik, +"those elephants would destroy that field of maize. The owners of the +field could not prevent them, if they were to try. They cannot even +frighten them away from their work of devastation." + +The young hunter was soon to be undeceived. + + + +CHAPTER FORTY THREE. + +EXCITEMENT FOR ALL. + +The two elephants were moving along what seemed to be a narrow path +leading to the maize-field, or the kraal beyond it. They were in no +great haste, but going as though conscious that a favourite article of +food was near, and that they were pretty sure of obtaining it. + +"When once they get engaged upon the corn," said Hendrik, "they are +ours. They won't notice us, and we shall have an opportunity for +getting a good shot." + +Suddenly one of the elephants--the foremost one--was seen to sink into +the earth! The other stopped for a moment, as though endeavouring to +comprehend the cause of his companion's disappearance. It then turned +round and commenced carefully treading the back track. + +"A pit," exclaimed Hendrik. "One of the elephants has gone down into a +pit." + +"On, on! let us kill the other," shouted Groot Willem, as he urged his +gigantic horse into a gallop. Hendrik and Arend galloped after. + +The retreating elephant was apparently in no haste to get out of their +way, but moved leisurely along. + +When the three youths were within a hundred yards of it, uttering a +trumpet-like sound, it turned and charged toward them. Expecting +something of the kind, they were not unprepared. Groot Willem instantly +brought the roer to his shoulder and fired. + +The loud report of the gun was accompanied by the sharp cracks of the +two rifles carried by his companions. Hendrik and Arend wheeled their +horses to the right; Willem turned to the left, and the huge monster +rushed between them. + +For a moment it stopped, as if undecided which to pursue first. Had the +three gone in the same direction, there probably would not have been an +instant's hesitation, and one of them would have risked being overtaken. +That moment of indecision gave them time for forming a plan, and +gaining a start upon their pursuer. + +"The pit! the pit!" shouted Hendrik. "Ride for the pit!" + +His command was instantly obeyed. + +The elephant turned, and, observing the direction of their retreat, +continued to pursue them; but in a slow, leisurely way, as though not +wholly decided whether to follow them or not. At that instant was heard +a loud prolonged bellowing,--the voice of an elephant in the agony of +despair. It proceeded from the pit. + +The pursuer instantly came to a stand. The cry of its companion in +distress awoke a feeling more human than that of revenge. It was +fear,--a fear that seemed to control its power of reasoning, since it +immediately turned tail and retreated from the danger that had befallen +its friend. While making its retreat, it appeared to choose the tracks +made by the horses in approaching the spot; as though instinct +admonished it that by so doing it would avoid any pitfalls that might be +constructed on the plain. + +"After him! Follow him up," cried Arend. "Hans is in danger." + +Only a short while was spent in reloading their guns; then, urging their +horses to the greatest speed, they galloped after the elephant. + +Hans and his dusky companions had not been uninterested spectators of +the actions of the others, and now saw that they would soon be called +upon to become actors in a similar scene. The elephant was rushing +rapidly down upon them, but the thought of flight only arose in their +minds to be immediately dismissed. The pack-horses must be defended at +all cost; and the young botanist, bidding Swartboy and Congo look after +them, rode out in front to meet the advancing foe. + +He was mounted on a horse that would not stand quiet for two seconds at +a time; and as his life might depend on the correctness of his aim, he +dismounted for the purpose of firing. His horse, released, galloped +away from his side. The wounded elephant was not more than fifty paces +off, and now turned in pursuit of the horse, apparently without seeing +the enemy it should have feared most. + +This was the opportunity for Hans, and he did not allow it to escape +him. Steadily raising the gun to his shoulder, he aimed at the huge +creature, just behind its fore leg, as the latter was thrown forward in +the stride. On shambled the enraged monster with a deafening roar. + +The other horses had already broken from the control of their keepers, +and were galloping in different directions. A few long stretches and +the tusks of the elephant were close upon Congo's steed, which chanced +to be crossing the line of pursuit at right angles. In another instant +the horse was tossed into the air, and, passing six or eight feet high +above the monster's back, fell heavily upon the ground behind it. But +the Kaffir had slid out of the saddle and stood upon the ground +unharmed. + +The effort made in destroying the horse was the last the wounded +elephant was able to perform. The dogs were clustering upon its heels; +and as it reeled wildly about to get at them, it seemed to grow giddy, +and at length fell heavily along the earth. + +"I do believe," said Hendrik, who at this moment rode up along with +Willem and Arend,--"yes, I'm quite certain that the dogs think they have +dragged that elephant down!" + +"Den they is as big an ole fool as Congo," said Swartboy who was annoyed +at the fact that the Kaffir had just performed a feat for which he would +receive the approbation of his young masters. Congo only answered with +a smile. He had again aroused the jealousy of his rival, and was +satisfied. + +The elephant, which proved to be a very large bull, expired a few +minutes after falling. Its tusks were over five feet in length, and to +Swartboy was given the task of extracting them. + +The horse ridden by Congo was of course no longer available; and the +lading of another had to be distributed amongst the remaining +pack-horses, to provide the Kaffir with a mount. The spot was soon +deserted. + +Hendrik, Groot Willem, and Arend, were anxious to be off to the pit, +into which the other elephant had fallen, having never seen one caught +in that way before. + +"Hans," inquired Hendrik, "will you look after everything here, or will +you come along with us?" + +"O, I prefer staying," said the quiet Hans. "Perhaps by doing so I may +again come in for the lion's share of the sport, as I have just now." + +"We must take Congo along with us," suggested Arend. "It is certain +there will be some of the natives at the pit. We saw several houses +near the maize-field, and there is no doubt a large kraal." + +"Yes, come with us, Congo," commanded his master, as he rode off, +followed by all the others except the good-natured Hans and his servant +Swartboy, who usually came in for the biggest share of the business, +while the others appropriated the amusement. + + + +CHAPTER FORTY FOUR. + +THE PIT. + +We believe there is a different sound expressed by each of the words, +roar, shriek, yell, and scream: but the first expression of pain or +terror of the elephant in the pit,--the sound that had caused its +companion to retreat, seemed a combination of all the above. Since it +first shook the surrounding atmosphere, it had been often repeated and +the young hunters, familiar with most methods of killing elephants, were +under the impression that the one in the pit was being subjected to some +torture more horrible than any they had ever heard of. + +"They have probably placed a pointed stake in the pit," observed +Hendrik, as they approached, "and the animal is impaled upon it." + +On coming nearer to the place, they saw that there were people around +the pit,--both men and women. One of the men, intensely Ethiopic in +appearance, came forward as the hunting party approached, and by signs +offered for sale the tusks of the elephant still roaring underneath +them. + +"We are safe with these people," remarked Congo. "They are used to +traders, and will do us no more harm than to cheat us in a bargain, if +they can." + +On arriving at the pit, our adventurers saw that it was not a square +hole with an upright stake in the centre, as Hendrik had supposed. It +was oval at the top and contracted to a point at the bottom, in the +shape of an inverted cone, leaving no level space on which the elephant +could stand. Its four feet were jammed together; and, compelled to +support the weight of its immense body in this position, the agony it +suffered must have been as intense as the creature was capable of +enduring. + +This pit, the plan of which was devised with devilish ingenuity for +producing unnecessary torture, was about nine feet long and apparently +seven or eight in depth, and the struggles of the elephant only had the +effect of wedging its huge feet more closely together and increasing its +tortures. + +Two pits had been dug but a short distance from one another; and the +wisdom of this plan had a living illustration before their eyes. +Although the two had been nicely concealed, and the excavated earth +carried away from the place, both had been discovered by the elephant, +but one of them too late. Had there been but one, it would not have +been caught, for it evidently had placed a foot on the first, detected +the hidden danger, and, while in the act of avoiding it, had fallen +suddenly and irrecoverably on to the other. + +All the men standing around were armed, the most of them with assegais +or spears, but they were making no attempt to end the agony of the +captured elephant. + +Groot Willem stepped in front of it, and was raising the long barrel of +his roer to the level of one of the elephant's eyes, when he was stopped +by two or three of the blacks, who rushed forward and restrained him +from discharging the piece. + +Congo, who had professed to understand what they said, told Willem that +the elephant was not to be killed at present. + +"What can be the reason of that?" exclaimed Arend. "Can they wish the +animal to live, merely for the sake of witnessing its sufferings? It +cannot be saved. It must die where it is now." + +"I'll tell you how it is," said Hendrik. "They have a fine taste for +music, and they intend keeping the elephant in that pit, like a bird in +its cage, for the purpose of hearing the fine notes it is giving out." + +One of the blacks was armed with a gun, all but the lock, which last was +wanting! The attention of Groot Willem was particularly directed to +this weapon, its owner holding it out before him, and making signs that +he wished some powder and a bullet for the purpose of loading it. +Willem desired to be informed how the ammunition was to be used, but the +black, by a shake of his woolly head, candidly admitted that he did not +know. + +"Ask him what he brought the gun here for," said Willem, speaking to +Congo. + +In answer to the question, the man made another confession of ignorance. + +A little excitement was now observed amongst the blacks, and another +party was seen approaching from the direction of the village. They +brought news that the head man of the kraal was coming in person, and +that he was to have the honour of killing the elephant. He had lately +purchased a new gun from some _smouse_ or trader, and he was about to +exhibit his skill in the use of it, before the eyes of his admiring +subjects. + +On the arrival of the chief, the young hunters saw that the gun in his +possession was a common soldier's musket, very much out of order, and +one that a sportsman would hesitate about discharging. + +"The man will never kill the great brute with that thing," said Hendrik. +"He will be far more likely to kill himself, or some of those around +him. If the elephant waits till it is despatched in that way, it stands +a good chance to die of starvation." + +The chief seemed very vain of being the owner of a gun, and anxious to +show to his subjects the proper mode of despatching an elephant. +Standing about twenty-five paces from the pit, he took aim at the +animal's head and fired. + +The report of the musket was followed by a roar more expressive of rage +than pain, and a small protuberance on the elephant's head showed that +the ball had done no more than to cause a slight abrasion of the skin. +The operation of reloading the musket was performed in about six minutes +and again the chief fired. This time, standing at the distance of +fifteen paces. The elephant again astonished the chief and his +followers, by continuing to live. + +Another six or seven minutes were passed in loading the gun, which was +again fired as before. The only acknowledgment the huge beast made of +having received the shot, was another loud cry of impotent rage. + +The company around the pit was then joined by a party not hitherto on +the ground. It consisted of Hans with Swartboy and the other followers +of the expedition. They had extracted the tusks of their elephant, +lashed them with rheims to the pack-saddles of two horses, and brought +them along. + +"What is all this about?" asked Hans. "Can't you kill that elephant? +I've heard several shots." + +"They will not allow us to try," replied Groot Willem. "A chief is +trying to kill it with an old musket, and will neither allow me to fire, +nor that well-armed gentleman standing near him." Willem pointed to him +who carried the gun without a lock. + +At this moment, a communication was made to the Kaffir by the native +chief. Annoyed at his want of success, he had some doubts as to his +weapon being what had been represented by the smouse from whom he had +purchased it. He wished to make a comparison of its destructive power +with one of their guns, and Groot Willem was invited to take a shot at +the elephant. + +"But, baas Willem," said Congo, as he finished this communication, "you +not do that, you not shoot the elephant." + +"Why?" asked Willem, in surprise. + +"You kill um with you roer, and then they want from you. They want it, +and sure take it." + +"Take what--the elephant?" + +"No, baas Willem, the roer," answered the Kaffir. + +Though not afraid of having his gun taken from him, Groot Willem and his +companions were unwilling to have any difficulty with the blacks; and +the invitation of the chief was courteously declined. The excuse made +was that, after the failure of the great man himself, any similar +attempts on their part would certainly be unsuccessful. + +A general invitation was now given to the company to join in despatching +the elephant; and it was immediately assailed by more than a dozen men +armed with assegais and javelins. They succeeded in killing it in a +little less than half an hour; and, during that time, the torture to +which the poor beast was subjected aroused the indignation of our +adventurers, who, if allowed, could have released it from its agonies in +half a score of seconds. They were true hunters, and, although not +sparing of animal life, they took no delight in its tortures. + + + +CHAPTER FORTY FIVE. + +ON THE KARROO. + +After killing the elephant, the natives commenced the less difficult +task of cutting it up and carrying it off to their kraal. The feet were +reserved for the especial use of the chief; and, while waiting for some +of his dependents to procure them, he granted our hunters an audience. +They were desirous to learn whether the kraal was ever visited by +traders,--a class of people they were anxious to meet, though Groot +Willem was more anxious to know whether giraffes ever visited the +neighbourhood. Congo was called, and for some time he and the chief +were heard talking in loud tones, and both at the same time; neither +exhibiting the least inclination to listen to one another! Their voices +grew louder and louder; and our adventurers saw that they were engaged +in a hot dispute, that threatened to end in something more unpleasant +than a war of words. + +"What does he say, Congo," asked Willem. + +"I don't know, baas Willem," answered the Kaffir with a shake of the +head, that betrayed some shame at his own ignorance. + +"How is that?" demanded his master. "Can't you understand the language +he speaks?" + +"No, baas Willem, he talks no Zooloo, no Kaffir of any kind." + +"Then why were you pretending to interpret his language a few minutes +ago?" asked Hendrik. + +"I was trying to learn it," answered Congo, in a tone conveying the +belief that he had given a satisfactory answer. + +"We have no time to stop here for you to learn a language," said +Hendrik. "And if you can't converse with the man why did you not say +so? How came you to tell us what he was saying a few minutes ago?" + +The attention of all was now called to Swartboy, who seemed overpowered +with joy. + +It was some time before he was able to make himself understood; but at +last he was heard to mutter:-- + +"I tole you that Congo was a ole fool. Now you all see for yourselfs. +Look at 'im! Don't he look four, five, six times fool. I tole ye so." + +"Can _you_ understand what the chief says?" asked Groot Willem. + +"Yaas, baas Willem; any Swartman know dat." + +"Then talk to him yourself. You know what we wish to learn from him." + +The Bushman's features now assumed a quizzically comical expression; and +from this the hunters saw that he had become serious. + +Going up to the chief he commenced a conversation, from which Willem +learned, after it was translated to him, that no giraffes had been seen +in the neighbourhood for many moons. Very few traders visited the +tribe; and those who had done so had not left a good name behind them. + +The chief lived in the kraal seen not far away; and the hunters were +invited to pay him a visit. + +This invitation was immediately accepted by Willem, who seemed to have +lost all desire to return to Graaf Reinet again. + +This attempt on the part of Willem to delay their homeward journey was +easily defeated by Hendrik. + +"Why should we go to their kraal?" asked he. "We shouldn't be allowed +to leave it for two or three days, and we want to go on in search of +giraffes. There are none here." + +With this argument Willem was well pleased; and they prepared to +continue their journey. + +Before making a move, they saw most of the elephant's flesh taken away +by the Bechuanas. Three oxen were laden with it, and several of the +natives staggered under heavy loads,--covered from head to foot with +long strips cut from the animal's sides. Some of the blacks carried +large square flakes of the flesh with their heads thrust through a hole +cut in the centre,--the broad disk descending over the shoulders like +the skirts of a Mexican's _serape_. + +The sight of these people apparently clothed with bleeding flesh, and +staggering under its weight towards their homes, was, as Hendrik +observed, an "antidote against hunger, effectual for at least a month." + +After taking leave of the tribe, our travellers continued on towards the +south. It was quite dark before they arrived at a suitable +camping-place. They had met with no water since leaving the pools +passed in the morning, and the cattle were sadly in want of it. + +Unable to make much progress in the darkness that came thickly over +them, the animals--both oxen and horses--were unladen and a halt was +made, with the intention of resuming the march at the first dawn of day. +By early morning they were on the move, anxious to reach water as soon +as possible. + +For several miles they journeyed over a tract of ground, the surface of +which resembled that of the ocean lashed by a storm. It was a +constantly recurring series of abrupt undulations, like huge billows and +the troughs between them. + +Now for the first time they noticed the great difference that thirst +produces between horses and cow cattle. The latter seemed to think that +they could obtain relief by quietly yielding to the enervating effect of +thirst, and travelling as slowly as their drivers would permit them. +They were urged forward with much difficulty, and the Makololo were +constantly wielding their huge _jamboks_ to induce them to go quicker. +With a rolling gait they crawled unwillingly forward, their tongues +protruding from their mouths, each offering as perfect a picture of +despair as could well be imagined. + +The horses on the contrary seemed eager to get over the ground as +quickly as possible. They appeared to act under the guidance of reason, +as if knowing that they were still far from the wished-for water, and +that the faster they travelled the sooner it would be reached. + +Throughout the afternoon Hendrik and Willem rode in advance of the +others, anxiously looking out for spring, pool, or stream. The +all-sustaining fluid must be found that night, or their cattle would +perish. Their knowledge of this filled them with forebodings for the +future, and they travelled on almost as despairingly as their oxen. +They had made a great mistake in so imprudently parting with the +Bechuanas, without making inquiries about the country through which they +should have to travel. Had they done so, they might have avoided the +difficulty their indiscretion had now brought upon them. + +A little before sunset a hill, higher than any they had seen during the +day, was descried to the right of their course. At its base they saw +growing a grove of stunted trees. Raising their heads and cocking their +ears, the horses ridden by Willem and Hendrik started off towards the +hill at a brisk pace, each uttering a low whimpering, that their riders +interpreted into the word _Water_. Before reaching the grove they +passed a dead lion, part of which had been eaten by some carrion-feeding +denizens of the desert. By the side of the carcass were also seen three +or four dead jackals, which they supposed the lion to have killed before +giving up the ghost himself. + +On reaching the grove, they discovered a small pool of muddy water; and +with outstretched necks their horses rushed towards it. By its edge lay +the dead body of a buffalo; and near by a hyena in the same condition. + +"Hold your horse!" exclaimed Hendrik, suddenly reining in his own. +"Perhaps the water is poisoned. See that buffalo and hyena,--and we +have just passed the other dead animals." + +It required all their strength to hinder the horses from plunging into +the pool. Only by turning their heads in the opposite direction and +driving the spurs into their sides, did they succeed in keeping them +away from the water. Even then the suffering animals seemed determined +to rear backwards into the pool; and it was not without a struggle that +they were forced away from it. + +The hunters now rode back to meet their companions and warn them off, +till the water in the pool should be tested by Swartboy, Congo, and the +Makololo. + + + +CHAPTER FORTY SIX. + +THE POOL OF DEATH. + +On coming up with their companions the two pioneers reported the glad +tidings that water had been found. But the joy caused by this +announcement was at once changed into gloom, when they expressed their +doubts as to the purity of the element. Hans and Arend at once +dismounted, and, taking Swartboy and two of the Makololo along with +them, went on towards the pool. + +On reaching it, Swartboy at once pronounced the water to be poisoned. +It had been done, he said, with two separate kinds of poison, both of +the deadliest nature. A bundle of roots that had been mashed between +two stones was seen lying in the water, and floating on its surface was +a large quantity of the skins of some poisonous species of berry. + +There was no help for it. They must avoid the danger by going another +way, or their animals, at scent of the water, could not be restrained +from drinking it. + +The buffalo had quenched its thirst and then sought the shade of the +trees to lie down and die. The strong lion had tasted of the poisoned +fluid, but his strength had not saved him. A few paces from the pool, +and he had fallen down in his tracks. The jackals had partially +devoured the lion, then slaked their thirst with the deadly draught, and +returned to their repast only to renew, but never to finish it. After +satisfying themselves that the pool had been poisoned, they were about +returning to their companions, when they observed a great commotion +amongst the cattle and horses of the expedition. The former were +lowing, the latter neighing, in an unusual manner. The two horses which +had already visited the imperilled spot, seemed especially impatient of +control; and, in the efforts made by Hendrik to restrain him, the girth +of his saddle got loose and was broken. As he dismounted for the +purpose of repairing it, the horse broke away from him and galloped back +towards the pool, uttering its shrill neigh, as if a signal for the +others to follow. + +The invitation was not slighted. The pack-horses immediately swept off +in pursuit. The oxen seemed suddenly awakened to new life. Either +instinct, or the example of the horses, had admonished them that water +was near. The oxen, carrying heavy loads, that for the last few miles +had been goaded onward with great difficulty, became suddenly +reinvigorated and joined in the general stampede. The whole cavalcade +had soon escaped beyond control. + +Now occurred a race between the thirsty cattle and their owners, as to +which should first reach the pool. Hans, Arend, and the two Makololo +formed a line in front of it and strove to check the impetuous charge. +Their efforts proved vain. Mad with the agony of thirst, the beasts had +no longer any respect for the authority of man; and they who were trying +to stay them from self-destruction only saved _themselves_ from being +trodden under foot, by getting quickly out of the way. + +As the pond was not more than ten feet in diameter, and could only be +approached on its lower edge, all the animals were unable to reach it. +The first horse that approached the water, was instantly pushed into it +by two others close following him, and, by the time the three had fairly +commenced imbibing the poisoned fluid, they were charged upon by several +of the oxen. + +Heavy blows with jamboks and the butt-ends of rifles produced no effect +in forcing the animals away. Everything was unheeded but the mad raging +desire of quenching their thirst. + +Fortunately for the hunters, all their cattle could not drink at the +same time, as they stood in each others' way. For about ten minutes, +there was a scene of indescribable confusion amidst shouts and +struggling. The three horses and two of the oxen, jammed tightly +together, were unable to get out again,--even had they been so inclined. +So firmly had they become wedged against each other and the high bank +above, that neither could move a step. + +The hole was about three feet in depth and the bodies of the five +animals completely filled it up. Some others of the cattle, failing to +reach the water from the low bank, scrambled up to the high one; but, on +looking down, they could see nothing but the backs of the five animals +in occupation. One of the oxen, in a tremendous effort made to get its +mouth to the water, was borne down and trampled under the feet of the +others. + +After more than half an hour of hard work, the hunters, assisted by +their black companions succeeded in driving all the animals away, except +the five that retained possession of the pool. These five never left +it. Three horses and two oxen were the loss that was sustained. They +were pack animals that had thus perished; and fortunately they were not +laden with powder, or any substance easily injured. + +The packs were at once removed from them and placed on the backs of +others,--an arrangement that, from that time forth, caused Congo and +Swartboy to make their journey on foot. With this, Congo seemed quite +satisfied. The loss of his "mount" did not trouble him so much as the +fear that he should lose Spoor'em, his favourite hound, whose +sufferings, as well as those of the other dogs, were now painful to +witness. + +By this time they had journeyed a few miles beyond the poisoned pond; +the shade of night had again commenced gathering over the plain. They +saw they would have to continue their journey throughout the night. The +emergency would not admit of the least delay, for every hour was fast +taking away what little strength was left either to themselves or their +animals. But which way should they go? That was the question that +required answering. + +They did not think of returning to the north; but there were the east, +south, and west for them to choose from. Which of those directions was +the likeliest for water? This question the young hunters were wholly +unable to answer, and must have left themselves to the guidance of +chance, had they not been accompanied by Swartboy. + +The Bushman suggested a course, of which, not only the Makololo, but +Congo approved. For all this, his proposal was prefaced by the usual +complaint against the Kaffir, as the cause of all their misfortunes. +Having established this fact to his satisfaction, he proceeded to inform +his masters, that he had heard much in his boyhood of the manners and +customs of the Bechuanas. + +Some weak tribe of that nation, he thought, had sought refuge from an +enemy by making their home in the great karroo, or desert, through which +the expedition was now passing. They had poisoned the pool for the +purpose of preventing their enemies from receiving a supply of water +while pursuing them. They who had done so could not be expecting an +enemy from the north, nor yet from the south, where other tribes of +their kindred dwelt. They could only look for foes from the east, from +the land of the Zooloo Kaffirs; whom Swartboy declared to be the curse +of the earth. For these reasons, Swartboy believed that a tribe of +Bechuanas would be found to the west, and that, by a journey of a few +hours in that direction, their kraal might be reached. + +No one had any argument against this reasoning of Swartboy; and, +yielding to his suggestion, the march was again commenced, with their +faces turned westward. + +There was one thing that gave the hunters a hope. It was the knowledge +that they were not in that part of South Africa, where there is any very +extensive _karroo_. They were too far to the south-east to have strayed +into the great Kalahari desert. The karroo they were traversing, might +be a small one, which could be crossed in a few hours had they been able +to travel with any speed. Unfortunately, they were not. + +So exhausted were their animals that the use of jamboks and the +strongest language, spoken in the Dutch, English, Hottentot, Kaffir, and +Makololo tongues could not make them move one step faster than two miles +to the hour. This rate of travelling will annihilate a great distance, +but only in a great deal of time; and, knowing that their cattle could +not hold out much longer, our adventurers began to fear that their +hunting expedition would turn out something worst than a failure. + + + +CHAPTER FORTY SEVEN. + +THE WATER-ROOT. + +Throughout that long and dreary night they toiled on, driving the cattle +before them. Guided by the Southern Cross they pursued nearly a +straight course. When morning dawned upon the scene, they observed that +the surface of the country still continued the same,--presenting that +lumpy appearance with which during the last two days they had become so +familiar. + +Although all were hungry, weary, and suffering grievously from thirst, +there was no time for making a stop. The cattle must be taken on as +speedily as possible, or abandoned, along with their loads. + +Slowly the sun climbed up into the sky, until it was directly over their +heads; and yet, judging by the appearance of the country, they had not +moved a step from the place where they had first entered upon the +karroo. The landscape around them seemed exactly the same! + +"We have had about enough of this sort of travelling," remarked Hendrik, +"and it's quite time that we began to think of ourselves, and not quite +so much of our property." + +"What do you wish?" asked Willem. "Abandon the pack-oxen?" + +"We shall probably have to do so in the end. It appears as if the time +had come. We had better save our horses and ourselves and let the +others go." + +"You forget, Hendrik," rejoined his brother, "that we are not all +mounted. We cannot desert those who are afoot." + +"Of course not," answered the young cornet, "but even Swart, who is not +a fast traveller, could go two miles to one he is doing now, with all +his time engaged in urging forward the animals." + +This conversation was interrupted by a shout from Swartboy himself. He +was standing over a little plant with narrow leaves, that rose not more +than six inches above the surface of the plain. It was the stem of the +water-root,--a plant that, on the karroos of South Africa, has saved the +lives of thousands of thirsty travellers, that would otherwise have +perished. Several stems of the plant were seen growing around the spot, +and the Bushman knew that the want from which all had been suffering, +would be at least partially supplied. A pick-axe and spade were hastily +procured from a pack carried by one of the oxen; and Swartboy commenced +digging around the stem of the plant first discovered. The earth, baked +by the sun nearly as hard as a burnt brick, was removed in large flakes, +and the bulb was soon reached,--at the depth of ten or twelve inches +below the surface. When taken out, it was seen to be of an oval shape, +about seven inches in its longest diameter, and covered with a thin +cuticle of a bright brown colour. The juicy pulp of the water-root was +cut into slices, and chewed. It tasted like water itself, that is, it +had no taste at all. Assegais and knives were now called into active +play; and so abundant was the plant growing near, that in a short time +every man, horse, and ox had been refreshed with a bulb. + +The first root obtained by Congo was shared with Spoor'em, the hound, +which, with his tongue far-extended, had been crawling along with much +difficulty. + +The young hunters might have passed over miles of karroo covered with +the bulb, without knowing that its slender, insignificant stems were the +indication of a fountain spread bountifully beneath their feet. + +Congo and the Makololo were also ignorant of the character of this +curious plant; and all would have gone on without discovering it, had +Swartboy not been of the party. For the advantage he had given them, by +introducing them to the plant, the Bushman claimed nearly as much credit +as though he had created it. As no one was disposed to underrate the +service he had done, he obtained what appeared full compensation for all +the annoyance he had felt at being so long neglected. + +Partly refreshed by the cooling sap of the water-root, the cattle +behaved as though they thought there was still something worth living +for. They moved forward with renewed animation; and a long march was +made in the course of the afternoon. + +Just as the sun was setting, several huts were descried to the south; +and our travellers continued towards them, quite confident that a full +supply of water would be found near the huts, which, as they drew +towards them, proved to be a kraal of the Bechuanas. The fear of losing +their cattle was no longer felt. + +Before arriving at the huts, their owners came forth to meet them. +Their first salutation was a statement of their surprise that any +travellers could have succeeded in reaching their secluded habitation. + +Swartboy replied to this by a request to be conducted to the nearest +place where water could be obtained,--of course to the stream, pools, or +wells that supplied the kraal. The answer was astounding. It was that +they knew of no open water within less than a day's journey! Months had +passed since any of them had seen such a thing, and all the inhabitants +of the kraal had been living without it! + +"What does this mean?" demanded Hendrik. "Surely they are telling lies. +They don't want to give us the water and their story is but a +subterfuge to conceal it. Tell them, Swart that we don't believe them." + +The Bushman did as he was desired, but the Bechuanas only reiterated +their previous statement. + +"What nonsense!" exclaimed Arend. "They take us for such fools as to +suppose people can live without water! They have a supply somewhere. +We must make a search for it and help ourselves." + +"No, baas Arend," interposed Swartboy. "Don't do this. They show us +water by an by. We better wait." + +Acting under the advice of the Bushman, the oxen were unladen, and a +camp established close to the kraal. Although pretending to be +satisfied with the statement of the Bechuanas, that they were living +without water, our travellers had their eyes on the alert, sending +glances of inquiry in every direction, in the hope of discovering where +the much-desired element was kept. They saw not the slightest +indications of stream or pool, well or water-hole, of any kind. The +place all around had the same sterile appearance as that of the country +over which they had journeyed for the last two days, and certainly +things looked confirmatory of the Bechuanas' statement. After all, they +might be telling the truth! It was not very cheering to think so; and +our travellers became quite disconsolate. + +Swartboy, however, did something to assure them, by counselling them to +say nothing, but submit quietly,--trusting to time and patience. They +followed his instructions, for the want of knowing what else they could +do. They felt that they were in his hands; and, observing his confident +manner one and all awaited the end without murmuring. + + + +CHAPTER FORTY EIGHT. + +AN ODD SORT OF SUCTION PUMP. + +It was not long before all were convinced of the prudent course which +Swartboy had counselled them to pursue. Had they insisted on being +supplied with water, or made an attempt to take it by force, they would +have been disappointed. They would not have been able to find a drop +within many miles of the place where more than two hundred people were +living. For all this, there was water not far off; and, trusting to +that feeling of generosity which rarely fails when relied upon, they +were at length supplied with it. Water was brought to them. Not much +at first, but in small quantities, and carried in the shells of +ostrich-eggs. + +They soon had enough to satisfy their own thirst and allow them to turn +their attention to the wants of their cattle. After drinking off the +contents of an ostrich shell, Groot Willem by signs, directed the +attention of the woman who had given it to him, to the suffering +condition of his horse. The woman, who could not exactly be called an +"ornament to her sex," only shook her wool-covered head and walked +thoughtfully away. + +"Unless we can get some drink for our horses," said Willem, turning to +his companions, "we must keep on. If we stop much longer here the +animals will die." + +"Wait, baas Willem," said Swartboy; "the heart of the Bechuana grow +bigger soon. He like de Bushman." + +Swartboy's prophecy proved correct. Not long after it was spoken, one +of the Bechuanas came to the camp, and asked to be conducted to the +chief. Groot Willem was immediately pointed out by Swartboy as the +individual who answered to that appellation, and the black walked up to +him. His errand was to say that the horses and cattle could only be +watered _one at a time_. This was satisfactory enough. Willem's horse, +as belonging to the chief of the party, should be supplied first, and +was led away by the man, its owner following at its heels. A short +distance from the kraal they came to a well, from which a covering of +earth had recently been removed. The well, for some purpose, had been +concealed, as if it were a pitfall for the capturing of elephants. + +With a bucket made of buffalo hide, water was drawn out, until the horse +had as much as he cared to drink. He was then led away and another +brought to the place, and then another, and after them the cattle, until +all the animals had drunk to their satisfaction. + +This method of watering them showed some intelligence on the part of the +Bechuanas. It avoided the struggle and confusion which would certainly +have taken place, had the thirsty animals been driven to the well at the +same time. + +That evening the hunters had a long conversation with the head man of +the kraal, Swartboy acting as interpreter. The chief said that his +tribe had once been large and powerful; but what from desertion, and +wars with the Kaffirs, they had become reduced to their present number. +In order to live in peace and security, he had sought refuge in the +solitary karroo, where the hardships to be encountered in reaching his +remote home would deter any enemy from making the attempt. In order to +make assurance doubly sure, he admitted having caused several +water-holes to be poisoned; and he appeared greatly satisfied at telling +them how, on one occasion, his plan had met with a splendid success. A +party of his Kaffir enemies had partaken of the water from one of the +poisoned pools, and had died upon the spot. + +This portion of the narrative, which was interpreted by Swartboy, seemed +to give the latter as much satisfaction as it did the chief himself. He +grinned with intense delight as he translated the account of this +strange episode. + +In order to give his guests an exalted idea of his greatness the chief +informed them that he was brother to Kalatah. Groot Willem expressed a +wish to know who or what the great Kalatah might be. The chief was +astonished, not to say chagrined, at the confession of so much +ignorance, and the hunters were instantly enlightened. Kalatah was the +most noble warrior, the best brother, the most loyal subject, in fact +the best man in every way, that ever lived, and his memory was, and +ought to be, respected over the whole world. This was news to our +adventurers, and they were anxious to learn more of the chief and his +wonderful relative. Willing to gratify his guests, he further informed +them that the Kaffirs had made another attempt to reach the remote kraal +in which he now dwelt. They had entered the karroo with a large force +well prepared for crossing it, and would probably have succeeded, had +they not been led astray. His brother, Kalatah, had deserted to the +enemy for the express purpose of becoming a false guide, and under this +pretence he had succeeded in drawing them off the scent. He had +conducted them far to the north, and into the heart of the great +Kalahari desert. Not one of these befooled foemen lived to return to +their own country, all having perished by thirst. + +"But Kalatah! what of him?" eagerly inquired the listeners. "How did he +escape the same fate?" + +"Kalatah did not escape it," coolly answered the chief. "He perished +with the rest. He sacrificed his own life for the sake of saving his +countrymen!" + +This act had endeared him to the memory of his people; and the hunters, +on hearing it, became convinced that the Bechuanas, whom they had been +taught to regard as a soul-less, degraded people, had still soul enough +to respect the performance of a noble action. + +Next morning our travellers were made acquainted with the method by +which the water was obtained for the daily supply of the kraal. None +was allowed to be exposed either to the sun or to view, the well being +carefully covered up with a thick stratum of turf. The kraal had been +built near a spring, which had of course decided the selection of its +site; and over the spring a new surface had been given to the ground, so +that the presence of water underneath could not be suspected. + +In order to obtain it for daily use, a hollow reed was inserted into a +small, inconspicuous aperture, left open for the purpose, and covered by +a stone when the reed was not in use. The water was drawn up by +suction,--the women performing the operation by applying their lips to +the upper end of the reed, filling the mouth with the fluid, and then +discharging it into the egg-shells. + +The water supplied to the hunters on their first arrival had been +"pumped" up in this original fashion! + +The well was only uncovered and the bucket called into requisition, upon +rare and extraordinary occasions, such as that which had arisen from the +necessity of supplying the horses and cattle of their guests. + +Our travellers remained for two days in the Karroo village, during which +they did not suffer much from _ennui_. They had sufficient employment +in mending their travelling equipments; and the delay gave their cattle +a chance of recruiting their strength, sadly exhausted by the long +toilsome journey just made. + +The whites of the party were much interested in observing the habits and +customs of the simple people among whom they had strayed. None of the +Bechuanas appeared to have the slightest wish to go away from the place +they had chosen for a permanent home. To them it afforded tranquillity, +and that was all that could be said of it, for it afforded little +besides. That was all they required. Not one of them seemed afflicted +with ordinary human desires. They had no ambition, no curiosity, no +love of wealth,--none of those wants that render wretched the lives of +civilised people. + +A place less suited for the abode of men could scarce have been found, +or even imagined. The soil was sterile, unproductive, and rarely +visited by game worthy of being hunted. The few roots and other +articles of food they were enabled to raise, furnished but a precarious +subsistence. + +So limited was their supply of ordinary utensils, that even the most +trifling article was in their eyes valuable, and anything given them by +their guests was received with a gratitude scarce conceivable. They had +discovered the art of living in peace and happiness, and were making the +most of the discovery. + +From what they were told by the villagers, our travellers could not +expect to get out of the karroo in less than two days, and no water +could be obtained along the route. But, as their cattle were now well +rested, they were not so apprehensive, and after a friendly leave-taking +with the Bechuanas, they once more continued their journey. + +The trouble they had given to their simple hosts was remunerated without +much cost. A glass bottle that had once contained "Cape Smoke," was +thought by the latter to be of greater value than a gun; and, taking +their circumstances into account, they were perhaps not far astray in +their estimate. + + + +CHAPTER FORTY NINE. + +SCENES SELDOM VISITED. + +Knowing that the longer they should be in reaching the next +watering-place the weaker their cattle would become, our travellers +strove to perform more than half the distance in less than half the +time. On their first day's journey after leaving the kraal, they went +about twenty-five miles; but on starting the next day they saw that not +more than half that distance was likely to be accomplished, and that +their principal work would consist in plying the jamboks. + +Towards noon they came upon a tract of country, the greater portion of +which had once been flooded with brackish water, and was now slightly +incrusted with salt. The reflection of the sun's rays on this +incrustation gave it the appearance of water; and, on seeing it, the +cattle, horses, and dogs rushed forward, anticipating a grand pleasure +in quenching their thirst. On discovering what it was, the animals gave +out their various expressions of disappointment. The horses neighed, +the oxen bellowed, and the dogs barked and howled. A constant _mirage_ +floated over the plain, magnifying and distorting the appearance of +everything within view. Where the saline incrustations did not cover +the ground, there grew a short, sour herbage, browsed upon by +_blesboks_, _wilde beests_, and several other species of antelopes. +These animals, as well as some stunted trees, at times appeared +suspended in the air, and magnified far beyond natural size. High up in +the air could be seen the reflection of animals that were many miles +distant from the place they appeared to be occupying. These optical +illusions were the cause of much annoyance to the thirsty travellers,-- +especially to their animals, unable to understand them. Excited with +the hope of quenching their thirst, they were with much difficulty +prevented from rushing about in pursuit of the phantom that was so +terribly tantalising them. + +The cattle had been a long time without salt, and had a strong desire to +lick up the saline incrustation, that in some places covered the earth +to an eighth of an inch in thickness. This increased their thirst, and +caused them to hasten forward to the next deceptive show that spread +itself before them. In place of meeting water, they only found that +which strengthened the desire for it. Our travellers seemed to have +reached a land where phantoms and realities were strangely commingled. + +They saw spectral illusions of broad lakes, with trees mirrored upon +their placid surface. A sun of dazzling brightness seemed shining from +the bottom of an unfathomed sea, and a forest appeared suspended in the +air! + +But along with these fair fancies there were many unpleasant realities. +For the first two or three hours after entering amid such scenes, they +could not help feeling interested. In time, however, the interest died +away as their vision became accustomed to the strange appearances. One +yet awaited them, stranger and more extraordinary than any yet +witnessed. + +About three hours after the sun had passed the meridian, they arrived at +a place that resembled a small island in the midst of an ocean. Water +was rolling down upon them from every direction, and had their eyes not +been so often deceived, they could easily have imagined that the dry +earth upon which they stood was about to be instantly submerged. While +contemplating this singular scene, their attention was called to another +no less singular. + +It was that of a gigantic bird moving across the sky, not in flight, but +walking with long strides! They might have been alarmed but for their +knowledge of what it was. + +An ostrich somewhere on the karroo was being reflected by the _mirage_, +and magnified to ten times its natural size. + +On a former expedition our hunters had seen much of the singular +phenomena produced by the _mirage_. They had witnessed many, many +spectacles, but the one upon which they were now gazing excited their +admiration more than any they had ever encountered. The reflected +ostrich was perfect in shape, and his stalk so natural that, but for +what they knew, they might have believed that something as extraordinary +as anything seen by John the Revelator had descended to the earth from +another world. Such a sight, appearing in the sky that overhangs +Hampstead Heath, would have converted all London to a belief in the +prophecies of the Reverend Doctor Gumming. + +As they stood gazing upon it, a cloud came rolling up the heavens, +carried along by a breeze that had commenced blowing from the west. By +this the _mirage_ was destroyed, and the vast spectral image suddenly +disappeared. The phantom shapes were seen no more; and soon after the +travellers saw before them some real ones, that led them to believe they +were approaching the limit of the karroo. + +The ground was higher, more uneven, and covered by a more luxuriant +vegetation. Water would be found at no great distance. This fact was +deduced from the presence of some zebras and pallahs, seen feeding near, +as they knew that neither of those animals ever strays far from the +neighbourhood of a stream. + +Near what may be called the border of the karroo, the hunters came +across what to them was a prize of some value. It was an ostrich-nest, +containing seventeen fresh eggs, which afforded the raw material for an +excellent dinner. + +This was soon cooked and eaten; and our travellers continued their +march. But Swartboy had a passion either for killing ostriches, or +procuring their feathers. Possibly the _penchant_ might have been for +both; but, be that as it may, he was unwilling to go away from the nest, +even after the eggs had been extracted from it. + +Knowing that his masters intended to encamp by the first watering-place +they should meet, he determined to stay behind for an hour or two and +rejoin the travelling party in the evening; and as no one made objection +he did so. + +His prejudice in favour of poisoned arrows, and against the use of +fire-arms, as weapons of offence, had been gradually removed; and he had +for some time past been induced to shoulder a double-barrelled gun +capable of carrying either bullets or shot. + +With this gun the Bushman seated himself upon the edge of the ostrich's +nest, and was left in this attitude by the others as they moved away +from the spot. + +Just as the sun was setting a dark grove of timber loomed up before +their eyes; and on reaching it they discovered a stream of water. The +impatient oxen would not allow their packs to be taken off till after +they had quenched their thirst, after which they went vigorously to work +upon the rich herbage that grew upon the banks of the stream. + +It was full two hours before Swartboy made his appearance by the +camp-fire. Its light illumined a set of features expanded into an +expression that spoke of some grand satisfaction. He had evidently +gained something by remaining behind. Success had attended his +enterprise. In his hands were seen the long white plumes of an +ostrich,--the trophies of his hunter skill,--that even in Africa are not +so easily obtained. His story was soon told. + +He had lain flat along the ground close by the ostrich's nest until the +birds had returned. They had come back in company, and Swartboy had +secured them both as a reward for his watchful patience. He had brought +the plumes with him, not as a mere evidence of his triumph, but intended +to be taken on to Graaf Reinet, and there presented to his "Totty." + +The Bushman stated that he had seen a large flock of ostriches while +waiting for the two he had killed. He had no doubt but what they could +be found on the following day; and, as it was necessary that the cattle +should have a little time to rest and recover themselves after the toils +of the karroo, an ostrich-hunt was at once agreed upon, and for that +evening ostriches became the chief topic of conversation around the +camp-fire. + + + +CHAPTER FIFTY. + +A TALK ABOUT OSTRICHES. + +The Ostrich (_Struthio Camelus_) is supposed to be the Benonim, Jaanah, +and Joneh, mentioned in the Bible. It is the _Thar Edsjanmel_ or +camel-bird of the Persians, of which everybody knows something and of +which nobody knows all. + +With the general appearance of the bird, I presume that my young readers +are already acquainted, and shall therefore say little or nothing about +it. + +The stumpy-footed, two-toed, long-legged, kicking creature has wings +that are apparently more useful to man than to itself. In fact, the +possession of these apparently superfluous appendages is generally the +cause of its being hunted by man and by him destroyed. + +It is one of those unfortunate creatures, persecuted to gratify the +vanity of other perhaps equally unfortunate creatures, called +fashionable ladies. A full-grown ostrich is usually between seven and +eight feet in height, but individuals have occasionally been met with +measuring more than ten. + +Its nest is merely a hole in the sand, about three feet in diameter, and +usually contains twenty eggs. Half this number may be seen lying +outside the nest, and elsewhere scattered over the plain. These are +supposed to be intended as food for the young when they have first +broken the shell. This supposition, however, is not founded upon the +observation of any fact to justify a belief in it. + +Job (chapter 39), speaking of the ostrich, says, she "Leaveth her eggs +in the earth, and warmeth them in the dust, and forgetteth that the foot +may crush them, or that the wild beast may break them. She is hardened +against her young ones as though they were not hers: her labour is in +vain without fear." This account does not altogether correspond with +modern observation. + +In the heat of the day, when the eggs are under the burning sun, the +ostrich can well afford to leave them for a while and go off in quest of +food. At night, when it is cool and the eggs need protection, the bird +is ever to be found doing its duty, and the male ostrich is often seen +in charge of the young brood, and assiduously guarding them. At such +times, if molested, the old birds have been known to act in the same way +as the partridge or plover, by shamming lame, so as to mislead the +intruder. + +From much more now known of the ostrich, it cannot be said to be wanting +in paternal or maternal instincts; and the idea of its being so has only +originated in the fact of their nests being so often found deserted +during the hot hours of the day. + +The food of the ostrich generally consists of seeds and leaves of +various plants. Owing to the nature of the dry desert soil on which it +is obtained, the only species it can procure are of a hard, dry texture; +and it is supposed to be for the purpose of assisting nature in their +digestion that the bird will swallow pebbles, pieces of iron, or other +mineral substances. Some have been disembowelled, in whose stomachs was +found a collection so varied as to resemble a small curiosity shop or +geological museum. + +Stones have been taken out of the stomach of an ostrich each weighing +more than a pound avoirdupois! + +When this great bird is going at full run,--for of course it cannot +fly,--its stride is full twelve feet in length, and its rate of speed +not less than twenty-five miles to the hour. It cannot be overtaken by +a horseman, and its capture is generally the result of some stratagem. + +It always feeds on the open plain, where it can obtain an unobstructed +view, and be warned in good time of the approach of an enemy. It +possesses a sharp vision, and from the manner its eyes are set in its +small, disproportioned head, held eight or ten feet above the surface of +the ground, it can take in the whole circle of the horizon at a glance. +On this account the utmost caution is required in approaching it. + +In one respect the author of the book of Job has closely followed nature +in his description of this bird; for "God hath deprived her of wisdom, +neither hath he imparted to her understanding." + +The ostrich is a stupid creature, and is often captured by taking +advantage of its stupidity. Nature seems to have placed in its little +head the belief that in running to the leeward it will encounter some +impassable barrier, and be overtaken by whatever pursues it. +Ostrich-hunters are well acquainted with this peculiarity, and on +approaching a flock they always ride to the windward. This manoeuvre is +observed by the birds, who believe that an attempt is being made to cut +off their retreat in the only direction in which it can be successfully +made. They immediately start on a course which, if continued, must +cross that taken by the hunters. Owing to the greater distance it has +to run, the latter often get near enough to bring the bird down with a +shot. Were the silly bird to retreat in the opposite direction, it +would be perfectly safe from pursuit. + +The feathers of the ostrich are beautifully adapted to the warm climate +of the desert country it inhabits. They allow a free circulation of the +air around its skin, while giving shade to its body. The white plumes +of the male bring the greatest price, and sometimes sell for 12 pounds +the pound, Troy weight, of only twelve ounces. The black feathers +seldom fetch more than a fourth of the price. + +Two species of ostrich are found on the great plains of South America, +and one other in Australia. None of these attain the gigantic +proportions of the African, nor are their plumes at all comparable in +beauty or value to those of the _Struthio Camelus_. + +Ostriches were once a favourite article of food with the Romans; and it +is stated that the brains of six hundred of these birds were consumed at +one feast. The flesh is still eaten, but only by the native Africans. +The bird possesses great strength, and can run at a rapid rate with a +man mounted on its back. + +It was undoubtedly designed by its Creator for some other purpose than +that of contributing to the gratification of man's vanity. + +Ostriches are easily domesticated. This is done to some extent by the +Arabians, who breed and bring them up for the sake of the feathers, as +also to procure them as an article of food. + +But the more enlightened people of the present day make no other effort +to ascertain their utility, than to keep a pair or two of them shut up +in a public garden for children and their nurses to gaze at. + + + +CHAPTER FIFTY ONE. + +ANOTHER DELAY. + +Next morning, the hunters were early in the saddle, and off for the +karroo. For some distance, they rode along the bank of the stream which +was fringed by a growth of willow-trees. This course was taken to get +to windward of the ostriches, in the hope of having a shot at them as +they ran up the wind. Had their object been to stalk any other species +of animal, they would have advanced upon it from the leeward. + +Before they had gone a great way over the karroo, five huge bipeds were +seen about a mile away. They were ostriches. They were apparently +coming towards them with great speed, and the four hunters extended +their line to cut off an advance which the stupid bird mistakes for a +retreat. They were moving in long rapid strides; and, as they drew +nearer, the hunters saw that, to obtain a good shot, they must gallop +farther to the north. The birds were going in a curved line that would +carry them away from the place where the hunters expected to have met +them. To get within sure range, these saw that they would have a sharp +ride for it, and their horses were instantly put to their full speed. + +Though the ostriches appeared to be running in a straight line from the +place where they had started, such was not the case. They were curving +around just sufficiently to avoid the hunters, and yet get to the +windward of them. Their pace being much faster than that of the horses, +they succeeded in crossing the course pursued by the latter, about three +hundred yards in advance of them. + +Willem and Hendrik hardly taking time to pull up, dismounted and fired. +But not with the desired result. The ostriches were at too great a +distance, and ran on untouched. Knowing that a stern chase after them +would prove a failure, the hunters came to a stop. + +Several other ostriches were afterwards seen; but, as on the open +karroo, it was found impossible to approach them; and our adventurers +were compelled to return to their camp without taking back a single +feather. Their want of success was a source of great gratification to +Swartboy. He could kill ostriches afoot, while four white men, although +well-armed and mounted on fast horses, had failed to do so. The Bushman +could not avoid making an exhibition of his conceit, and he proceeded to +inform his masters that if they were very anxious to obtain +ostrich-feathers, he could easily put them in the way. As none of the +hunters were inclined to put Swartboy's abilities for ostrich-hunting to +a further test they acknowledged their defeat and resumed the +interrupted journey. + +After leaving the karroo, the hunters entered into a very beautiful and +fertile country possessed by small tribes of peaceful Bechuanas, who had +long been allowed to remain undisturbed by their warlike neighbours, for +the reason that they lived at a great distance from any hostile tribe. +It was a country Willem was reluctant to pass rapidly through; for, +after leaving it behind, he knew there would be very little hope of +again seeing giraffes. + +Along the way, little groves of the _cameel-doorn_ were occasionally +seen; but, for all this, no camelopards. + +At a village, passed by them on the route, they were informed that +giraffes sometimes visited the neighbourhood, and that there was no time +of the year, but that, with a little trouble, some of these animals +might be found within a day's distance. + +This information, Hendrik, Arend, and Hans heard rather with regret: +they knew that it was likely to cause another impediment to their +homeward journey. + +In this they were not deceived. Willem stoutly declared that he would +proceed no further for the present; at the same time, telling the others +that, if they were impatient to reach Graaf Reinet, they might go on +without him. + +This, all three would willingly have done, had they dared. But they +knew that, on reaching home, they would be unable to give any +satisfactory explanation for deserting their companion. People would +inquire why they had not remained to assist the great hunter in his +praiseworthy enterprise. What answer could they give? + +There was both honour and profit to be derived by delivering two young +giraffes to the Dutch consul, and they would not have been unwilling to +share in both, if the thing could have been conveniently accomplished. +For all that, they would have preferred returning home without further +delay, but for the determination of Willem to remain. + +The four Makololo were also a little chafed at the delay. They were +anxious to see something of the wonders of civilisation, but their +impatience was not openly expressed. Before setting out, they had been +instructed by Macora in all things to be guided by Willem; and they had +no intention of disobeying. + +Congo was the only one who was wholly indifferent to the future. His +home was with Groot Willem, and he seemed to have no more concern or +remembrance for Graaf Reinet than his dog Spoor'em. + +Choosing a convenient place for their encampment within a few miles of +the Bechuana village, the youths resolved to stop for a while, and make +a final effort at capturing the camelopards. Should they succeed in +finding these animals, yet fail in taking any of them alive, Groot +Willem promised that he would make no further opposition to returning +home. + +As all knew that the promise would be faithfully kept, they consented to +stay for a few days without showing any signs of reluctance. + +Crossing the country with a general course to the south-west, ran a +stream, along which was a belt of timber, or rather a series of +disconnected copses. The trees were mostly mimosas. In every copse +could be seen some trees with torn branches, and twigs cut off, an +evidence that they had been browsed upon by the camelopards; while the +spoor of these animals appeared in many places along the edge of the +stream. + +As the damage done to the mimosas, and the tracks in the mud, showed +signs of having been recently made, our hunters came to the conclusion +that giraffes could not be far off. + +"Something whispers me," said Willem, "that we shall succeed at last. I +left home with the intention of never returning without two young +giraffes; and I have not yet relinquished the hope of seeing Graaf +Reinet again. We will make no more pits; but let me once more set my +eyes on a giraffe and, mark me, it is mine, if I have to run it down and +capture it with my own hands." + +"That is not possible," remarked Hendrik. "True, you might catch a wild +elephant; but what would you do with it? or, rather, what would it do +with you?" + +"That question I shall take into serious consideration after I've caught +my giraffe," answered Willem. "I can only say now, that, if I meet with +one, I'm not going to part with it alive,--not if I have to exchange my +horse for it." + +------------------------------------------------------------------------ + +Three days were passed in riding about the country; and, during that +time, the hunters saw not a single giraffe. In this respect, they were +more unfortunate than Swartboy and the Makololo, who remained at the +camp. On the evening of the third day which the hunters had spent in +beating some groves up the river, Swartboy reported, on their return, +that two giraffes had passed within sight of the camp. He described +them as an aged couple that had, no doubt, been often hunted. To these +ancient inhabitants of the mimosa forest, the Bushman ascribed the spoor +and other signs of giraffes that had been seen. He had compared the +tracks of the animals that trotted past the camp, with those on the +banks of the stream, and he pronounced both to have been made by the +same feet. + +Swartboy further informed his young masters that he could have captured +the two animals he had seen, but did not, because they were old, and not +worth the trouble. + +If Hendrik, Arend, and Hans were inclined to place but little reliance +on this boast of the Bushman, they gave to the rest of his story more +than a fair share of credence. To them it was positive evidence that +any longer stay in the neighbourhood would be simply a waste of time. + +Willem saw that they were once more inclined on defeating his plans, but +it only strengthened him in the resolution to continue a little longer +in the place. + +Each of the four had a cherished project he was anxious to see +fulfilled. Willem's wish was to obtain two young giraffes; and his +three companions found that there was no chance of his relinquishing his +design,--at least, not for many days. + +Two more were passed upon the spot, and then our young adventurers, who, +although young in years, were old in friendship, came very near parting +company. At this crisis, a spectacle was presented to their eyes that +had the happy effect of once more uniting them for a common purpose. + + + +CHAPTER FIFTY TWO. + +A HOPELESS CHASE. + +While the hunters were at breakfast, they were startled by the dull, +heavy sound of footfalls, and the yelping of wild dogs. A quarter of a +mile to the eastward they saw approaching them a large drove of +springboks, accompanied by a band of giraffes. More than a hundred of +the antelopes, and between twenty and thirty camelopards were flying +before a few _wilde honden_. + +The wild hounds of South Africa hunt in packs, and proceed upon a +well-organised plan. The whole pack is never engaged in running upon +the view. Some remain in reserve, and, guided by the voices of those +that are running, frequently save space by cutting off angles. This +they can do whenever the chase is not made in a straight line. + +In this manner they relieve each other, and the pursuit is continued +until the game becomes exhausted and is easily overtaken. + +The perseverance, energy, and cunning displayed by these animals is +something wonderful. + +They do not commence a hunt until driven to it by hunger, and then it is +often carried on for many hours, their tenacity of purpose being shown +by their continuing the chase till their victim falls down before them. +They were in full run after the springboks, and one of those animals was +sure to reward their skill and labour by affording them a dinner. + +The giraffes were foolish enough to think, or act, as though the _wilde +honden_ were hunting them; and in place of remaining still and +permitting the dogs to pass, or turning to one side, the foolish +creatures ran on with the springboks. At the time they came up with the +hunters, they were already exhibiting signs of distress. To Groot +Willem it was a gratifying sight. A herd of giraffes was at hand. Some +of them were evidently young ones. Three of them he observed were +apparently but a few weeks old. The very things for which he had +travelled so far were now before his eyes, apparently coming to deliver +themselves up. + +It was not until the springboks swerved to the right to avoid the +horsemen, that these little animals became separated from the giraffes. +The latter continued on along the edge of the stream, while the former, +pursued by the wild dogs, made off towards some hills to the north. + +The speed of the camelopard is not quite equal to that of a horse, and +the hunters knew that the desired objects could be overtaken; but what +then? The giraffes might be shot down, but how were they to be taken +alive? + +There was no time for reflection. The necessity of commencing the +chase, and the excitement of following it up, occupied all the time of +the hunters. + +After a sharp run of about two miles, the camelopards began to show +further signs of distress. Already exhausted by their flight before the +hounds, and now pursued by fresh horses, their utmost efforts did not +save them from being overtaken; after a two-mile chase our hunters were +riding upon their heels. + +A portion of the herd, becoming separated from the rest turned away from +the bank of the stream. There were but three who went thus,--a male and +female followed by a young one,--a beautiful creature. Groot Willem +gazed longingly upon it as he galloped by its side, and became nearly +mad with the desire to secure it. The pace of the three had now been +changed from a gallop to a trot, in which their feet were lifted but a +few inches from the ground, and drawn forward in an awkward shambling +manner, that proved them exhausted with their long run. Still, they ran +on at a pace that kept Willem's horse at a sharp canter. + +In a short time he had got out of sight both of the main herd and his +comrades. Nothing could be seen of either. He might have reflected +that there was some risk of losing himself; but he did not. All his +thoughts were given to the capture of the young giraffe. + +Slower and more slow became the pace both of pursuer and pursued, the +horse streaming with sweat, and nearly ready to drop in his tracks. + +"Why should I follow them farther?" thought Willem. "Why should I kill +my horse for the sake of gazing a little longer on a creature I cannot +take?" + +Though conscious of the folly he was committing, Willem could not bring +himself to abandon the chase. + +By his side trotted the young giraffe, beautiful in colour, graceful in +form, and to his mind priceless in value. But how was it to become his? +The coveted prize, although apparently but a few weeks old, and nearly +exhausted by its long race, was still able to defy any efforts he might +make to check its laboured flight. + +He was now more than a mile from the river, and his horse was tottering +under him, nearly exhausted by its long exertions. What should he do? + +Stop, give his horse a rest, and then return to his companions. This +was the command of common sense; but he was not guided by that. For the +time, he was insane with excitement, anxiety, and despair. He was mad, +and acted like a madman. The hopes and aspirations he had been for +months indulging in were concentrated into the hour; and in that hour he +could not yield them up. He was too much exasperated to reason calmly +or clearly. A little extra exertion on the part of his horse might +place him in advance of the three giraffes; and he might drive them back +to the river. + +"Yes," exclaimed he, nearly frantic with the fear of losing what seemed +so nearly gained. + +"If I cannot catch this young giraffe, I can drive it. I'll drive it to +Graaf Reinet. It shall not escape me!" + +Plunging his spurs into the foam-covered flanks of his horse, he sprang +forward in advance of the three giraffes; and as he expected, they came +to a halt. Pulling up, he wheeled round facing them, while the two old +giraffes turned at the same time and made off in the back direction. + +As they did so, one of them came in contact with the tottering calf, +that for a second or so, seemed to become entangled between its legs; +and at their separation, the young one staggered a pace or two and fell +heavily upon the earth. + + + +CHAPTER FIFTY THREE. + +A WEARY WATCH. + +Throwing himself out of his saddle, Willem seized the fallen creature, +and hindered it from rising, by keeping its head close pressed against +the ground. This was easily done, for the long slender neck of the +animal, without much muscular strength, gave him a good chance of +holding it down. The weight of the huge hunter's body was sufficient +for that, without any exertion of his strength. + +Meanwhile the old ones continued their flight, while Willem's horse, +relieved of his load, proceeded to refresh himself by browsing upon the +dry herbage that grew near. Willem had obtained what he wanted, a young +giraffe. It was actually in his possession. He was holding it under +perfect control, and yet it appeared to him that he was as far as ever +from the realisation of his hopes! Now that he had got the giraffe, all +that he could do was to keep it on the spot where it had fallen. The +instant its head might be released from his hold it would spring to its +feet again and escape in spite of all his efforts to retain it. + +He could not allow it to go thus. He had hoped too wildly, travelled +too far, and waited too long, for that. The fear that he would still +have to surrender his prize or destroy it, was to him a painful thought, +and it was only relieved by the hope that in time he might be joined by +his companions. They might discover the spoor of his horse, and come to +him. In that case there would be no difficulty. The giraffe could then +be secured with rheims and become their travelling companion for the +rest of the journey to Graaf Reinet. About their coming there was much +uncertainty,--at least, their coming in time. They would wait for his +return perhaps, until the next morning, before starting out in search of +him. + +Before their arrival, the young giraffe would kill itself with the +violent exertions it still continued to make. It was kicking and +struggling as if it wanted to leap out of its skin. Such terrible +throes could not fail to injure it. Willem was himself suffering from +thirst. A long afternoon was before him. It would be followed by a +long night,--one in which the lion, that prowling tyrant of the African +plains, would be seeking his supper. + +Would the hunter be allowed to retain possession of his prize? His +steed, the faithful creature that had carried him through so many +perils, was wandering away from his sight. The horse, too, might stray +beyond the chance of being found again. He might be devoured by wild +beasts. The horse could still be recovered. Would it not be better to +abandon the giraffe and endeavour to get back to his companions? By +remaining where he was, he might lose all three,--his horse, his prize, +and his own life. What was best to be done? The young hunter was never +more perplexed in his life. He was in an agony of doubt and +uncertainty. Streams of perspiration were pouring down his cheeks, and +his throat felt as if on fire. Slowly he saw the horse strolling away, +until he was almost beyond the reach of his vision, and yet could not +bring himself to a determination as to what should be done. He had +travelled fifteen hundred miles to capture two such creatures as the one +now underneath him. He had seized upon one, and, if his companions had +done their duty, they might have taken another. This thought counselled +him to hold on to the captured giraffe; and he saw the horse disappear +over a swell of the plain, just as the sun sunk down below the horizon. + +For a long time, the giraffe struggled wildly to release itself. Then +it remained quiet for a while, not as if it had given up the intention +to escape, but as if reflecting on some plan to free itself. Again it +would recommence its struggles, and again rest awhile, as though +gathering strength for a fresh effort. Gradually it grew resigned to +its position, and seemed to breath more tranquilly, while its exertions +were less frequent and more feeble. It had learnt that it could remain +in the presence of man without meeting death. It had become familiar +with his company, and conscious of its own inability to part from it, +while man opposed its efforts. + +Night came down and found Willem still seated by the side of the +giraffe, with his arms around its neck. He had the satisfaction of +thinking that his companions would now be uneasy at his absence. He +felt sure that within a few hours Congo and Spoor'em would be upon his +track, with the others following; and, when all should arrive, the young +giraffe would be secured. The prospect of such a termination to his +adventure did much to make him disregard the agony he was enduring. He +soon discovered he was not to be left alone in his vigil; nor was his +right to the prize to be left undisputed. + +His first visitors were hyenas; but their laughter--apparently put forth +at seeing him in his ludicrous position--did not induce him to abandon +it; and the fierce brutes circled around him, smiling and showing their +teeth to no purpose. They were too cowardly to attempt an attack; and +their efforts to frighten him were more amusing than otherwise. + +Soon after sunset the night became very dark,--so dark that although the +hyenas approached within a few paces, nothing could be seen of them +except their shining eyes. It was just such a night as lions select for +going in search of prey,--so dark that the king of beasts can move about +unseen, and, while thus protected by invisibility, will pounce upon a +man with as much confidence as he will upon a springbok. + +As Willem was trying to while away the time by hopeful thoughts, the air +was shaken around him, by a voice which he knew to be the roar of the +lion. One was abroad seeking blood. + +The clouds that had been for some time rolling up from the south-west +became blacker at the instant, and seemed separated by streams of fire, +while the low murmurings of distant thunder could be heard far-off in +the sky. They were signs that could not be mistaken. A tropical storm +was approaching. + +The voice of the lion told that he was doing the same. Every moment it +could be heard, nearer, and more intensely terrifying. + +Which of them would come first,--the storm or the beast of prey? It +seemed a question between them. Already heavy rain-drops were plashing +around him. Thirsting as he was, this would have been a welcome sound, +but for that other that proceeded from the throat of the lion. + +The hunter's familiarity with the habits of the great cat gave him a +good idea of how he might expect the latter to approach him. There +would be a simultaneous bound and roar, followed by the mangling of a +body and the crunching of bones, which he could hardly doubt would be +his own. + +Willem was not often tortured with fear, though at that moment he was +not free from apprehension. Still, he awaited the event with calmness. + +Most people, when frightened, feel an irresistible desire to make a +sudden departure from the place where they have been seized with the +malady; but this was not the case with Groot Willem. He had the sense +to know that by making a move he might run into the jaws of the very +danger he wished to avoid; for the roar of the lion gives no guide to +the direction the animal may be in. Besides, he was not yet so badly +scared as to think of abandoning the prize he had taken such trouble to +retain. + +The rain now came down, and for some time continued to fall in torrents. +Brief periods of darkness were followed by gleams of electric light, +dazzling in its brilliancy. + +In a few minutes the fiercest of the storm appeared to be over, and +then, as a wind-up to it, there came a long continued blaze of +lightning, more brilliant than ever, and a peal of thunder louder than +any that had preceded it. + +By that flash Willem was nearly blinded. The electric shock seemed to +strike every nerve in his body, and, had he been standing erect, he +certainly would have fallen to the ground. The instant after, so +intensely black was all around that he might well have thought for a +moment or two that the flash had destroyed his power of vision; but +there was another thought on his mind more terrible than this. + +When the heavens and earth were illumed by that flash, he had obtained a +momentary glimpse of an object that drove from his mind every thought +but that of immediate death. There was a lion within ten feet of him, +just crouching for a spring! Willem would have rushed out of the way, +and, abandoning the giraffe, have fled far from the spot. This was his +first instinct, but unfortunately he was unable to yield to it. +Prostrated, body and soul, by the electric fluid, that had struck the +earth within a few feet of him, for a time he was unable to stir. + +The first distinct thought that came into his mind was astonishment at +finding the minute after that the claws of the lion were not buried in +his flesh! The blow that had stunned him was not from the paw of the +lion, but the lightning. It had saved his life, as the king of beasts, +scorched and terrified by the shock, had retreated on the same instant. + +The storm soon passed over, and a small patch of clear sky appeared +opening up on the western horizon. It was soon after occupied by the +disk of a silvery moon, under whose soft light Willem continued his +vigil, without further molestation from either lion or hyenas. + +The giraffe was still alive and lying quietly upon the ground; but, from +its long and laboured respiration, Willem began to fear that it might +die before he would have the chance to release it from the irksome +attitude in which he felt bound to retain it. + + + +CHAPTER FIFTY FOUR. + +CHANCE BETTER THAN SKILL. + +The camelopards followed by Hans, Hendrik, and Arend had continued up +the bank of the stream; and, being the main body of the herd, were +pursued without the hunters having noticed the defection of Willem. + +With such noble game in view, and in hot pursuit of it, these three +youths were as much excited as Groot Willem himself. Full of ardour +they pressed on. Their horses were spurred to such a speed as soon +brought them close upon the heels of the flying game. + +It was only then that Willem was observed to have parted from them. He +was seen half a mile off, and fast increasing the distance. He was +heading northward. + +This discovery scarce caused them a thought. Each was too much +interested in his own chase to think of the others. + +They soon closed in upon the giraffes, that had been driven into a sharp +bend of the river. + +The hunted animals, on perceiving the obstruction, turned back, but +found their retreat cut off. The pursuers were coming on behind them. + +Arend, who was to the right of the others, was just in time to prevent +the giraffes from escaping with dry hoofs, by riding rapidly in advance +of his companions. + +The herd was again headed towards the river. + +In forcing them round, Arend was placed within a few yards of the +largest. The instinctive desire to bring down such a grand creature +could not be resisted, and, without bringing his horse to a stand, he +placed the barrel of his rifle on a line with the camelopard's head and +fired. Skill or chance favoured him, and the giraffe dropped to the +shot. + +Though a gigantic creature, standing sixteen feet in height the one +small bullet, scarce bigger than a pea, was all that was necessary to +bring its towering form to the earth. It had been hit on the side of +the head, just behind the eye; and, as it received the shot, it raised +its fore feet from the ground, spun around as on a pivot, and then fell +heavily on its side. As though desirous of putting a period to its +sufferings as soon as possible, as soon as it was down it commenced +beating the ground violently with its shattered head. + +The remaining giraffes were driven on toward the stream, where, seeing +no other way of avoiding the enemy that pursued them, they plunged into +the water. + +The stream was neither broad nor deep, yet was it one that could not be +conveniently crossed at that particular spot. The bank on both sides +rose several feet above the water; and, from the way in which the +animals were wading across, it was evident they were going upon a soft +bottom. Not until several of them had reached the opposite shore and +made an ineffectual attempt to get out of the channel, did our hunters +have any hope of capturing one of the young giraffes. Hitherto they had +not thought of being able to take them alive. They had entered upon the +chase solely for its excitement, and for the destroying of animal life; +but on seeing the camelopards struggling in the stream, they became +animated with the same hope that was inspiring Groot Willem about the +same time, but on a far distant part of the plain. + +"They can't get up the bank," shouted Hendrik, "and there are two young +ones among them. Let us try to get hold of them." + +To carry out Hendrik's proposal, but little time was lost in arranging a +plan. It was instantly decided that they should separate, and one try +to reach the other side of the stream. + +This task was assigned to Hendrik. Riding beyond the bend of the river, +he reached a place where the bank was shelving and, dashing in, he soon +gained the opposite shore. + +A part of the equipment of each horse ridden by the hunters was a long +rheim made of buffalo hide, and used for the purpose of tethering their +animals when upon the grass. At one end of the rheim Hendrik had a +loop, such as is used in the lazos of Spanish America. This was the +means he intended to make use of for capturing the young giraffes. + +On riding opposite to them he found them still in the water. Wearied by +their late run, they were standing quietly, apparently too much +exhausted to raise their feet out of the soft ooze in which they were +sinking deeper and deeper. Two or three of the stronger ones alone +continued their struggle to gain the shore, though not one of the drove +seemed to think of making escape by moving up or down the stream. They +were deterred from this by the presence of Hans and Arend, who had +placed themselves on projecting points of the bank, above and below. +The appearance of Hendrik directly in front of them caused a change in +their attitude. Led by a large male, they commenced plunging about as +if determined to make a break up stream. But Arend, who was in that +quarter, had only a few paces to go before again appearing to be +directly ahead of them, and this brought them a second time to a stand. +After a short pause and a good deal of violent plunging, they now turned +down stream, in hopes of escaping that way. So sharp was the bend of +the river, that Hans, who guarded there, was able to show himself, as if +right in front of them, and by loud shouts he once more brought them to +bay. As a further encouragement to the hunters to continue the attempt +at capturing the young giraffes, they noticed that these made but slight +efforts to escape. The mud at the bottom was too tough for the strength +of their slender limbs. In the narrow stream they were unable to get +out of reach of the rheims, which all three of the hunters had now +detached from their saddles, and were looking out for an opportunity to +use. + +In their efforts to avoid their enemies, the frightened camelopards now +rushed to and fro, wearily dragging their feet from the mud, until they +were hardly able to move. Hendrik, who was nearest, after two or three +ineffectual trials, at length succeeded in throwing his snare over the +head of one of the young ones. As soon as he had done so, he leaped out +of his saddle, and made fast the other end of his rheim to a tree. +There was no chance for the giraffe to break away after that. However +strong it might be in the body, its long slender neck was too feeble to +aid it in a violent effort; and it soon submitted to its confinement. + +"Try and catch the other," exclaimed Hendrik to his companions, pointing +to the second of the young giraffes. "Make haste, and you will have it. +See! it's stuck in the mud. Quick with your rheim, Hans, quick!" + +In a second or two, Hans, obeying the call, succeeded in throwing his +snare, and the second of the young giraffes became a captive. + +As this was all that was wanted, the rest of the herd received no +further attention,--the hunters being wholly occupied with the two they +had taken. + +Left free, the crowd of camelopards once more made a break to get off +down stream. In their struggles to escape, one of the young--that +captured by Hendrik--was borne down and trampled under the water. + +It was not carried off. The rope still retained it; but, although it +remained in the hands of its captors, it was only in the shape of a +carcass. It was partly drowned by its head being carried under water, +and partly choked by the noose having tightened around its neck. + +As soon as the herd had gone off, the three hunters turned their +attention to the captive that was still alive. It was at first fairly +secured, so as to prevent the noose from slipping, and then carefully +led out of the stream. + +For some time it struggled to get free, but, as if convinced that its +efforts would be idle, it soon desisted. + +Exhausted with the long race, as well as by its subsequent exertions in +the water, it was the more easily subdued. + +Our three hunters were in ecstasies. They had now obtained one young +giraffe, and there was a possibility of their yet procuring another. +The feat of capturing these creatures, that had baffled so many hunters, +was proved not to be impossible. After all, Groot Willem had not been +like a child crying for the moon. He had hoped for nothing more than +might be accomplished. The welfare of their captive was now their +greatest care; and, to give it an opportunity of recovering from its +fright, as also to get it a little better acquainted with its new +companions, they resolved to allow it an hour's rest before returning to +the camp. + +The young giraffe was too much exhausted to make any further effort at +freeing itself. + +With the mild and gentle character of the camel, and nothing of the +leopard in its nature, the giraffe soon becomes resigned to captivity. + + + +CHAPTER FIFTY FIVE. + +A REVERSE OF FORTUNE. + +Having given their captive the desired rest, during which it had +displayed its good sense by remaining most of the time in quiet, the +hunters prepared to drive it to their camp. + +Mounted on their horses, Arend and Hans each took the end of a rheim, +which was fastened midway to its neck. They intended to ride a little +in advance of the captive, keeping also some distance apart from each +other. This would hinder it from turning either to the right or left. +Hendrik was to come on behind and urge the creature forward, should it +show a disposition to try the strength of its neck by hanging back upon +the rheims. + +This plan worked extremely well. The young captive was compelled to +follow the two horsemen in an undeviating line; and every attempt made +to remain stationary or go backwards was rewarded by a blow from +Hendrik's jambok. Then the strain on the ropes would instantly be +relieved by the animal springing forward. In this manner the creature +was conducted along without the slightest trouble; and near the middle +of the afternoon, they reached the place from whence they had started +out on the hunt. + +On the ground they discovered their pack-saddles, cooking utensils, and +other impedimenta, but nothing was seen of Congo, Swartboy, the four +Makololo, or the cattle! All were away! Moreover, they had hopes of +meeting Groot Willem on their return, and were anticipating great +pleasure from the encounter. They knew how rejoiced he would be at +their success. But where were the camp followers? Where were Swartboy +and Congo? + +There was a mystery in their absence that none of the three hunters +could solve. + +Why had the property been left exposed by those placed in charge of it? +Could the Makololo have robbed them of their cattle? Had Congo and +Swartboy proved traitors? This was very improbable. But why were they +not there? + +For some time our adventurers could do nothing but wait, in the hope +that time would explain all, and bring the absentees back. + +Not an ox, horse, or dog was to be seen. The bundles of ivory, +enveloped in grass matting, were lying where they had been left in the +morning. If a robbery had been committed, why was this valuable +property left untouched? + +As no one could make answer, the solution had to be left to time. + +Evening came on, and the three hunters were still distracted by +conflicting hopes, fears, and doubts. The prolonged absence of Willem +now began to cause them a serious apprehension. It was time something +should be done towards finding him; but what were they to do? Where +should they seek? They knew not; still, they should go somewhere. + +As night approached, leaving Hans to take care of the young giraffe, +Arend and Hendrik started off in the direction in which Willem had last +been seen. + +The twilight was fast disappearing before they had proceeded a mile from +the camp, but under its dim light they perceived Congo and Swartboy +coming towards them. They were only accompanied by the dogs. + +The two hunters hastened forward, and soon came up with them. Hendrik +commenced hastily questioning the Bushman, while Arend did the same to +the Kaffir, in the endeavour to get some information of what had so much +mystified them. + +The questions "Where is Willem?" "Where are the cattle?" "Why did you +leave the camp?" "Where are the Makololo?" were asked in rapid +succession, and to all they received but one answer,--the word "Yaas." + +"Will you not tell me, you yellow demon?" shouted Hendrik, impatient at +not getting the answer he wished. + +"Yaas, baas Hendrik," answered Swartboy; "what you want to know first?" + +"Where is Willem?" + +This was a question that, in the Bushman's way of thinking, required +some consideration before he could venture on a reply; but while he was +hesitating, Congo answered, "We don't know." + +"Ha, ha! Congo is a fool," exclaimed Swartboy. "We saw baas Willem +going away this morning with the ress of you, after the tootlas." + +It was not until the youths were driven nearly wild with impatience that +they succeeded in learning what they wished. Willem had not returned, +and the two Africans knew less about the cause of his absence than they +did themselves. During the day, the cattle, in feeding, had strayed to +some distance over the plain. The four Makololo had gone after them, +and had not returned. Swartboy and Congo admitted that they had slept +awhile in the afternoon, and only on awaking had discovered that the +cattle and Makololo were missing. They had then started out in search +of both. They had found the ambassadors of Macora in great trouble. A +party of Bechuanas had chanced upon them, and taken from them the whole +of the cattle! + +The Makololo were in great distress about the affair, and, fearing they +would be blamed for the loss of the cattle, were afraid to return to the +camp of the hunters. They were then halted about two miles down the +river, and were talking of going back to their home, quite certain that +the white hunters would have nothing more to do with them. + +The folly of having left their property unprotected, when in the +neighbourhood of African tribes whose honesty could not be relied on, +now, for the first time, occurred to our adventurers. + +The Bechuanas, who will steal from each other, or from the people of any +nation, in all probability would not have taken the cattle, had one of +the whites been present to claim ownership in them. + +The Bechuana robbers had found them in the possession of only four +strange men, Africans, who belonged far north, and had no right to be +within Bechuana territory. The opportunity was too good to be lost, +and, so tempted, they had driven the animals away. + +There could be no help for what had happened,--at all events, not for +the present. To discover the whereabouts of Willem was the care that +was most pressing, and they one more proceeded in search of him. + +As the night had now come on they could have done nothing of themselves, +but the presence of Congo, accompanied by his hound Spoor'em, inspired +them with fresh hope, and they proceeded onward. + +After a time it became so dark that Arend proposed a halt until morning. +To this Hendrik objected, Congo taking sides with him. + +"Do you remember the night you were under the baobab-tree, dodging the +borele?" asked Hendrik. + +"Say no more," answered Arend. "If you wish it I am willing to go on." + +Swartboy was sent back to the camp to join Hans, while the Kaffir and +Spoor'em led the way. Under the direction of Hendrik they soon came to +the place where Willem had been last seen. There were no signs of him +anywhere. + +The joy with which they had returned to their camp had now departed. +Something unusual had happened to their companion,--something +disastrous. Their cattle and pack-horses were lost, driven away they +knew not whither, by a tribe that might be able to retain them, even +should they be found. + +Under these circumstances what cared they any longer for the captured +giraffe. + +Such were the reveries of Hendrik and Arend as they followed their +Kaffir guide through the gloom of the night. + + + +CHAPTER FIFTY SIX. + +THE SEARCH FOR WILLEM. + +To all appearance, Congo had some secret method of communicating to the +dog Spoor'em what was required of him. The animal ran to the right and +left, keeping a little in the advance, and with its muzzle close down to +the surface, as if searching for a spoor. Most of the time it was out +of sight, hidden by the darkness, but every now and then it would flit +like a shadow across their track, and they could hear an occasional +sniff as it lifted the scent from the ground. + +They had not proceeded more than half a mile in this manner when +Spoor'em expressed a more decided opinion of something that interested +him, by giving utterance to a short, sharp bark. + +"He's found the spoor," exclaimed Congo, hastening forward. "I told um +do that, and I knowed he would." + +They were all soon up with the dog, which kept moving forward at a slow +trot, occasionally lowering its snout to the grass, as though to make +sure against going astray. Unlike most other hounds, Spoor'em would +follow a track without rushing forward on the scent, and leaving the +hunters behind. + +Arend and Hendrik knew this, though still uncertain about being on the +traces of Groot Willem. + +The night was so dark they could not distinguish footmarks, and they had +not the slightest evidence of their own for believing that they were on +the tracks of Willem's horse. + +"How do you know that we are going right, Cong?" asked Hendrik. + +"We follow Spoor'em; he know it," answered the Kaffir. "He find +anything that go over the grass." + +"But can you be sure that he is following the spoor of Willem's horse?" + +"Yaas, Master Hendrik, very sure of it. Spoor'em is no fool. He knows +well what we want." + +With blind confidence in the sagacity both of the Kaffir and his dog, +the two hunters rode on at a gentle trot, taking more than an hour to +travel the same distance that Willem had gone over in a few minutes. + +There was a prospect that the trail they were following might conduct +them back to the camp, and that there would be found the man they were +in search of. Willem would be certain not to return over the same +ground where he had pursued the giraffes, and they might be spending the +night upon his tracks, while he was waiting for them at the camp. + +This thought suggested a return. + +Another consideration might have counselled them to it. A thunder-storm +was threatening, and the difficulties of their search would be greatly +increased. + +But all inclinations to go back were subdued by the reflection that +possibly Willem might be in danger, and in need of their assistance, and +with this thought they determined to go on. + +The dog was now urged forward at a greater speed. The storm was rapidly +approaching; and they knew that, after the ground had been saturated by +a fall of rain, the scent would be less easily taken up, and their +tracking might be brought to an end. + +The elements soon after opened upon them, but still they kept on in the +midst of the pelting rain, consoling themselves for what was +disagreeable, by the reflection that they were performing their duty to +their lost friend. + +It was not until the thunder-shower had passed over, that Spoor'em began +to show some doubt as to the course he was pursuing. The heavy rain had +not only destroyed the scent but the traces of the footmarks, and the +dog was no longer able to make them out. For the last half hour, they +had been moving through an atmosphere dark as Erebus itself. They had +been unable to see each other, except when the universe seemed illumed +by the flashes of lightning. + +The night had now become clear. The moon had made her appearance in the +western sky; and the search might have been continued with less +difficulty than before, but for the obliteration of the spoor. The dog +seemed bewildered, and ran about in short broken circles, as though +quite frantic at the thought of having lost the use of the most +important of his senses. + +"We shall have to return at last," said Hendrik, despairingly. "We can +do nothing more to-night." + +They were about to act according to this advice, when the loud roar of a +lion was heard some half mile off, and in the direction from which they +had just ridden. In going back that way they might encounter the fierce +creature. + +"I have kept the lock of my rifle as dry as possible," said Arend, "but +it may not be safe to trust it. I think I shall reload." + +Drawing the rifle out of the piece of leopard skin with which the lock +had been covered, Arend pointed the muzzle upwards and pulled trigger. +The gun went off. + +As the report fainted away in the distance, the far-off sound of a human +voice could be heard as if shouted back in answer to the shot. What +they heard was the word "Hilloo." + +They hastened in the direction from whence the sound seemed to proceed. +Even the dog appeared suddenly relieved from its perplexity, and led the +way. In less than ten minutes they were standing around Willem, +delighted at finding him in safety, and in the possession of a live +giraffe. + +"How long have you been here?" asked Hendrik, after the first moments of +their joyful greeting had passed. + +"Ever since noon," was Willem's reply. + +"And how much longer would you have stayed, had we not found you?" + +"Until either this giraffe or I should have died," answered Willem. "I +should not have abandoned it before." + +"But supposing you had died first, how would it have been then?" asked +Arend. + +"No doubt," replied Willem, "something would very soon have taken me +away. But why don't you take my place here, one of you? I must stretch +my legs, or I shall never be able to stand upright again." + +Hendrik placed his hands on the head of the giraffe, and Willem with +some difficulty arose, and, after walking around the prostrate animal, +declared that he had never been happy until that moment. + +It was decided that they should not attempt to stir from the place until +morning; and the rest of the night, with the exception of an hour or two +devoted to sleep, was passed in asking questions and giving +explanations. Willem was a little woeful about the loss of his +riding-horse, and also on learning of the robbery of the cattle; but +these misfortunes could not entirely counteract the joy he felt at +having taken the young giraffe. + +"This creature is quite tame now," said he; "and if I cannot find my +horse again, I shall ride it to Graaf Reinet. Before I do that, +however, I shall use it in catching another. I must and shall have two, +and we can easily find another chance. You and Hans ought to be ashamed +of yourselves. The three of you have not done so well as I. You have +allowed two or more young giraffes to escape, while I, single-handed, +captured all the young that were in the herd I followed." + +Arend and Hendrik glanced significantly at one another while Congo +stared at both of them. A shake of the head given by Hendrik was +understood by the two who were in the secret, for Congo had been told of +the capture of the second giraffe, and of course not a word was said to +Willem of that affair. His companions preferred giving him a surprise. + + + +CHAPTER FIFTY SEVEN. + +AN ENCOUNTER BETWEEN OLD ACQUAINTANCES. + +When morning dawned, the first thought of the hunters was to contrive +some plan for getting the young giraffe to the camp. + +Willem expressed surprise at his companions having come out without +their rheims. The reason given by Hendrik for their having done so was +that they did not think they would require them; besides, they had left +the camp in a hurry. + +They did not anticipate much difficulty in taking back the giraffe. It +appeared so weak and submissive that their only fear was of its not +being able to make the journey. + +For all that, without ropes or lines to lead it, there might be +difficulty enough. It might take a notion to resist, or get clear out +of their clutches. + +"I must have a line of some kind," said Willem, "even if I have to cut a +thong from the hide of one of your horses. I have been standing, or +rather sitting, sentry over this creature too long, and have travelled +too far for the sake of finding it, to allow any chance of its escaping +now. It is but half what we want; and if any of you had been worthy the +name of hunter, you would have taken the other half." + +A few hundred yards from the spot grew a copse of young trees,--slender +saplings they were, forming a miniature forest, such as one would like +to see when in search of a fishing-rod. + +Going to this grove, Willem selected out of it two long poles, each +having a fork at the end. + +One of these was placed on each side of the captive giraffe, in such a +manner that the forked ends embraced its neck, and when so tied, by +twisting the twigs together, formed a sort of neck halter. + +By this means the creature could be led along, one going on each side of +it. + +Arend grasped the end of one of the poles and Hendrik the other. + +So long had the young camelopard been kept in a prostrate position, that +it was with some difficulty it managed to get to its feet; and, after +doing so, its efforts to escape were feeble, and easily defeated. + +At each attempt to turn to one side, its head was instantly hauled to +the other, and it soon discovered that it was no less a captive on its +feet than when fast confined in the recumbent attitude. + +Finding its struggles ineffectual, it soon discontinued them, and +resigned itself to the will of its captors. + +Mounting their horses, Arend and Hendrik held the poles by which the +giraffe was to be guided, while Willem and Congo walked on behind. In +this manner the captive was conducted towards the camp. + +More than once during their journey Willem reiterated the reproach +already made to his companions. If they had only shown as much energy +and determination as he had done, they might now have been ready to take +the road for Graaf Reinet, with a triumphant prospect before them. + +"I would have followed this giraffe," said he, "until my horse dropped +dead, and then I would have followed it on foot until it became mine. I +had determined not to be defeated and survive the defeat. Ah! had any +of you three shown a particle of the same resolution, we might have +abandoned our cattle with pleasure, and started on a straight line for +home by daybreak to-morrow morning." + +Arend and Hendrik allowed the elated hunter to continue his reproaches +uninterrupted. They were quite satisfied with their own conduct; and +each had the delicacy to refrain from telling Willem, that, without +their assistance, his capture of the young giraffe would only have +resulted in the misfortune of losing his horse, and suffering many other +inconveniences. + +They knew that Willem, when free from the intoxication caused by the +partial fulfilment of a long-cherished design, would not claim any +greater share in the credit of the expedition than he was really +entitled to. Moreover, his joy at having captured the giraffe was +somewhat damped by the fear that his horse had gone off for good. + +He was confident that, should he again get possession of him, another +giraffe could be taken. With the herd that had been hunted, he had seen +two other young ones. They might be found a second time; but there +would be a difficulty in running them down, unless he was once more on +the back of his tried steed. + +By noon the camp was reached, when about the first thing that came under +the eyes of Groot Willem was a young giraffe standing tied to a tree! +Beside it was his own horse! + +The horse had been brought back by the Makololo, who found him straying +over the plain as they were themselves returning to the camp. The +presence both of the horse and the Makololo was at once explained. +Their original intention to visit the country of the white men had been +abandoned by them on account of the loss of their cattle. Without +these, they had no means of making the long journey that still lay +before them. There seemed nothing for them but to go back to their home +to Macora. But they were unwilling to set off without taking leave of +their late travelling-companions; and, as they were at the same time +afraid of being blamed for the loss of the white hunters' cattle, as +well as their own, they passed the night in great distress, uncertain as +to what they should do. Just as morning dawned, they descried Willem's +horse grazing close to the spot where they were encamped. They had last +seen the great hunter on this horse's back, going in pursuit of the +giraffes; and they were anxious to learn why the animal was now +separated from its rider. They knew that it was greatly prized by its +owner, and they believed that, by taking it back to him, they would be +forgiven for their neglect. + +In this, they were not mistaken. About the other animal--the young +giraffe that stood tied to a tree--Groot Willem neither asked nor +received any explanation. He held his tongue about that. He had been +over thirty hours without tasting food, and now without uttering another +word, he set to work upon a dinner that Swartboy had cooked for him, +and, after showing that his discomfiture had not robbed him of his +appetite, he stretched himself along the grass and fell into a sound +sleep. + +The hunters had now but one more task to perform before taking the +direct route towards Graaf Reinet. They must make an effort to recover +the horses and cattle of which they had been despoiled. The sooner this +work should be commenced, the better the prospect of success; but Groot +Willem, on being awakened and consulted, declared that he would do +nothing but sleep for the next twelve hours; and, saying this, he once +more sank into a snoring slumber. As the others could take no important +step without him, they were compelled to leave the matter over, till +such time as the great hunter should awake, which was not before +breakfast-time of the following day. + + + +CHAPTER FIFTY EIGHT. + +THE LOST ARE FOUND. + +After breakfast had been eaten, it was proposed to start off in search +of the stolen property; and Groot Willem, not without reluctance, was +prevailed upon to accompany the others. He was loath to part even for a +few hours from the captives he prized so highly. His wildest dreams had +been realised. Two young giraffes had been taken and were gradually +getting tamed. He could caress them. They could be conducted with but +little trouble to the colony of Graaf Reinet,--thence delivered to the +Dutch consul, and both money and fame would be the reward. + +Since returning to the camp and seeing the second giraffe, his +companions had heard no more boasting about his own prowess, nor +reproaches for their negligence. But now came the question of the ivory +and other articles still lying in the camp. With such a large quantity +of valuable property to transport to the settlements, the pack-horses +and cattle were worth making an effort to recover; so, leaving Hans with +Swartboy and two of the Makololo to guard the camp, the others started +off with the intention to seek and, if possible, find them. + +Believing that the tribe of Bechuanas that had taken them would be found +living somewhere near a stream of water, they resolved to first proceed +down the river on which they had their camp; and in this direction they +set off. + +For the first five miles nothing could be seen of the spoor of either +horses or cattle. But the ground was hard and dry, and, even if cattle +had been driven over it, it would have been impossible to take up their +spoor. It had rained heavily, and that would do something to obliterate +any tracks that might have been made. Soon they came to a place where +the river-bank was low and marshy, and this they examined with care. +They saw the hoof-marks of many animals that had quenched their thirst +at the stream, all plainly impressed upon the soft earth. To their joy +they perceived amongst them the tracks of horses and cattle, and easily +recognised them as those of the animals they had lost. Beyond doubt +they had been driven over the river at that point. Pleased at such a +good beginning, they continued on, more hopefully. They were now sure +that they had come in the right direction. The spoor still led down the +bunks of the stream. Three or four miles farther on, they came within +sight of a kraal, containing about forty huts. As they drew near, +several men ran forward to meet them, and instantly demanded their +business. + +Swartboy informed them that they were looking after some stolen horses +and cattle. + +A tall, naked man, carrying a huge parasol of ostrich-feathers, acted as +spokesman for the villagers. In reply to Swartboy, he stated that he +knew what cattle were; that he had often seen such animals, but _not +lately_. He had never seen any horses and knew not what sort of animals +they were. As it chanced, the rain that had fallen upon the preceding +night had so softened the ground that all footmarks made since could be +distinguished without the slightest difficulty. It was evident the man +with the parasol had not thought of this; for our adventurers at once +saw that he was telling them a story. They had proofs that he was, by +the sight of several horse-tracks with which the ground was indented +around the spot where they had halted. They were so fresh as to show +that horses must have been there but an hour ago; and it was not likely +they could have been on that ground without being seen by the villagers +and their chief. + +Without saying another word to the natives, our party preceded on to the +kraal. As they drew near, the first thing that fixed their attention +was the skin of an ox freshly taken from the carcass, and hanging upon +one of the huts. Swartboy, who was an acute observer, at once +pronounced the hide to have belonged to one of the oxen he had lately +assisted in driving; and the two Makololo were of the same opinion. +They pointed out to the white hunters the marks of their own +pack-saddle. None of the villagers who stood around could give any +explanation of the presence of the hide. None of them had ever seen it +before; and the features of all were painfully distorted into +expressions of astonishment when it was shown them. + +Passing out from the kraal the white hunters rode off over a plain that +stretched northward. They did so because they saw something there that +looked like a herd; and they conjectured it might turn out to belong to +themselves. They were not astray. The herd consisted entirely of their +own stolen animals. They were guarded only by some women and children, +who fled wildly screaming at the approach of the white party. + +Riding up to the cattle, Groot Willem and Hendrik galloped on after the +frightened women, who, by the efforts they were making to escape, +plainly showed that they expected nothing short of being killed if +overtaken. + +Too glad at recovering their property, the hunters had not the slightest +desire to molest the helpless women, and yet, without intending it, they +caused the death of one. + +As they galloped after the affrighted crowd, one of the women was seen +to lag a little behind, and then fall suddenly to the earth. The two +horsemen pulled up, and then turned in the direction of the woman who +had fallen. On getting near, they noticed that dim, glassy appearance +of the eyes that denotes death. + +Hendrik dismounted, and placed his hand over her heart. It had ceased +to beat. There was no respiration. The woman was dead: she had been +frightened to death. + +By her side was a child not more than a few months old. And yet it +gazed upon Hendrik with eyes flashing defiance. Its animal instinct had +not been subdued by the fear of man, and its whole appearance gave +evidence of the truth of an assertion often made, that an African child, +like a lion's cub, is born with its mental faculties wonderfully +developed. + +By this time the other women had gone far out of reach, and none of them +could be recalled. Hendrik was not inclined to leave the child by the +side of its dead mother. Undecided what to do, he appealed to Willem, +who, by this, had come up. + +"We have frightened the soul out of this woman," said he, as the great +hunter drew near. "She has left a child behind her. What shall we do +with it? It won't do to leave the poor thing here." + +"This is unfortunate, certainly," said Willem; as he gazed at the dead +body. "The blacks will think that we killed the woman, and will ever +after have an opinion of white men they should not have. We must take +the child to the kraal, and give it up to them. We can tell them that +the woman died of her own folly, which is only the truth. Hand the +piccaninny to me." + +As Hendrik attempted to obey this request, the child by loud screams +protested against being taken away from its mother. Its resistance was +not alone confined to cries. Like a young tiger, it scratched and bit +at the hands that held it; thus exhibiting a strange contrast to the +conduct of its adult kindred, the Bechuanas, who have an instinctive +fear of white men as well as a distaste for hostilities in any way. + +Holding the young black under one arm, Willem galloped after the cattle, +that, with the aid of the others, in less than an hour, were driven up +to the kraal. The only one missing was the ox whose hide had been seen +upon the hut. The child was delivered over to the chief. Swartboy +explained to him the circumstances under which it had been found; and at +Willem's request advised the Bechuanas never again to molest the +property of other people. To the surprise of our adventurers, not only +the chief but several of his elders loudly declared that they knew +nothing whatever of the cattle, or the women found in charge of them; +but, while they were thus talking, the two Makololo pointed out the men +who were loudest in declaring their ignorance, as the very ones who had +driven the animals away! + +To escape from the discordant clamour of their tongues, the hunters +turned hastily away, taking their cattle along with them. + +Hendrik and Arend felt some inclination to punish the blacks for their +treachery, as well as the loss of time and the trouble they had +occasioned. This, however, was forbidden by the great-hearted Willem, +who could no more blame the natives for what they had done than the bird +that picks up a worm upon its path. + +"These poor creatures," said he, "know no better. They have never been +taught the precepts of religion; and to them right and wrong are almost +the same thing. Leave them to learn a lesson from our mercy." + + + +CHAPTER FIFTY NINE. + +A LION HUNT. + +Once more our adventurers turned their faces homeward. + +Contrary to their expectations, the young camelopards caused them but +little trouble. A single rheim attached to the neck of each was +sufficient to lead them along. + +The manner in which both had been captured, had taught them in their +first lesson, that man's will was superior to their own; and they were +thenceforth either too cunning or too silly to resist it. + +Before driving them far along the road, there would have been little +danger of their straying, even if left free to do so. Like tame +elephants, they knew neither their own strength nor swiftness, and soon +became as easily managed as any of the horses or horned cattle. + +For several days no incident worthy of notice occurred, nor did our +adventurers much desire that any should. They had obtained all they +required; and even Groot Willem, before so enthusiastically fond of +hunting, would not have turned aside to kill the finest koodoo that ever +trod the plains of Africa, unless its flesh had been absolutely wanted +for food. + +After a journey of two more weeks, Swartboy found himself in a land +inhabited by many of his countrymen,--the Bushmen. It was a land he had +long been looking forward to visit, and with pleasant anticipations,-- +not from any sunny memory of youthful joy, but merely from that +prejudice in favour of native land, natural to all mankind. He had ever +represented to his young masters that the Bushmen were a race of noble +warriors and hunters,--that they were kind, hospitable, intelligent, and +in every respect superior to the countrymen of his rival Congo. + +They were now in a country inhabited by several wandering tribes of +these people, and where opportunities might not be wanting to test the +truth of Swartboy's assertions. + +One soon presented itself. Early one afternoon they arrived at a +settlement of Bushmen,--a kraal of their kind, containing about fifty +families. On learning that they would have a long distance to travel, +before finding a place to encamp, our adventurers resolved to stay by +the Bushmen's village for the night. + +The first exhibition given of the hospitality Swartboy had boasted of +was by the whole tribe begging for tobacco, spirits, clothing, and +everything else the travellers chanced to possess; while the only +consideration they could give in return was the permission to draw water +from a pool in the neighbourhood of their kraal. + +During the night a young heifer, belonging to the headman of the +village, was carried off by a lion; and in the morning two of the +natives were ordered to follow the beast and destroy it. The hunters +had often heard of the manner in which the Bushmen kill lions; and, +anxious to see the feat performed, they obtained permission to accompany +the two men on their expedition. + +The only implements carried by the Bushmen for the destruction of the +king of beasts were a buffalo robe, a small bow, and some poisoned +arrows, with which each was provided. + +The lion was traced to a grove of trees, about a mile and a half from +the kraal. To this place our adventurers proceeded, curious to see a +lion die under the effects of a wound given by a tiny arrow, as also to +learn how the Bushmen would approach such a dangerous creature near +enough to use such a weapon. + +Gorged with its repast, there was no difficulty in getting near the +lion. As the Bushmen anticipated, the fierce brute was enjoying a sound +slumber. + +Silently the two drew near--so near as almost to touch the sleeping +monster. + +The spectators, who had stopped at some distance off, dismounted from +their horses, and, with rifles ready for instant use, at a few yards +behind the Bushmen, followed the latter, whose courage they could not +help admiring. + +Only one of the Bushmen drew his bow. The other holding his buffalo +robe spread out upon both hands, went nearer to the lion than the one +who was to inflict the mortal wound. + +There was a moment of intense interest. In one second the lion could +have tossed the bodies of the two little men, crushed and mangled, to +the earth. + +In another moment the tiny arrow was seen sticking in the monster's huge +side between two of the ribs. Just as the fierce brute was springing to +his feet with a loud growl,--just as he had caught a glimpse of the +human face,--the buffalo skin was flung over its head. + +He ran backwards, turned hastily around, and disengaged himself from the +robe; and then, astonished at the incomprehensible encounter, fled +without casting another glance behind! + +So far as destroying him was concerned, the task of the Bushmen was +accomplished. The poisoned arrow had entered the animal's flesh, and +they knew he was as sure to die as if a cannon-ball had carried off his +head. + +But the Bushmen had still something to do. They must carry back to +their chief the paws of the lion, as proof that they had accomplished +the errand on which they had been despatched. They must follow the lion +until he fell; and, curious to witness the result, our adventurers +followed them. + +Slowly at first, and with an apparent show of unconcern, the lion had +moved away, though gradually increasing his speed. + +The arrow could not have done much more than penetrate his thick hide; +and, fearing that he might not die, Willem expressed some regret that he +had not given the brute a bullet from his roer. + +"I am very glad you did not," exclaimed Hans, on hearing Willem's +remark. "You would have spoilt all our interest in the pursuit. I want +to see the effect of their poisoned arrow, and learn with my own eyes if +a lion can be so easily killed." + +The wounded animal retreated for about a mile, then stopped and +commenced roaring loudly. Something was evidently amiss with him, as he +was seen turning as upon a pivot, and otherwise acting in a very +eccentric manner. + +The poison was beginning to do its work, and each moment the agony of +the animal seemed to be on the increase. He laid himself down and +rolled over and over; he then reared himself upon his hind legs, all the +while roaring like mad. Once he appeared to stand upon his head. After +a time he attacked a tree growing near, and, tearing the bark both with +claws and teeth, left the branches stained with his blood. He seemed as +if he wished to rend the whole world! + +Never had our adventurers, in all their hunting experience, been +witnesses to such terrific death-struggles. + +The sufferings of the great beast were frightful to behold, and awakened +within the spectators a feeling of pity. They would have released it +from its misery by a shot, had they not been desirous to learn all they +could of the effects of the poison. + +From the time the lion ceased to retreat, till the moment when he ceased +to live, about fifteen minutes elapsed. During that time the spectators +saw a greater variety of acrobatic feats than they had ever witnessed in +one scene before. As soon as the creature was declared dead, the +Bushmen cut off its paws and carried them back to the kraal. + + + +CHAPTER SIXTY. + +A SUDDEN REVERSE OF FORTUNE. + +On the third morning after leaving the Bushmen's kraal, our adventurers +were awakened by the loud cries of a troop of black monkeys that +appeared in a neighbouring grove. + +Something was giving them trouble. This could be told by the cries, +which were evidently those of distress. + +As breakfast was being prepared, and the cattle laden for a start, +Willem and Hendrik strolled towards the grove from whence the cries +came. They were now more frightful than ever, and translated from the +monkey language seemed to say "Murder!" + +In a tree where there were between fifteen and twenty of those +quadrumana, each about the size of an ordinary cat, was seen a young +leopard, trying to capture a black monkey for his breakfast. To avoid +this enemy, the apes had crawled out on the small slender branches, +where the leopard dared not follow them, knowing that his weight would +precipitate him to the ground. + +For some time our adventurers amused themselves by watching the abortive +efforts of the leopard to procure the means of breaking its fast. He +would pursue a monkey along the limb until the branch became too small +to be trusted any farther. + +He would get within two or three feet of the screaming ape, and then +stretch out one of his paws, while displaying his white teeth in a +smile, as though desirous of shaking hands with the creature he was +intending to destroy. + +Finding his efforts to reach that particular monkey useless, he would +then leave it, to go through the same game with another. + +One of the apes was at length chased out upon a large dead limb that +extended horizontally from the trunk. The top had been broken off, and +there being no slender twigs on which the monkey could take refuge, +there was nothing to prevent the leopard from following it to the +extremity of the branch and seizing it at leisure. There was no other +branch to which the monkey could spring; and it was fairly in a dilemma. +On perceiving this, it turned to the hunters who stood below, and gazed +at them with an expression that seemed to say, "Save me! save me!" + +The leopard was so intent on obtaining his breakfast that he did not +notice the arrival of the two hunters until they were within twenty +yards of the tree, and until he was close pursuing the monkey along the +dead limb. + +At this point, however, he paused. He had caught sight of "the human +face divine," and instinct told him that danger was near. He gazed upon +the intruders with flaming eyes, as if very little would induce him to +change the nature of his intended repast. + +"Reserve your fire, Hendrik!" exclaimed Willem as he brought the roer to +his shoulder; "it may be needed." + +The leopard answered the report of the gun by making a somersault to the +earth. There was no necessity for Hendrik to waste any ammunition upon +him. He had fallen in the agonies of death; and, without even waiting +for his last kick, Willem took hold of one of his hind legs and +commenced dragging the carcass towards the camp. + +The camp was not far-away, and they soon came within sight of it. To +their surprise they saw that it was in a state of commotion. The horses +and cattle were running in all directions, and so too were the men! + +What could it mean? + +The answer was obtained by their seeing a huge dark form standing in the +middle of the camp. They recognised it as the body of a black +rhinoceros, one of the largest kind. The fierce brute had taken his +stand in the middle of the camping-ground, and seemed undecided as to +which of the fugitives he should follow. His ill-humour had arisen from +the circumstance that, on seeking the place where he was in the habit of +quenching his thirst, he had found it occupied by strange intruders. + +A black rhinoceros would not hesitate to charge upon a whole regiment of +cavalry; and the manner in which the one in question had introduced +himself to the camp was so impetuous as to cause a precipitate retreat +both of man and beast,--in short, everything that was free to get off. +One of the young giraffes had been too strongly secured to effect its +escape. It was struggling on the ground, and by its side was an ox that +the borele had capsized in his first impetuous onset. The second of the +giraffes was fleeing over the plain, and had already gone farther from +the camp than any of the other animals. It seemed not only inspired by +fear, but a renewed love of liberty. + +The borele soon selected an object for his pursuit, which was one of the +pack-horses, and then charged right after him. + +Meanwhile Willem and Hendrik hastened on to the camp, where they were +joined by two of the Makololo. All the others had gone off after the +cattle and horses. The giraffe, in its efforts to escape, had thrown +itself upon the ground, and was fastened in such a way that it was in +danger of being strangled in the rheims around its neck. As though to +insure its death, the ox that had been gored by the borele became +entangled in the same fastenings, and tightened them by his violent +struggles. + +The first care of the returned hunters was to release the young giraffe. +This could have been done immediately by setting it free from its +fastenings; but then there was the danger of its following the example +of its companion, and taking advantage of the liberty thus given to it. + +As the ox, whose struggles were nearly breaking its neck, had been gored +by the borele and severely wounded, he saw it would be no use letting +him live any longer, and without more ado he received his quietus from +Hendrik's rifle. The giraffe was now released, and restored to its +proper fastenings. By this time the others had caught up with most of +the horses and cattle. + +None of them, except the one selected for especial pursuit by the +borele, had gone far, but, turning when out of danger, were easily +caught. This was not the case with the camelopard that had got loose +and fled among the foremost. Its flight had been continued until it was +no longer seen! + +It had entered the grove from which Willem and Hendrik had just come, +and there were ten chances to one against their ever seeing it again. + +Had Willem been on horseback at the time it ran off from the camp, he +would have stood a chance of recapturing it, but, as it had now twenty +minutes of start, the chances were very slight indeed. Not a moment was +to be lost, however, before making the attempt, and, accompanied by +Hendrik, Congo, and the dog Spoor'em, Willem started off for the forest, +leaving the others to continue the task of collecting the animals still +scattered over the plain. + +But one brief hour before, Willem Van Wyk was the happiest hunter in +existence, and now he was about the most miserable. One of the two +captives, for which he had suffered so many hardships, had escaped, and +in all probability would never be again seen by the eyes of a white man. +The realisation of his fondest hopes was delayed for a time,--perhaps +forever. + +One camelopard was of but little value to him. He must have two; and +fortune might never assist them in obtaining another. He was not sure +of being able to keep the one that still remained. Death might take it +out of their hands. It had been injured in the struggle; and, before +leaving camp he had noticed that the efforts of the Makololo to get it +to its feet had not succeeded. His great undertaking--the chief purpose +of the expedition--was as far as ever from being accomplished. + +Such were the thoughts that tortured him, as he urged Congo and the dog +to greater haste, in following the spoor through the forest. + + + +CHAPTER SIXTY ONE. + +THE LOST FOUND. + +The forest which Willem at first feared might be miles in extent, proved +to be but a mere strip of timber, through which he soon passed, +discovering an open plain on the other side. Nothing could be seen of +the camelopard, though its tracks were found leading out upon the plain. + +Willem's wishes were very difficult to meet. At first he was afraid the +giraffe would be lost in a dense forest, where he would be unable to +gallop after it on horseback. Now, when contemplating the vast plain +before him, he feared that the flight of the escaped captive might be +continued for many miles, and he regretted that it had gone out of the +timber. + +The trees would have given it food and shelter, where it might have +stayed until overtaken; but it was not likely to make halt on an open +plain. + +It must now be many miles off, since they could see nothing of it. + +The tracks could be followed but very slowly,--not half so fast as the +animal itself had made them, while going in search of the kindred from +which it had been so rudely separated several days before. The longer +they continued to take up the spoor, the farther they would be from the +animal that had left it. + +All this was fully understood by our adventurers. + +"It's no use going farther," remarked Hendrik. "We have lost the +creature beyond all hope of recovery. We may as well turn back to +camp." + +"Not a bit of it," answered Willem. "The giraffe is mine, and I sha'n't +part with it so cheaply. I'll follow it as long as I have strength left +me sufficient to sit upon my horse. It must stop sometime and +somewhere; and, whenever that time comes, I shall be there not long +after to have another look at it." + +Thinking that an hour or two more of what he considered a hopeless +chase, would satisfy even Willem, Hendrik made no further objections, +but continued on after Congo, who was leading along the spoor. + +The sun had by this crossed the meridian, and commenced descending +towards the western horizon. + +They had started from camp without eating breakfast; and their sudden +departure had prevented them from bringing any food along with them. +Thirsty and feeble from the long fast, and the fatigue of tracking under +a hot sun, they continued their course in anything but a lively fashion. + +"Willem!" at length exclaimed Hendrik, suddenly pulling up his horse, "I +am willing to do anything in reason, but I think we have already gone on +this worse than wild-goose chase, a good many miles too far. We can +scarce get back to the camp before nightfall, and I shall commence +returning now." + +"All right," answered Willem. "I can't blame you. You are free to do +as you please; but I shall go on. I need not expect others to act as +foolishly as myself. This is my own affair, and you as well as Congo +had better turn back. Leave me the dog, and I can track up the giraffe +without you." + +"No! no!! baas Willem," exclaimed the Kaffir. "I go with you and +Spoor'em. We no leave you." + +Willem, Congo, and the dog moved on, leaving Hendrik gazing after them. + +He remained on the spot where he had pulled up his horse. "Now this is +interesting," muttered the young cornet, as he saw them go off upon the +spoor. "I have been acting without motives,--acting like a fool ever +since we have been out on this expedition. Circumstances have driven me +to it and will do so again. Yes. I must follow Willem. Why should I +desert him when that poor Kaffir remains true? If his friendship worth +more than mine?" + +Spurring his horse into a gallop, Hendrik was soon once more by the side +of his forsaken companion. + +Willem had a strong suspicion that he was himself acting without reason, +in seeking for an object he could hardly expect to find. This sage +reflection did not prevent him from continuing the search. Half +distracted by the loss of the camelopard, he was scarce capable of +knowing whether he now acted sensibly, or like a fool! + +To all appearance Hendrik had only followed him for the purpose of +prevailing upon him to return. + +Every argument that could be advanced against their proceeding farther +was used by the young cornet,--all to no purpose. Willem was determined +to proceed, and persisted in his determination. + +Evening approached, and still was he unwilling to give up the search. + +They could not return that night, for they were now nearly a day's +journey from the camp. + +"Willem is mad,--hopelessly mad," thought Hendrik, "and I must not leave +him alone." + +They journey on together, and in silence, Hendrik fast approaching that +state of mind in which he had just pronounced Willem to be. + +But their journey was approaching its termination. It was nearer than +either of them expected to a successful issue. + +A clump of trees was seen rising up over the plain. They were willows, +and indicated the proximity of water. + +Towards these the tracks appeared to lead in a line almost direct. The +giraffe, guided by its instinct, had scented water. The horses ridden +by the trackers did the same, and hastened forward to the clump of +trees. + +There was a pool in the centre of the grove, and on its edge an animal, +the sight of which drew an exclamation of joy from the lips of Groot +Willem. It was the escaped camelopard. A second joyful shout was +caused by their perceiving that it was again a captive. + +The loose rheim, which it had carried away round its neck, had become +entangled among the bushes, and it was now secured so that they had no +difficulty in laying hold of it. Had they not come upon the spot, it +would have perished either by the suicidal act of half-strangulation, +from thirst, or by the teeth of some fierce predatory animal. + +The rheim was now unwound from the saplings to which it had attached +itself, and the giraffe released from its irksome attitude. No harm had +yet befallen it. + +"Now, Hendrik," exclaimed Willem, as he gazed upon the captive with an +expression of pride and pleasure, "is it not better that we have saved +this poor creature than to have left it to die a horrible death?" + +"Yes, certainly," answered his companion. "Much good may sometimes +result from what may appear a foolish course of conduct." + +Satisfied with the result of his perseverance, Willem was quite +indifferent as to whether his conduct had been foolish or otherwise. + +Congo did not seem the least surprised at the good fortune of his +master; probably for the reason that he had the utmost confidence in his +wisdom, and never for a moment had doubted that the giraffe would be +discovered. + +Willem never was without the means of lighting a fire,--he was too fond +of a pipe for that,--and near a large blazing heap of wood they remained +until the first appearance of day. + +The journey back to the camp was a tedious one, but was made with much +less heaviness of spirit than they had suffered when leaving it to go in +search of the lost giraffe, which fortune had so favoured them in +finding. + + + +CHAPTER SIXTY TWO. + +WITH THE HOTTENTOTS. + +On reaching the camp, Willem and Hendrik found their companions +anxiously awaiting their return. + +The horses and cattle had all been recovered, and the borele that had +caused their dispersion had been shot by Hans and Arend. + +Its attack had caused a delay of two days, and the loss of an ox. + +Again the journey towards Graaf Reinet was resumed, and day by day was +prosecuted with all the speed that could be made in safety to their +animals. + +The return journey was not completed until they had suffered many +hardships, and had more than once nearly lost the two young giraffes. + +On passing through the Hottentot country, they saw many large plains +from which the grass had lately been burnt; and not a morsel could be +obtained for the subsistence of their animals. Amid the herbage charred +by the fire, they frequently saw the remains of serpents and other +reptiles, that had been scorched to death. + +During the passage across these burnt tracts, the travellers suffered +much from hunger and thirst, as did also their animals. Such hardships +Groot Willem seemed not to heed. His only care was for the young +giraffes; his only fear that they might not safely reach their +destination. But each hour of the toilsome journey was cheered by the +knowledge that they were drawing nearer home; and all that was +disagreeable was endured with such patience as sprang from the prospect +of a speedy termination to their toils. + +The latter part of their route lay through a part of Southern Africa, +farther to the west than any they had yet visited. They passed through +lands inhabited by certain tribes of natives, of whom they had often +heard and read, but had never seen. + +Of some of the customs of those unfortunate people classed amongst that +variety of the _genus homo_ known as the "Hottentot," they one afternoon +became fully and painfully acquainted. + +Beneath the shade of some stunted trees they found an aged man and a +child not more than eighteen months old. The man, who could not have +been less than seventy years of age, was totally blind; and by his side +was an empty calabash, that had evidently once contained water. + +With the assistance of Swartboy, as interpreter, it was ascertained that +he had lately lost by death an only son and protector. There was no one +now to provide for his wants, and he had been carried far-away from the +home of his tribe, and left in the desert to die! + +The child had lost its mother, its only parent, and had been "exposed" +to death at the same time and for the same reason,--because there was no +one to provide for it. + +Both old man and infant had been thus left exposed to a death which must +certainly ensue, either by thirst, hunger, or hyenas. + +This horrid custom of the Hottentots was not entirely unknown to our +adventurers. They had heard that the act, of which they now had ocular +evidence, was once common among the inhabitants of the country, through +which they were passing, but, like thousands of others, they had +believed that such a barbarous custom had long ago been discontinued, +under the precept and example of European civilisation. + +They saw that they were mistaken; and that they were in the +neighbourhood of a tribe that had either never heard these precepts of +humanity, or had turned a deaf ear to them. + +Knowing that a Hottentot kraal could not be many miles away, and +unwilling to leave two human beings to such a fearful fate, the +travellers determined to take the helpless creatures back to the people +who, as Swartboy worded it, had "throwed 'um away." + +Strange to say, the old man expressed himself not only willing to die +where he sat, but showed a strong disinclination to being returned to +his countrymen! + +He had the philosophy to believe that he was old and helpless,--a child +for the second time,--and that by dying he was but performing his duty +to society! To be placed again in a position where he would be an +incumbrance to those whom he could not call kindred was, in his opinion, +a crime he should not commit! + +Our adventurers resolved upon saving him in spite of himself. + +It was not until late in the afternoon that they reached the kraal from +which the outcasts had been ejected. Not a soul could be found in the +whole community who would admit that the old man had ever been seen +there before, and no one had the slightest knowledge of the child! + +The white men were advised to take the objects of their solicitude to +the place where they properly belonged. + +"This is interesting," said Hendrik. "We might wander over all Southern +Africa without finding a creature that will acknowledge having seen +these helpless beings before. They are ours now, and we must provide +for them in some way or other." + +"I do not see how we can do it," rejoined Arend; "I'm quite sure that +they are now with their own tribe, and it is they who should provide for +them." + +A second effort was made to persuade the villagers to acknowledge some +complicity in the attempt to starve two human beings. But they had +already learned that their conduct in such a custom was considered by +white people as a crime, and, ashamed of what they had done, they +stoutly stood to the story they had first told. + +Strangest of all, the feeble old man confirmed all their statements, +and, as some proof of the truth of what they had said, he informed the +travellers that the chief and several others whom he called by name, +were men incapable of practising a deception! + +This he professed to know from a long acquaintance with them. + +The hunters were now within the territory over which the Colonial +Government claimed and sometimes enforced dominion, and the Hottentots +were threatened with the vengeance of English justice in the event of +their not taking care of the old man and child, or should they again +expose him as they had already done. + +They were told that a messenger should be sent to them within a few +weeks, to learn if their orders had been obeyed; and, having delivered +up the two helpless beings to the headman of the village, the travellers +once more proceeded on their way. + + + +CHAPTER SIXTY THREE. + +"THE DUTCHMAN'S FIRESIDE." + +A few more days' journey brought them into a neighbourhood inhabited by +several Dutch "boers." They were now travelling upon a track dignified +by the name of "road," which only benefited them so far as between the +rivers it conducted them without difficulty from one crossing-place to +another. + +For the first time in several months they saw fields under cultivation +by white labour, and were able to procure a substance called "bread." + +One evening, as they were preparing to encamp near the habitation of a +well-to-do appearing boer, they received an invitation from the +proprietor to make his house their home for the night. + +A heavy cold rain had been falling most part of the day, and to all +appearance the weather would be no better during the night. The +invitation was gladly accepted, and the travellers, grouped around the +wide hearth of the boer's kitchen fire, were enjoying that sense of +happiness we all feel to a greater or less extent when perfectly secure +from a storm heard raging without. + +The horses and cattle had been driven under large sheds. The young +giraffes were secured in a place by themselves. Congo, Swartboy, and +the Makololo were in a hut near by, with some Hottentot servants of the +baas boer. + +Their host was a free-hearted, cheerful sort of fellow, only too +thankful that circumstances had given him some guests to entertain him. +His tobacco was of the best quality, and the supply of "Cape Smoke"--the +native peach brandy--was apparently unlimited. + +According to his own account, he had been a great hunter during his +youth; and there was nothing he liked better than to relate incidents of +his own adventures in the chase, or to listen to the tales of others. +The only fault he had to find with our heroes was, that they were too +moderate in the use of his "Cape Smoke." + +He was a convivial man,--one who knew of nothing better to do after a +long day's work than getting what is termed "jolly" in the company of +friends. He did not care to imbibe alone, and he declared that nothing +looked worse than that, except to see a man drinking too often in the +presence of others, when they refused to do justice to his generosity. + +According to his own account, he had been hard at work on his farm +throughout all that day, and in the rain. Why, then, should he not +cheer himself after such protracted exposure? The "smoke" was the very +thing to do it. His guests were welcome to the best his house could +afford, and all the compensation he would ask in return for his +hospitality would be the satisfaction of seeing them make themselves at +home. + +On the part of the boer there was a strong determination to make his +guests intoxicated; but this was not observed by them. They only +believed that his hospitality was pushed a little too far,--so much so +as to be rather annoying. But this was a fault they had observed in +many, who were only trying to put on their best behaviour, and, +considering its unselfishness, it could be readily excused. + +Notwithstanding the many hardships Groot Willem and his companions had +endured in their various excursions, they had never deemed it necessary +to use ardent spirits to excess; and the frequent and earnest entreaties +of the boer, backed by his fat and rather good-looking "vrow," could not +induce them to depart from their usual practice of abstemiousness. The +boer pretended to be sorry at his inability to entertain his youthful +guests. + +Notwithstanding his assertions to the contrary, however, the hunters +passed a long and pleasant evening by his fireside. + +The supper provided for them, as well as everything else, except some of +their host's hunting stories, was very good. It was so seldom that the +man had an opportunity of entertaining guests, that it seemed +ingratitude on their part to deprive him of the pleasure he enjoyed; +and, yielding to his solicitations, they did not retire until a late +hour. + +But there had been one chapter in the conversation of the evening to +which none of our adventurers listened with much pleasure. It was a +statement made by the boer, after he had partaken of several glasses of +the "smoke." + +"Ish ver shorry you go get the money for the two _cameels_," said he. +"Mine two bruders and mine vrow's bruder stand chance to lose it now. +Ish ver shorry for them, you know." + +On further conversation it was discovered that his two brothers and a +brother of his wife had left for the north seven months before, on a +hunting excursion, their principal object being to procure the two young +giraffes for which the reward of five hundred pounds had been offered. +They were to visit the country of the Bakwains, and had taken with them +a native servant who belonged to that tribe. Their return was hourly +expected, and had been so for more than a month, though nothing had been +heard of them since their departure. + +It was but natural that the boer should prefer that his own kinsmen +might obtain the reward, instead of a party of strangers; and his having +so candidly expressed his regrets in that regard was rather a +circumstance in his favour. His guests ascribed it to his open, +straightforward manner, made a little more free by application of the +"smoke." + +It was not until an old Dutch clock in a corner of the kitchen had +struck two, that the young men--who pleaded their fatigue after a long +day's march--were allowed to retire to their beds. + +They were shown into a large room, where a good soft couch had been +prepared for each of them. Their arduous journeying seemed nearly over; +for they had reached a place where people slept with their faces +screened from the faint light of the stars, and without depending on the +nature of the earth beneath them for the quality of their couch. + + + +CHAPTER SIXTY FOUR. + +"STRAYED OR STOLEN." + +It was not until ten o'clock next morning that Hans awoke and then +aroused his companions. + +"We should be ashamed of ourselves," exclaimed Willem, as he hastily +commenced making his toilet. "We have swallowed too much smoke and +overslept ourselves!" + +"No," answered Hans, who was always anxious to prove himself the +philosopher of the company. "We should rather feel pride in the +circumstance that the small quantity we drank has produced so great an +effect. It is proof that we have not been in the habit of indulging in +the use of ardent spirits, and that pride we should ever strive to +maintain." + +The travellers were soon in the presence of their host and hostess, whom +they found waiting to do the honours of a well-appointed breakfast, to +which each of the hunters except Willem sat down. Willem could not be +contented to eat, until he had looked to the property in which he +professed to have a much greater interest than his companions, and he +would not sit down to the breakfast-table till he had paid a visit to +his darling giraffes. + +Walking out of the house he went toward the sheds where the cattle and +native servants had been housed for the night. On entering the hut +where he had left his black companion the evening before, he had before +him a melancholy evidence of the evils of intemperance. The four +Makololo were rolling about upon the floor, moaning heavily, as though +in the last agonies of death. + +Swartboy and Congo, more accustomed to the effects of strong drink, only +showed by their heavy breathing that they were endeavouring to recover +from their night's debauch by indulging in a sound slumber. + +They were quickly roused to consciousness by Willem, who used the toe of +his boot for the purpose; though even this rude appliance had no effect +on any of the four Makololo. + +The Kaffir sprang to his feet, and, as though trying to carry his head +in his hands, reeled out of the room. He was followed by his master, +who saw that all efforts at inducing the Makololo to resume their +journey would be for several hours unavailable. + +On moving around to the shed where the two giraffes had been tied, +Willem was somewhat alarmed by an indescribable expression seen on the +features of Congo. + +The eyes seemed as if about to start from the Kaffir's head! + +The distance between his chin and nose had alarmingly extended, and his +whole appearance formed a frightful picture of astonishment and fear. + +To Willem there needed no explanation. One glance was enough. + +The camelopards were gone! + +The Bushman and Kaffir had promised to watch over them in turns, and had +both neglected their duty by getting drunk. + +Willem uttered not one word of reproach. Hope, fear, and chagrin kept +him for a moment silent. + +Within his mind was struggling a faint idea that the giraffes had been +removed by some servants of the boer to a place not far-away,--perhaps +to a more secure shed. + +This hope was dashed with the fear that they had been stolen, or had +helped themselves to freedom, and might never again be found. + +During the first moments of his agony and despair Groot Willem had the +good sense to blame himself. He had been as negligent as either of the +two terror-stricken men now standing before him. + +He should not have left to others the sole care of what he prized so +highly. For the sake of a few hours of better fare than that to which +he had lately been accustomed, why had he neglected to look after a +prize that had cost so many toils and so much time in obtaining? Why +could he not have lived a few days longer, as he had done for so many +months, watchful, thoughtful,--on the alert? All would then have been +well. + +A search of five minutes among the huts and sheds told him that the +giraffes were certainly gone. + +The task was to recover them. Directing Swartboy and Congo to make all +the inquiries they could, as to the time and manner of their +disappearance, the great hunter turned despairingly towards the house to +communicate to his companions the misfortune that had befallen them. + +The news took away every appetite. The grand breakfast prepared by the +vrow and her dusky handmaidens was likely to remain uneaten; for all, +starting up from their seats, hastened towards the shed where the +giraffes had been confined. + +The hospitable boer expressed a keen sympathy for their misfortune, and +declared his willingness to spend a month, if need be, with all his +servants, in the recovery of the lost camelopards. + +"All dish comes of dranking do mush smokes," said he. "Mine beoples +last night all got more so drunk; put dey must do so no more. I shall +spill all de smokes on the ground, and puy no more forever." + +One of the giraffes had been tied to a post forming part of the shed in +which they had been shut up. The post had not only been torn out of the +earth, but from its fastenings at the top, and was lying on the ground, +six or eight paces from where it had formerly stood. Two other posts +adjoining had been pushed down, making a breach in the enclosure +sufficiently large for the giraffes to have made their exit. + +Had they been tied to trees as usual, they could not have escaped. The +rheims around their slender necks would have held them. + +Perhaps by the weight and strength of their bodies they had pushed down +the stockade, and the rheims had slipped over the ends of the posts +after they had fallen. In this manner they might have escaped. But, +though it seemed simple enough, still there was something strange in it, +and our travellers thought so. + +The captives had lately shown no disposition to get free, and it was odd +they should do so now. Moreover there must have been a premeditated, +jointly-contrived plan between them, and this could hardly be supposed +to exist. + +They were gone, however, and must be sought for and brought back. + +For this duty Congo was already making preparations, though with very +little prospect of success. Rain had been falling heavily all the +night, and had destroyed any chance of the lost animals being tracked, +even by Spoor'em. + +Within a large enclosure, contiguous to the boer's dwelling, more than +five hundred cattle had been penned up during the eight. These had been +turned out to graze that morning, and, in consequence, the ground was +everywhere covered with the hoof-marks of horses and cattle. + +A full hour was spent in finding a track that could, with any certainty, +be pronounced that of a giraffe, and this had been made by the animal +going in the direction of the sheds. Of course it was the spoor of the +camelopards when first led up on the evening before. + +"Hendrik," exclaimed Willem, nearly frantic with despair; "what shall we +do? Those giraffes are somewhere, and must be found." + +"They are just as likely to have gone in one direction as another," +answered Hendrik, "and suppose we look for them in the direction of +Graaf Reinet." + +This remark but increased Willem's despair, for it showed an +unwillingness on the part of his comrade to make any farther delay on +account of their misfortune. + +The boer declared himself willing to furnish horses and men for a +search, if the hunters could ascertain, with any certainty, the +direction the runaways had taken. + +Hans now volunteered a bit of advice, which was listened to by Willem, +as being the most sensible yet given. + +"Our late captives," said that philosopher, "have made the most of a +good opportunity for escaping. It was, no doubt, done under an +instinct; and the same instinct will be likely to guide them back toward +their native land. If we go in search of them, let the search be made +in the direction from whence they came." + +"Mine poys," broke in the boer, "dare ish no use lookin' if they goed +that way. Dey will not wait fast enough for anypoddy to catch up to +'em." + +Hendrik and Arend expressed themselves of the same opinion. + +"Congo, you black scoundrel!" exclaimed Willem, "where are our giraffes? +Which way shall we look for them?" + +In answer to this question the bewildered Kaffir could only shake his +aching head. + +Willem had great faith in Congo's instinct, and was not satisfied with +the limited information received from him. + +"Do you think, Congo, we had better follow the spoor we made in coming +here?" he asked. + +Again the Kaffir shook his head. + +"You sooty idiot!" exclaimed the distracted questioner, "answer me in +some other way. No more wabbling of your head, or I'll break it for +you." + +"I don't think at all now, baas Willem," said Congo. "My head feel too +big for the question you put 'um." + +Hendrik was about to observe that there was a vast difference between +the Kaffir and his master, but, not wishing to vex the latter any more, +he proposed that something should be done besides talking. + +"Hans," exclaimed Willem, "you stay here and look after our property. +All the others who wish it can come along with me; but whoever does must +get into his saddle in the shortest possible time. I'm off this instant +in search of the fugitives." + +So saying, Groot Willem made a rush towards the shed under which his +horse had been stabled, and, putting on the saddle with his own hands, +he sprang into it and rode hastily away. + + + +CHAPTER SIXTY FIVE. + +THE LAST OF A FAMILY. + +Hendrik and Arend, who had imitated his movements, alone followed Groot +Willem from the house. The boer, after promising so much, appeared so +dilatory in his preparations that no dependence could be placed on his +aid and the three hunters galloped off without waiting for any of the +farm, or any of his servants, of whom they had seen several. His excuse +for not making more haste to provide help was, that no one could tell +the direction in which the runaways had gone, and that to search for +them in the north, when the animals might have strayed south, was sheer +silliness. + +Much to the surprise or all, Congo had stayed behind instead of +accompanying Groot Willem, according to universal custom. The Kaffir's +solicitude for the safety of his young master had been so great on all +former occasions, and he had shown such an unwillingness to be separated +from him, that his present behaviour was a surprise to everybody who +knew him. He was allowed to have his own will and way, for it was known +that any efforts at making him useful, by denying him this privilege, +would be of no avail. True and faithful as he had ever shown himself, +his actions were seldom controlled by the others. + +"As soon as we get a mile or two away from the house," said Hendrik, "we +may be able to discover their tracks. It is no use our examining the +ground over which so many cattle have passed. But supposing we should +learn that we are on the right course, what then, Willem?" + +"Then we must follow it till the giraffes are retaken," answered Willem. +"I should have but little hope of catching them again," he continued, +"did I not know that they are now quite tame. I should as soon think of +my own horse absconding, and going a hundred miles into the wilderness, +to avoid me. We shall find the giraffes if we persevere; and, once +found, they won't hinder us from catching them." + +From the quiet behaviour of the giraffes for the last three weeks, Arend +and Hendrik could not deny the truth of Willem's assertions; and all +three urged their horses forward, more anxious than ever to come upon +the spoor of the strays. + +After passing beyond the ground tracked by the farm cattle, they once +more came out upon the so-called road, along which they had travelled +the day before. But for more than a mile, after the most careful +examination, no spoor of giraffe, old or young, was to be seen. Even +those made by them on the day before could no longer be distinguished in +the dust. The rain, with the tracks of other animals coming after, had +obliterated them. The state of the ground they were examining was now +favourable for receiving a permanent impression; and, as none appeared, +they became satisfied that the runaways had not returned that way. + +After a long consultation which came near ending in a wrangle, Willem +being opposed by his companions, it was decided that they should ride +round in a circle of which the dwelling of the boer should be the +centre. By so doing, the spoor of the lost animals should be found. It +was the only plan for them to take, and slowly they rode on, feeling +very uncomfortable at the uncertainty that surrounded them. + +The country over which they were riding was a poor pasture with patches +of thinly growing grass. A herd of cattle and horses, old and young, +had lately gone over the ground, and often would the eye catch sight of +tracks so like those made by a giraffe that one of the party would +dismount for a closer examination before being able to decide. + +To Groot Willem this slow process was torturing in the extreme. He +believed that the giraffes were each moment moving farther away from the +place. + +After the search had been continued for nearly two hours, a spoor was at +length found that was unmistakably that of a camelopard. With a shout +of joy Willem turned his horse and commenced taking it up. It was +fresh,--made but a few hours before. + +Under the excitement of extreme fortune, whether it be good or bad, +people do not act with much wisdom. + +So thought Hendrik as he called the attention of Willem to the fact that +they had started out for the purpose of finding the spoor but not +following it; that they would require the help of Congo and Spoor'em; +that they must provide themselves with food and other articles necessary +for a two or three days' journey. + +Believing that, by the time they could go back to the house and return, +the giraffes would gain a distance of not less than ten or fifteen +miles, Hendrik's suggestions seemed absurd, and his companion, without +heeding them, kept on along the trail. + +Hendrik and Arend could do nothing but follow. Before they had gone +very far, Arend made the observation that the tracks they were now +following appeared too large to have been made by the young giraffes. + +"That's all a fancy of yours," rejoined Willem, as he hurried on. + +"There appears to have been only one that went this way," said Hendrik, +after they had gone a little farther. + +"Never mind," answered Willem, "we have no time to look for the other. +It won't be far away from its companion, and we shall probably find them +together." + +Notwithstanding what Willem said, his comrades were convinced that they +were following the track of only one giraffe, and that larger than +either of those that had been lost. They again ventured to give their +opinion about it. + +"Nonsense!" exclaimed Willem. "There has not been a giraffe in this +part of the country for the last ten years, except the two we ourselves +brought here." + +This statement would have been indorsed by every settler for a hundred +miles around. For all that, it was a wrong one, as our adventurers soon +had reason to be convinced. + +Before they had gone another mile, the large body and lofty head of a +giraffe loomed up before their eyes! On seeing it, they put spurs to +their horses and rode straight toward it. They got within about three +hundred yards of it before their approach was discovered. + +For the first ten minutes of the chase that then ensued, the distance +between the hunters and the retreating giraffe remained about the same. + +Gradually it began to diminish. The giraffe appeared to become +exhausted with only a slight exertion; and on reaching a piece of marshy +ground, where its feet sunk into the mud, it made a violent struggle and +then fell over on its side. + +On riding forward to the spot, the hunters had an explanation of why the +chase was so soon over. They were only surprised that the creature had +been able to run at all. + +It proved to be an ancient male of which but little was left but the +skin and bones. + +It looked as though it was the last of its race, about to become +extinct. + +On its back and other parts of its body were lumps as large as walnuts, +the scars of old wounds, where musket-bullets had been lodged in its +body several years before! + +The rusty head of an arrow was also seen protruding from its side. + +It had the appearance of having been hunted for a score of years, and +hundreds of times to have been within an inch of losing its life. + +Its enemy, man, had overtaken it at last, and was gazing upon its +struggling not with exultation, but rather with pity and regret. + +They felt no triumph in having run down and captured a thing that had +been so long struggling with death. Groot Willem, who had been for a +time highly elated with the prospect of recovering the lost giraffes, +was again in great despondence. Much time had been squandered in this +purposeless pursuit. + +He was not one to yield easily to despair; and yet despair was now upon +him. There was every symptom of a dark night coming down, and it was +now near. Inspired either by pity or revenge, he sent a bullet from his +roer into the head of the struggling skeleton; and, throwing himself +into the saddle, he turned the head of his horse once more towards the +house. + +An attempt had been made to recover the lost giraffes. It had failed. +Night was close at hand. Nothing more could be done for that day, and +Willem now declared his willingness to return to Graaf Reinet and die. + +Hope had departed from his heart, and he no longer felt a desire to +live. + +Hendrik and Arend, although sympathising with him in their common +misfortune, exchanged looks of congratulation. They would now be +permitted to go home. + + + +CHAPTER SIXTY SIX. + +NEWS OF THE LOST. + +The sky had been overclouded all day, and continued so as the sun went +down. Over them descended a night as dark as Erebus. + +Perceiving the impracticability of getting that night to the house of +the boer,--a distance of ten or fifteen miles,--the disappointed +trackers dismounted, and staked their horses upon the grass, determined +to wait for the return of another day. + +The night was passed in fitful slumbers around a camp-fire, where they +were only visited by a flight of large moths, and some laughing hyenas, +that by their harsh cachinations seemed to mock them in their misery. + +They were in a district of country from which the most noble of its +denizens seemed to have been driven, and the most despicable only +remained. When morning dawned they again climbed into their saddles and +continued on towards the kraal of the boer. + +When, as they supposed, within about five miles of the house, they met +two strange horsemen coming in the opposite direction. + +"Goot morgen, shentlemens!" saluted one of the strangers as they drew +near. "I'm glat to meet some ones coming your ways. Hash you seen +anything of our horses?" + +"Do you mean those you are now riding?" asked Hendrik. + +"No, not these, but five other horses,--no, three horses and two +mares,--all mitout either sattles or pridles; one red horse mit one eye +and a white poot on the left behind leg, one mare mit a star on the +front of his head, und--" + +"No," interrupted Hendrik, "we have been out since yesterday morning, +but have seen no stray horses of any description; not a horse except +those we are riding ourselves." + +"Then we need not look in the direction you have been," said the other +horseman, who spoke English with a proper accent. "Will you please tell +us whence you have come?" + +Hendrik gave them a brief history of their course during the last +twenty-four hours; and, in doing so, mentioned the object of their +expedition,--the search after the giraffes. + +"If that's what you've been after," said the man who spoke proper +English, "perhaps we can assist you a little. From what you tell me, I +presume you must have been staying at the kraal of Mynheer Van Ormon. +Yesterday morning we were looking for our horses about ten miles south +of his place, when we saw two giraffes, the first I had ever seen in my +life. We were badly mounted, and unprepared for hunting anything except +our strayed horses, else we should have given chase." + +"Ten miles to the south of the kraal!" exclaimed Willem, "and we seeking +for them twenty to the north. What fools we have been. What were the +giraffes doing?" he asked earnestly, turning towards the man who had one +more awakened within him the sweet sentiment of hope. "Were they +grazing or going on?" + +"They were travelling southward at a gentle trot, but increased their +speed on seeing us. We were not within a quarter of a mile of them." + +Our adventurers were too impatient to stay longer on the spot; and, +after getting a few further directions, they bade the strangers good day +and hastened on towards the house. + +On entering its enclosure the first person they encountered was the boer +Mynheer Van Ormon. + +"I see pat luck mit you, mine poys," said the Dutchman, as they rode up +to him. "I knowed it would pe so. The cameels have goed too far for +you." + +"Yes, too far to the south," answered Willem. "We have heard of them, +and must be off immediately. Where are our companions?" + +"They goed away yester morgen to live where the oxen get grass. They +now waiting for you at the south." + +"That's all right," said Hendrik. "We must hasten to join them; but I +think we'd be better of something to eat first. I'm starving. Mynheer +Van Ormon, we must again trespass on your hospitality." + +"So you shall, mine poys, mit pleasure all around; put who told you I +vas Mynheer Van Ormon?" + +"The same two men who told us about the giraffes. They were looking for +some stray horses." + +"Dat mush be mine neighbour Cloots, who live fifteen miles to the east +of thish place. They say they see the cameels. Where an' when they see +'em?" + +"Yesterday morning, about ten miles south of this place, they said." + +"May be dey be gone to Graaf Reinet to say you are coming. Ha, he, hi! +Dat ish ver' goot." + +The boer then conducted his guests towards the dwelling. On passing a +hut by the way, the hunters were surprised at seeing Congo suddenly +disappear around a corner! + +On the part of the Kaffir, the encounter appeared both unexpected and +undesired, as he had started back apparently to avoid them. + +This was a new mystery. + +"Ho Congo! come back here," shouted Willem. "Why are you here? Why are +you not with the others?" + +The Kaffir did not condescend to make answer, but skulked into the hut. + +The boer now proceeded to explain that the Kaffir had expressed a wish +to be employed at his place, and had declared that he would proceed no +further with his former masters, who had cruelly ill-treated him for +allowing the giraffes to escape. He denied having done anything to +influence this strange decision. + +"This cannot be," said Willem. "There must be some mistake. He is not +telling the truth if he says that we beat him. I may have spoken to him +somewhat harshly; I admit having done so, but I did not know he was so +sensitive. I'm sorry, if I have offended him, and am willing to +apologise." + +Mynheer Van Ormon stepped up to the door of the hut and commanded the +Kaffir to come forth. + +When Congo showed himself at the entrance, Willem apologised to him for +the harsh language he had used, and, in the same manner as one friend +should speak to another, entreated him to forget and forgive, and return +with them to Graaf Reinet. + +During this colloquy the sharp eyes of the boer were glancing from +master to servant, as though he knew what the result would be. They +showed a gleam of satisfaction as the Kaffir declared that he preferred +remaining with his new master; and the only favour he now asked of +Willem was some compensation for his past services. + +Had Congo been one of the brothers, Hans or Hendrik Von Bloom, Willem +could not have done more towards effecting a reconciliation. At length, +becoming indignant at the unaccountable conduct of his old servitor, he +turned scornfully away, and, along with Hendrik and Arend, entered the +house. + +After seeing a joint of cold boiled beef, a loaf of brown bread, and a +bottle of Cape wine placed before his guests, the boer went out again. + +Hastily repairing to one of the sheds, he there found a Hottentot +servant at hard work in saddling one of his horse. + +"Piet," said he, speaking in great haste, "quick, mine poy! chump into +your saddle, and ride out to the north till you meet mine bruder and +Shames. Tell them not to come more so near as half a mile to the house +for one hour. Make haste an' pe off!" + +Two minutes more and the Hottentot was on the horse, galloping away in +the direction given to him. + +Having satisfied their hunger, thanked their host and his fat vrow for +their hospitality, and bidden them farewell, our adventurers started off +for the South, anxious to rejoin Hans, and continue the search after the +giraffes. + + + +CHAPTER SIXTY SEVEN. + +WHY CONGO TURNED TRAITOR. + +Unwilling to trespass any longer on the hospitality of Mynheer Van +Ormon, Hans had left the house with the intention to encamp somewhere +near it, and wait for the return of his companions. + +To this the boer had made but little opposition, and his guest proceeded +to prepare the Makololo for a removal. They were still suffering all +the horrors of a recovery from their first spell of intoxication, and, +on entering the hut where they had passed the night, Hans found them +full of that species of repentance that leads to strong resolutions of +future reformation. + +On being informed of the loss of the giraffes, their remorse seemed as +if it would tempt them to suicide, and one of them, while tearing his +wool-covered head, kept repeating the word _kombi_, _kombi_! + +Hans knew that this was the name of a virulent poison much in use +amongst the Makololo. + +The four unfortunate men were willing to take upon themselves the whole +blame of allowing the giraffes to escape, and seemed grateful for the +mercy of being allowed to live any longer! + +After the cattle and horses had been loaded, and all got ready for a +start, Congo expressed his determination to stay behind. + +"What does this mean, Congo?" asked Hans. "Are you angry at what your +master said to you? You must forget that. He meant no harm. What do +you intend doing?" + +"Don't know, baas Hans," gruffly answered Congo; "don't know nuffin'." + +Believing that the Kaffir was only displeased with himself for his +conduct on the night before, and that he would soon recover from his +"miff," Hans made no attempt to dissuade him. Accompanied by Swartboy +and the Makololo he moved away, driving the cattle before them, and +leaving Congo and his dog behind. + +He went in a southerly course, as the grass looked more tempting in that +direction. When about three miles from the house he came upon a grove +of trees, through which ran a little rivulet. On its bank he determined +to make camp, and await the return of his companion. + +The manner in which he had left the boer had been rather sudden and +unceremonious, and, if called upon to give an explanation of it, only +some half-developed reasons would have presented themselves to his mind. +Of these, however, there were several. One was the desire of removing +the Makololo, now under his sole care, from the temptation of swallowing +any more "Cape Smoke." + +This apprehension, however, was altogether groundless, and not even a +relief from aching heads and self-condemnation could have induced the +subjects of Macora to drink any more for the present. + +Hans possessed a philosophic spirit, and, under most circumstances, +could wait patiently. Swartboy and the Makololo were in want of rest, +to enable them to recover from their last night's debauch. The cattle +and horses were in need of the grass that grew luxuriantly on the banks +of the stream. All, therefore, could pass the day with but little +inconvenience arising from the absence of the others. + +As the night came on, the cattle were collected; and, availing +themselves of the habits to which they had been long since trained, they +lay down close to the large fire that had been kindled by the edge of +the grove. + +The night passed without any incidents to disturb them; but, just as day +broke, they were awakened by the barking of a dog, and soon after +greeted by a familiar voice. + +It was that of Congo. + +"I thought you would think better of us and return," said Hans, pleased +once more to see the face of the faithful Kaffir. + +"Yaas, I come," answered Congo, "but not to stay. I go back again." + +"Why! What's brought you, then?" + +"To see baas Willem; but he no here. Tell him when he come back to wait +for Congo. Tell him wait two days, four days,--tell him always wait +till Congo come." + +"But Willem will go to the house before he comes here, and you can see +him yourself." + +"No; may be I off with the boer oxen. I work there now. Tell baas +Willem to wait for Congo." + +"Certainly I shall do so," answered Hans; "but you are keeping something +hid from me. Why do you wish to see your master, if you are so offended +as to have forsaken him. What is your reason for staying behind?" + +"Don't know," vaguely responded the Kaffir. "Dis fool Congo don't know +nuffin'." + +"Der's one thing I mus say for Congo," said Swartboy, "he mos allers +tell the troof. He jus done so now." + +The Kaffir smiled as though satisfied with Swartboy's remark. + +After again requesting that Willem should be told to wait his return, he +hastened away, followed by the dog Spoor'em. + +There was a mystery in the conduct of the man that Hans could not +comprehend in any other way than by taking the explanation he had +himself given. Congo seemed certainly either to be a fool or acting in +a very foolish way. + +As the morning advanced, Hans began to believe that the trackers had +proved successful in their search. The spoor of the giraffes must have +been found and followed, or they would have been back before then. + +From his knowledge of Willem, Hans was certain that once on the spoor he +would never leave it as long as he had strength to continue. The +giraffes had become tame, and there was no reason why they should not be +easily retaken. But just as the sun had mounted up to the meridian, +this hope was dispelled by the appearance of Willem and his comrade +coming back empty-handed. + +"You have been unsuccessful," said Hans, as they rode up. "Well, never +mind; there is still a hope left us, and that is, to get safely home." + +"We have another hope besides that," replied Willem. "We have heard of +the giraffes. They were seen yesterday morning about seven miles to the +southward of this spot. They are between us and our home, and we are +not hunters if we don't recover them yet. We must be off after them +immediately." + +Swartboy and the Makololo were directed to drive in the cattle, and all +commenced making preparations for a departure. + +"We shall miss Congo and Spoor'em," said Willem, while the cattle were +being loaded. "We shall want them badly now." + +"Ah!" exclaimed Hans, "I had nearly forgotten to tell you that Congo was +here this morning, and wished me to say you were to wait until he came +to you. He was very anxious to see you, and said you were to wait for +him four days, or longer, if he did not see you in that time." + +"Fortunately there will be no need for that delay," rejoined Willem. "I +have just seen the ungrateful rascal,--not half an hour ago." + +"Indeed. And what did he want?" + +"Only to dun me for the wages due him for the last year of his services. +I have never been more deceived about a man in my life. I could not +have believed it possible that Congo would thus turn traitor and desert +me." + +The conversation was discontinued, as all became busy in making ready +for a start. + + + +CHAPTER SIXTY EIGHT. + +LIGHT OUT OF DARKNESS. + +In half an hour afterwards the hunters had broken up their camp. + +"I feel sorry about having to leave Congo behind," said Willem, as the +cattle were being driven across the stream. "Not that I care a straw +for him, the ungrateful wretch, but that we may be unable to find the +spoor of the giraffes, not having him with us. He and Spoor'em would be +worth everything now." + +"I think," rejoined his brother, "there's not much chance of our +recovering them. We are now in a settled country where they will find +but little rest. They will either be driven out of it or killed by +whoever comes across them." + +"I have thought of all that," replied Willem; "still, I shall hope for a +day or two longer. I can better survive the loss, if nobody else +succeeds in obtaining the reward offered for them; but should that +brother of whom the boer spoke, as being gone on a similar expedition to +ours,--should he perform the feat we have failed to accomplish, then I +shouldn't care to live much longer." + +Before they had gone very far, all noticed that there was something +wrong with Swartboy, who seemed also inclined to turn back, and was +muttering some gibberish to himself, as was his habit when in any way +perplexed or annoyed. The excitement in his mind at last became too +strong to be restrained, and, drawing near Willem, he asked:-- + +"What was that, baas Willem, you said jus now 'bout the bruder of dat +Dutchman?" + +"I hardly remember, Swart," answered Willem. "Some thing about his +going after giraffes and getting the reward instead of ourselves. Why +do you ask?" + +"But did they gone nort same as we been a doin'?" + +"Yes, so the boer told us." + +"How long was dat ago?" + +"Seven months, I think he said." + +"Why for you no tell me afore?" + +This question Willem did not think worth answering, and Swartboy for a +few minutes was left to his thoughts. + +Presently he recommenced the conversation. "Baas Willem," said he. "I +think we bess stop, and talk a bit. Congo no fool, but Swartboy. +Swartboy a fool, and no mistake 'bout dat." + +"Well, what has that to do with our stopping for a talk?" asked Willem. + +"The boer's bruder, he come back from the nort without catch any +giraffe," replied the Bushman. "I tink he got some now." + +A light suddenly dawned on the mind of Hans, who stood listening to this +dialect. The mysterious conduct of Congo appeared better than half +explained. + +A halt was immediately ordered, and all gathered around Swartboy. + +Nearly twenty minutes was taken up in obtaining from the Bushman the +information he had to give. From the answers made to about a hundred +questions, the hunters learned that, in the hut where he, Congo, and the +Makololo had been so freely entertained, they had seen a Hottentot who +had lately returned from a journey to the north. + +This Swartboy had understood from a few words the man had muttered while +under the influence of the "smoke." + +During the evening, the Hottentot had been called away from the hut, and +Swartboy had seen no more of him, nor thought anything of what he had +said. + +Now, however, on hearing that the boer had a brother who had gone +northward on a giraffe hunt, Swartboy conceived the idea that the +drunken Hottentot had not been there alone. In all likelihood he had +accompanied the expedition. It had returned unsuccessful; and the +boer's brothers had stolen the two giraffes that were now missing. + +The more this conjecture was discussed, the more probable it appeared. + +No doubt Congo had some suspicion that there was something wrong, and he +was keeping it to himself lest he might be mistaken. + +Had he stayed behind in the hope of ascertaining the truth? His rude +behaviour to his former master in the presence of the boer might have +been only a ruse to mislead the latter, and give an opportunity for +carrying out some detective contrivance. It was all in keeping with the +Kaffir character, and Willem was but too delighted to think that such +was the explanation. + +"I thought at the time I last saw him," said Willem, "that there was +something in his behaviour unlike what would be shown by a traitor. It +seemed to contradict his words. I believe that we have all been very +stupid. I hope so. I shall go back and see Congo immediately. I shall +demand an explanation. He will tell me all, if I can only get the boer +out of the way." + +"I have another idea," said Hendrik. "The two men we saw hunting for +horses, and who told us they had seen our giraffes to the south, were a +couple of liars. They did not speak like men telling the truth. I can +see it now: we were simpletons to have been so easily deceived. They +were the boer's own brothers,--the very men who have robbed us!" + +"Yes," said Hans; "and they had the assistance of Mynheer Van Ormon in +doing it. How easy it is to understand his profuse hospitality now. We +have indeed been duped." + +The belief that the giraffes had been stolen was now universal, and our +adventurers were only too glad to think so. They much preferred that +this should be the case than to think the animals had strayed. There +would be a far better chance of recovering them. + +It is easy to believe what we most desire, and all agreed that the +property had been surreptitiously taken from the shed. + +Without saying another word, Groot Willem turned his horse upon his +tracks, and rode back towards the kraal of Mynheer Van Ormon. + +The boer met him outside the enclosures, apparently surprised to see him +return. The moment Willem set eyes upon the man's face, he saw that +there was something amiss. He observed a strong expression of +displeasure, accompanied with a glance of uneasiness. + +"I have come back to have a chat with my old servant," said Willem. "He +has been with me for so many years that I don't like to part with him on +slight grounds." + +"Ver goot," answered Van Ormon. "You can see him when he come home. He +hash goed after the oxen. If you pleash, take him along mit you when +you leave." + +As the sun was now about setting, Willem knew that the Kaffir must soon +be coming in with the cattle, and he rode off from the house in the hope +of meeting him. Soon a large herd was seen approaching from the plain, +and, riding around it, Willem found Congo in company with two +Hottentots. + +While in the presence of his companions, the Kaffir would not speak to +him, but was apparently devoting every thought to the task of directing +the movements of the herd. His old master seemed unworthy of his +notice. + +"We have been all wrong in our conjectures," thought Willem: "Congo has +really deserted me. No man could keep up such an appearance as he is +doing. I may go back again." + +He was about to turn away, when Congo, observing that both the +Hottentots had gone a few yards ahead, and were busy talking to one +another, muttered in a low tone: "Go back, baas Willem, and wait at you +camp. I come dar to-morrow mornin'." + +Willem was not only satisfied, but overjoyed. Those words were enough +to tell him that his Kaffir was still faithful,--that he was acting for +the best, and that all would yet be well. He returned to his companions +as cheerful and happy as he had been two nights before, while sitting by +the Dutchman's fireside and, under the exhilarating influence of the +Schiedam. + + + +CHAPTER SIXTY NINE. + +THE KAFFIR DISCOVERS TOO MUCH. + +When Congo was made aware that the giraffes were missing, he believed +himself more to blame than any one else. Conscience told him that he +had neglected his duty. His regret for what had happened inspired him +with a strong resolve to do all in his power towards recovering the lost +animals. On examining the broken stockade through which they had +escaped, he had doubts as to its being their work. In crushing out the +posts with the weight of their bodies they must have made a noise that +he should have heard; for the giraffes had been tied within ten yards of +where he had passed the night. The posts to which they had been +attached had not been dragged away, as would have been the case had the +animals drawn them out with their rheim fastenings. He had a suspicion +that they had been taken down by human hands; but, as the others did not +appear to think so, he fancied there might be a possibility of his being +wrong. He therefore kept his suspicions to himself. Had he said that +the giraffes could not have knocked down the stockade without his +hearing them, he would have been told that he was too drunk to hear +anything, and his testimony discredited. He knew that he was not. + +He had observed something else to confirm his suspicion. He remembered +the Hottentot, who in his cups declared that he had lately been to the +north, where he had seen giraffes hunted and killed. He had heard the +Hottentot called out from among the company, and by a man who spoke +"boerish English." The voice was not that of the proprietor of the +place, whom he had seen early in the evening; and yet he had observed no +other white man about the establishment. + +Moreover, some saddled horses he had seen in the stables the night +before were also gone. It was these things that had determined him to +stay at the house and watch. On pretence of hiring himself to the boer +he was permitted to remain. + +Every day something turned up to confirm his suspicions. He had seen +the Hottentot sent off, while Willem, Arend, and Hendrik were eating +their breakfast inside; and, soon after their departure, he had +witnessed the arrival of two white men, who appeared to consider the +place their home. Those men, he believed, had been there on the night +when the giraffes were missed, and Congo suspected them to be the +thieves. He saw them go off again in the direction they had come, +equipped as for a hunting expedition, or for some distant journey. He +would have followed them, but dared not, lest his doing so might be +observed and excite the suspicion of the boer. + +Believing that they would not go far that night, he made up his mind to +track them on the following morning. Stealing away from the shed, where +he slept, he took up their spoor as soon as the first light of day would +allow of it, and, following this, he soon saw enough to assure him that +his suspicions were correct. + +A journey of ten miles brought him amongst some ranges of steep hills, +separated from each other by deep, narrow gorges. On ascending to the +top of one of these, he perceived a small column of smoke rising from a +ravine below. + +Throwing his hat upon the ground, and commanding the dog Spoor'em to +keep a watch upon it, he stalked forward and soon obtained a view of +what was causing the smoke. It was a fire kindled under the shadow of +some _cameel-doorn_ trees, as if for the bivouac of hunters. + +Judging by two animals that stood tied to the trees, Congo knew that +they who had kindled the fire were not hunters, but thieves. The +animals in question were giraffes,--young ones,--the same that Congo had +been driving before him for some hundreds of miles. + +Contrary to his expectations, there appeared to be but one man in charge +of them; and that, neither of the two he had seen the evening before at +Van Ormon's. The men he had been tracking must have visited the camp +and gone off again. Their absence was but of little consequence. The +giraffes were there, and that was all he wanted. He could now go back +and guide the real owners to the spot, who would then be able to reclaim +their property. Had the two men he had traced to the camp been seated +by the fire, he would no doubt have succeeded in accomplishing his +plans. But unfortunately they were not. + +After noting the topography of the place, so that he might easily +recognise it, he turned to depart. + +Before proceeding twenty paces on his way, he was startled by the report +of a gun. The sound was followed by a howl of pain, which he knew came +from the hound Spoor'em. At the same instant, trotting out from some +bushes on the brow of the hill, he saw two mounted men. One glance told +him they were the men he had seen the evening before it the house of Van +Ormon. They were those on whose track he had come. Crouching among the +bushes, he endeavoured to avoid being seen; but in this he was +unsuccessful. + +A shout from one of the men told him that he was discovered, and soon +after the hoof-strokes of the galloping horse told that they were +rapidly approaching his hiding-place. Though swift of foot, there was +no chance for him to escape; for all that, instinct led him to take to +his heels. For some distance down hill, which was very steep, he was +able to keep in advance of his mounted pursuers. But once on the level +ground, the horsemen soon closed upon him, and the chase was brought to +an abrupt termination by one of them striking him from behind with the +butt of his gun, and rolling him flat upon his face. + + + +CHAPTER SEVENTY. + +CONGO A CAPTIVE. + +The horsemen pulled up with a shout of exultation. + +"What did you stop for?" asked the one who had struck the blow. "Why +didn't you keep on running?" he added with a fiendish laugh, as he +leaned over the prostrate body of the Kaffir. + +"Yaas, why don't yer go on to tell where der two cameels be, to der +fools whom found um?" asked the other. "Why don't yer do datch?" + +The two men who were addressing the half-unconscious Congo were the same +two Willem, Arend, and Hendrik had met the day before,--the men who had +directed them to search to the south. One was the brother of Mynheer +Van Ormon, the other was his brother-in-law. They were men who had for +many years been living on the borders of the colony,--part of their time +engaged in fighting Kaffirs and Griquas, and robbing them of their +cattle, the other part in trading with the natives for ostrich-feathers +and ivory. They had lately returned from an unsuccessful expedition to +the north, the object of which had been to procure two young giraffes, +in order to obtain the reward or price offered for them by the consul of +the Netherlands. On seeing within the kraal of their kinsman Mynheer +Van Ormon, the very animals they had sacrificed so much time in vainly +searching for, they could not resist the opportunity of appropriating +them. Their idea was, to conceal the animals for a few weeks among the +hills, until those to whom they properly belonged, giving them up as +lost, should return to their homes. The giraffes might then be taken to +Cape Town, and disposed of, without the original owners ever knowing +anything of the trick that had been played upon them. + +Unfortunately for Congo, they had that morning been in search of +something for food, and had returned just in time to see him playing spy +upon their camp. + +"This is the villain who pretended to quarrel with his master and leave +him," said the man who had knocked the Kaffir down. "I told Van Ormon +to send him off with the others, but he was sure the fellow did not wish +to assist them, and could not if he would. By his folly our game has +been nearly lost. We've just been in time; but what are we to do with +the black brute, now that we've caught him?" + +"Kill him!" replied the other, who was the brother of Van Ormon. "He +mus never got to de white mens. Dey would come and rob us all." + +"Very likely. Some people are bad enough to do anything; but I have +half killed this fellow already,--you may do your share, and finish him, +if you like." + +"No Shames; as you pegins this little job, it is besh you finish it +yourself." + +Bad as were the two ruffians into whose hands Congo had fallen, neither +of them liked to give him the _coup de grace_, and, undecided what else +to do with him, they tied his hands behind his back. + +He was then assisted to his feet, and, reeling like a drunken man, was +led towards their camp. + +Congo soon began to recover from the effects of the blow, and became +sensible of the danger he was in. By their talk, he could tell that +they intended putting him out of the way. From their savage looks and +gestures he could see there was but little hope of his life being +spared. His captors would not dare to let him escape. He had learned +too much to be allowed to live. No assistance could be expected from +his master and companions. They were waiting for him far-away. + +"Is this the game you have brought back?" exclaimed the man sitting over +the camp-fire, as the others came up dragging their captive after them. + +"Yes, and as you are the cook, you must dress it for our dinners," +replied he who answered to the name of "Shames." + +"Well, why don't you tell me what this means?" interrogated the first. + +"Only this: we have caught a spy. We have been tracked by him to this +place. But there's no great harm done yet. We're in luck, and nothing +can go wrong with us. Our catching this fellow is a proof of it." + +A long consultation was now carried on between the ruffians, in which +they all agreed in the necessity of putting the prisoner to death. + +It would never do to let him live. He would in the end bring them into +trouble, even if kept a prisoner for years. His tongue must be silenced +forever. There was but one way of silencing it. That was, never to +allow him to leave the place alive. + +There was a point upon which his captors were a little in doubt. Had +the Kaffir undertaken the task of tracking them upon his own +responsibility, or with the knowledge and at the instigation of his +masters? In the former case only, would they be safe in destroying him. +In the latter, the act might be attended with danger. To make sure of +this, one of the three men--Van Ormon's brother it was--proposed going +back to the house, there, if possible, to ascertain how the case stood. +To this the other two readily consented; and, mounting his horse, he +rode off for the kraal of his kinsman. + +As soon as he was gone, the others tied Congo to a tree, and then +seating themselves under the shade of the _cameel-doorn_, they proceeded +to amuse themselves with a game of cards. + +Four hours passed,--hours that to the Kaffir seemed days. He was in a +state of indescribable agony. The thongs of hide that bound his wrists +to the branches were cutting into the flesh, and besides, there was +before his mind the positive certainty that he had not much longer to +live. + +The fear of death, however, scarce gave him so much mental pain as his +anxiety to know something of the fate of his companions, and his wish +that Groot Willem should recover the giraffes. He now regretted that he +had not revealed his suspicions at the last interview with his young +master. This might have saved the hunters from their loss and himself +from the fate that now threatened him. It was too late. He had acted +for the best, but acted wrongly. + +In the afternoon Van Ormon's brother came riding back to the camp. + +"Well! what news?" asked James, as he came within speaking distance. + +"It ish all right. Dey don't know nothing of what's up. Mine bruder +have constant watch over their camp. They be in von quandary, and will +soon go home." + +"Is Van Ormon sure that they hadn't any communication with this Kaffir?" +asked James. + +"Yesh! they had. One of them came to the house, and saw this fella +yesterday. But for all that, blackee never said von leetle word to him. +They were well watch while they wash togedder." + +"Then perhaps it is not all right, as you say. They may have the same +suspicion that led him here. Why the deuce don't they go off home? I +don't like their hanging about so long." + +"I tell you, Shames, it ish all right. We have only to get rid of the +spy. He must never see the fools who own him, again. What ish we to do +with him?" + +"Send a bullet through his body," said the man who had been left in +charge of the giraffes. + +"Yes; he must be killed in that way or some other, certainly," said +James; "but which of us is to do it? It's a pity we did not shoot him +down while he was running. Then was the time. I don't like the thing, +now that I've cooled down." + +Bad as the ruffians were, none of them liked to commit a murder in cold +blood. They had determined that Congo must die, yet none of them wished +to act as the executioner. + +After a good deal of discussion and some wrangling, a bright idea +flashed across the brain of Van Ormon's brother. He proposed that their +prisoner should be taken to a pool that was some distance down the +gorge; that he be tied to a tree by the side of the pool, and left there +for the night. + +"I see de spoor of lion dare every mornin'," said he, grinning horribly +as he spoke. "I'll bet mine life we find no more of dis black fella ash +a few red spots." + +This plan was agreeable to all; and at sundown the Kaffir was released +from his fastenings, conducted down the narrow valley, and firmly +spliced to a sapling that stood close to the edge of the pool. + +To provide against any chance of his being heard and released by a stray +traveller, a stick was stuck crosswise in his mouth, the bight of a +string made fast over each end of it, and then securely knotted at the +back of his head. + +After taking a survey of his fastenings, to see that there was no danger +of their coming undone, his cruel captors made him a mocking salute; +and, bidding him "good bye," strode off towards their camp. + + + +CHAPTER SEVENTY ONE. + +A FIGHT BY FIRELIGHT. + +Anxiously did Groot Willem wait for the next morning and the promised +visit from Congo. + +But the morning came and passed without any Congo, Willem became +impatient, and could not content himself any longer in the camp. + +"This will not do," he exclaimed, as he saw that the sun was again going +down in the sky. "We must not remain here. Perhaps Congo _cannot_ +come. Of course he cannot, or he would have been here before now. We +must look for him, but it will not do for all of us to go together. +Hendrik, will you come with me?" + +Hendrik readily responded to the invitation. The two mounted their +horses and rode off towards the residence of Van Ormon. + +From the behaviour of Congo when Willem had last seen him, the latter +was quite certain that his visits at the kraal were not desired. The +Kaffir probably supposed that they might interfere with his plans, by +bringing suspicion upon himself. + +This, however, did not prevent Willem from going to see him once more. + +Congo had broken his promise; and that was a proof that something must +be wrong. + +On their new visit to Mynheer Van Ormon, this gentleman did not take the +slightest trouble to show them civility. + +"Dat plack villen you call Congo," said he, "goed away last night. We +thought he vash mit you. When you fints him again take him to der +tuyfel, if you likes, and keep him dare." + +"Do you think he has gone away from this place?" asked Willem of +Hendrik, as they rode out from Van Ormon's enclosures. + +"Yes," answered Hendrik; "I see no reason to doubt it." + +"But why did he not come to me, as he promised?" + +"There's some good reason for his not having done so." + +"I wish I knew in what direction he has gone." + +"That difficulty may soon be removed," said Hendrik. "I fancy I can +tell it to a point of the compass. It will be found a little to east of +north." + +"Why do you say that?" + +"Because it was in that quarter we encountered the two men on the day +after the giraffes were missing. Moreover, we know they are not south, +for that is the way those false guides wanted us to take." + +Too excited to return to camp without doing something, Willem proposed +that they should ride out on the plain towards the north-east, and see +whether anything could be learned about Congo. To this Hendrik agreed; +and, after going southward about a mile from Van Ormon's house, they +turned, rode circuitously around it, and then struck off for the +north-east. + +They had no great hope of finding the object of their search, but it was +necessary for them to do something; and, as Hendrik's surmise was not +without some probability, they kept on. + +After making about five miles across the plain, they came within sight +of some hills that began to loom up on the horizon to the north-east. +They were still, to all appearance, about four miles distant. + +"Just the place where our property might be concealed," suggested +Hendrik. "No one would hide giraffes on a plain. If we do not find +them yonder, and this very night, we deserve to lose them." + +The sun was just setting as they reached the crest of the first range of +hills. Looking back over the road they had just travelled, a horseman +was seen coming across the plain, a mile distant from the spot where +they had halted. + +"If we watch that man," said Hendrik, "and not let him see us, we shall +probably find what we're in search of. If not one of the thieves +themselves, he looks to me very like a messenger going to them from Van +Ormon's. From the behaviour of the boer, I'm now convinced that our +giraffes have been stolen, and Van Ormon himself is the thief." + +Riding in among some trees, they dismounted, and, securing their horses +in the cover, watched the man who was approaching from the plain. + +In the twilight, they saw him toil slowly up the slope, a little to the +east of them, and then continue his course over the summit of the ridge, +going on toward the next. + +The night was now so dark that he could not be kept in sight without +their riding very near to him. In this there would be danger. The +hoof-strokes of their horses might be heard. To avoid this they +permitted him to keep far in the advance, and rode slowly and +noiselessly after, trusting to chance to conduct them upon his track. + +Fortune favoured them. + +On mounting a hill about half a mile from the place where they had last +seen the lone horseman, they came in sight of a camp-fire that appeared +burning in the bottom of the ravine below. Both dismounted, tied their +horses to the trees, and silently stole towards the light. + +It grew larger and brighter as they advanced upon it. Without the +slightest danger of being themselves seen, they drew nearer and nearer, +until they could make out the figures of three men seated around the +fire. These appeared engaged in an earnest confabulation. + +But for the messenger who had gone back to the house of Mynheer Van +Ormon, Willem and Hendrik might have long wandered amongst the hills +without seeing anything to reward them for their journey. As it was, +they saw that which caused Willem a thrill of joy,--so intense he could +scarce restrain himself from crying out. + +Congo's suspicions, whether based upon instinct or reason had not been +idle fancies. Tied to a tree under the glare of the camp-fire stood two +young giraffes,--the animals that had not strayed but been stolen. + +A hurried consultation took place between the two hunters. They must +obtain possession of their property, but how? They did not wish to be +killed in the endeavour to right themselves, and they did not wish to +kill those who had robbed them, if they could avoid doing so. + +"Let us give them a chance," said Willem. "If they will surrender the +stolen giraffes peaceably, we shall let them off. If not, then I mean +to shoot them down without mercy. We must take the law into our own +hands. There is not a court or magistrate within one hundred miles of +us." + +While they were thus hastily arranging upon a plan of action, the three +men seated around the fire commenced cooking their suppers. + +Only a few words more were interchanged between Willem and Hendrik, who +had come to an understanding as to how they should act. Carrying their +guns at full cock, they stepped silently forward side by side and close +together. Under cover of the timber they advanced within ten paces of +the unsuspecting thieves, and then boldly stepped out into the light. + +"Keep your seats," cried Groot Willem in a loud, commanding voice. "The +first of you that stirs shall die like a dog!" + +The man known as "Shames," showed signs of an intention to spring to his +feet and seize hold of a gun that lay near. + +"Don't! for your soul's sake, don't!" shouted the great hunter. + +The warning was not heeded; and the man rushed toward the gun, took it +up and at once brought it to the level. But before he could touch his +trigger, Willem's roer delivered its loud report, and the thief fell +forward on to the fire. + +Van Ormon's brother, not heeding the fate of his companion, made some +show of resistance; but this was instantly ended by a blow from the butt +of Groot Willem's gun, which he now held clenched in his hand. The +third of the thieves did not stay for similar treatment, but bolted from +the camp at a pace that would have left most horses behind him. + +The guns of all three were picked up, discharged, and then smashed +against a tree. The giraffes were untied and taken up to the place +where the horses had been left. After which, Willem and Hendrik mounted +into their saddles, and, leading the camelopards behind them, commenced +a backward march toward camp, where they had left their companions. + +The fate of the two men left by the fire remained from that moment +unknown to our adventurers. Nor did they care to inquire about it. +Before leaving the spot, it was seen that neither of them had received a +mortal wound; and, as there was still one unharmed to take care of them, +in all probability they recovered. _That_, at least, was the hope and +belief of the hunters. + + + +CHAPTER SEVENTY TWO. + +ALL RIGHT ONCE MORE. + +On finding himself tied to a tree, gagged, and abandoned Congo could see +but one chance of his being released from his confinement, and that was +by some beast of prey. + +He was quite sure that those who had left him there would never return +to relieve him. His reflections were anything but pleasant. They bore +some resemblance to those of a sick man, who has been assured by his +physician that there is _No_ chance for him to recover. + +The Kaffir was not one to give way to a cowardly fear of death, but +there was another thought in his mind almost as disagreeable, and that +was the chagrin he felt of not being able to see his beloved master +again, and make known his discovery of the giraffes. + +He even thought, while waiting for his approaching fate, that, if by any +means he could let Groot Willem know where his property was concealed, +he could then die content. + +An hour passed, and a heavy darkness gathered around him. It was the +shades of night. A few small animals of the antelope kind came trotting +up to the pool, and quenched their thirst. + +They were followed by some jackals. Other visitors might soon be +expected,--visitors that might not depart without rudely releasing him +from his confinement. + +Half an hour later, and his eyes, piercing through the gloom of the +night, became fixed upon a quadruped, whose species he could not well +make out. It appeared about the size of a leopard. It was crawling +slowly and silently towards him. + +It drew nearer; and just as he thought it was about to spring upon him, +it uttered a low, moaning noise. Congo recognised the dog Spoor'em. + +For a moment there was joy in the African's soul. The faithful dog was +still living, and had not forsaken him. If he was to die, it would be +in company of the most affectionate friend a man can have among the +brute creation. Groot Willem and the giraffes were for a while +forgotten. + +As the dog crawled close up to him, Congo saw that it carried one leg +raised up from the ground, and that the hair from the shoulder downwards +was clotted with blood. + +Spoor'em appeared to forget the pain of his wound, in the joy of again +meeting his master, and never had Congo felt so strongly the wish to be +able to speak. Gagged as he was, he could not. Not one kind word of +encouragement could he give to the creature that, despite its own +sufferings, had not forsaken him. He knew that the dog was listening +for the familiar tones of his voice, and looked reproachful that he was +not allowed to hear them. + +Congo did not wish even a brute to think him ungrateful, and yet there +was no way by which he could let Spoor'em know that such was the case. + +Not long after the arrival of the dog, Congo heard the report of a gun. +To the sharp ears of the Kaffir it seemed to have a familiar sound. It +was very loud, and like the report of a _roer_. It sounded like Groot +Willem's gun, but how could the hunter be there? Congo could not hope +it was he. Some minutes of profound silence succeeded the shot, which +was then followed by three others, and once more all was still. A +quarter of an hour passed, and hoof-strokes were heard on the hill +above; a party of horsemen were riding along the crest of the ridge. +Congo could hear their voices, mingling with the heavy footfall of the +horses. + +They were about to pass by the spot. "The thieves," thought Congo. +"They are shifting their quarters." + +They were not more than a hundred yards from the tree where he was tied; +and, as they came opposite, and just as he became satisfied that they +were going on without chance of seeing him, he heard a sort of struggle, +followed by the words: "Hold up a minute, Hendrik; my horse has got on +one side of a tree, and Tootla the other." + +The voice was Willem's, and "Tootla" was the name of one of the young +giraffes! + +Congo made a desperate effort to free his hands from their fastenings, +as well as to remove the stick that was distending his jaws. The +struggle was in vain. + +There appeared no way by which he could sound an alarm and let his +friends know that he was near. He could think of none. + +They were leaving him. They would return to Graaf Reinet, and he should +be left to die at the foot of the tree, or be torn from it by wild +beasts. He was almost frantic with despair, when an idea suddenly +occurred to him. + +He could not speak himself, but why could not the dog do so for him. + +His feet were still free, and, raising one of them, he gave Spoor'em a +kick,--a cruel kick. + +The poor animal crouched at his feet and uttered a low whine. It could +not have been heard thirty paces away. + +Again the foot was lifted, and dashed against the ribs of the +unfortunate dog, that neither made an effort to avoid the blow nor any +complaint at receiving it. + +The only answer vouchsafed was but a low, querulous whine, that seemed +to say, "Why is this, master? In what have I offended you?" + +Just as the foot was lifted for the third time, the air reverberated to +a long, loud roar. It was the voice of a hungry lion, that appeared to +be only a few paces from the spot. + +Spoor'em instantly sprang to his feet, and answered the King of beasts +by a loud defiant bark. + +The faithful animal that would not resist its master's ill-treatment, +was but too ready to defend that master from the attack of a third +party. + +In the bark of Spoor'em there was an idiosyncrasy. It was heard and +instantly recognised. + +The moment after Congo had the pleasure of hearing the tramp of horses, +as they came trotting down the hill; and the voice of Willem calling out +to him! + +When released from the tree, and the gag taken from his mouth, the first +words he uttered were those of apology to Spoor'em, for the kicks he had +just administered! + +From the demonstrations made by the dumb creature, there was every +reason to believe that he accepted the apology in the spirit in which it +was given! + +Willem compelled Congo, who had now been thirty-six hours without food, +to mount upon his own horse; but this the Kaffir would consent to do +only on the condition that he would be allowed to take Spoor'em up along +with him. + +They at once started away from the spot, and by an early hour of the +following morning reached the camp, where Hans, Arend, and the others +had remained. + +Swartboy, in the joy of seeing them again, increased by the sight of the +giraffes, declared that he would never more call Congo a fool. + +This promise he has never been known to break. + +In the afternoon, the journey towards Graaf Reinet was resumed. +Spoor'em being carried for two or three days on the back of one of the +oxen, snugly ensconced in a large willow basket, woven by Congo for that +express purpose. + + + +CHAPTER SEVENTY THREE. + +CONCLUSION. + +One evening, after a long day's journey, our adventurers found +themselves within a few miles of home. A gallop of an hour or two, +would place them in the society of the relatives and friends from whom +they had been so long absent. Arend and Hendrik were impatient to ride +forward, in advance of their companions. But each refrained from making +the proposition to the other. + +Greatly to their annoyance, they saw Hans and Willem halt at the house +of a boer, and commence making arrangements for passing the night. + +This the two did with as little unconcern as though they were still +hundreds of miles from home. + +Both Willem and Hans possessed a fair share of old-fashioned Dutch +philosophy, that told them no circumstances should hinder them from +being merciful to the animals that had served them so long and so well. + +Early next morning, as the hunters passed through Graaf Reinet, on the +way to their own homes, all the inhabitants of the village turned out to +bid them welcome. + +By most of the people dwelling in the place, the young giraffes were +looked upon with as much astonishment as the four Makololo felt while +gazing upon the spire of the village church. + +There was not an inhabitant of the place over ten years of age who had +not heard something of the expedition on which our adventurers had set +forth some months before. All knew the objects for which it had been +undertaken; and course the majority had prophesied another failure in +the accomplishment of what so many experienced hunters had already +failed to effect. + +"We are now returning home in a respectable manner," remarked Hendrik to +the others, as he observed the enthusiastic spirit in which they were +welcomed by the people. + +"Yes," answered Arend, "and it is to Willem's perseverance that we owe +all this." + +"I don't know that I've displayed any great perseverance as you call +it," said Willem. "I was as anxious as any of you to return home, but I +did not like to come back without a couple of young giraffes. That was +all the difference between us." The others made no reply, but rode on +silently, thinking of the generosity of their gigantic companion. + +On former expeditions our adventurers had been absent even a longer +time, but never did home seem so dear to them as now, and never did they +find on their return so warm a welcome as that extended to them now. + +The two young ladies, Truey Von Bloom and Wilhelmina Van Wyk, were +delighted at again meeting with their lovers, and, what is more, were +honest enough to admit that such was the case. + +Congo and Swartboy endeavoured to repay themselves for the hardships of +the past, by assuming grand airs over the other servants, domestics +belonging to their masters, as also by an unusual indulgence in eating, +drinking, and sleeping. + +Groot Willem had still another journey to accomplish. It was to +accompany Hans to Cape Town on his intended trip to Europe, and to +deliver to the Dutch consul the captured camelopards. This journey, +however, was not undertaken until he had given himself, his horses, and +giraffes a month's rest. + +During this time, the Makololo were treated with the greatest kindness +by all the household of the two families to which their young friends +belonged. Before returning to the north, each was presented with a +horse, a gun, and a suit of clothes; and several useful presents were +sent by Groot Willem to his generous friend and protector, Macora. + +Previous to his departure for Europe, Hans desired to be present at two +important ceremonies that must sooner or later take place, and in which +the families of Von Bloom and Van Wyk were both more or less interested. +But Hans was impatient to set out on his intended tour, and Hendrik and +Arend were much pleased that such was the case. Under these +circumstances, Miss Truey and Miss Wilhelmina were prevailed upon to +appoint an early day for making the two cornets the happiest of men. + +The day after the double marriage, Willem and Hans started for Cape +Town,--taking with them the giraffes and the ivory they had brought from +the north. + +The animals that had cost so much time and toil in procuring were +delivered to the consul, and the bounty money handed over. The +camelopards became fellow-passengers of the young philosopher in his +voyage to Europe. + +Willem parted with them and Hans as the ship was getting "under way," +and, on the same day, started back to his distant home in Graaf Reinet. +There he still dwells, endeavouring to pass his time in peaceful +pursuits; but this endeavour he finds great difficulty in carrying +out,--partly through his own restless desire to seek new adventures, and +partly through the solicitations of young Jan and Klaas, who, stimulated +by the tales told by their elder brothers, are now keenly anxious to +relinquish the pursuit of knowledge for that of game. + +Hendrik and Arend have no longer a desire to go in quest of such sport. +Home is now too dear to them; and both are satisfied to leave to their +younger brothers the pleasure of spending a few months on the far +frontier, and earning, as they so nobly did, the title of Giraffe +Hunters. + + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Giraffe Hunters, by Mayne Reid + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE GIRAFFE HUNTERS *** + +***** This file should be named 27911.txt or 27911.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/2/7/9/1/27911/ + +Produced by Nick Hodson of London, England + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. |